2015 Hyundai Sonata Hybrid User Manual

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.

However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that

our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and

explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,you may

find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

OOWWNNEERR''SS

MMAANNUUAALL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-

formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited

warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-

lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible

for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic

systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-

tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose

to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽✽

NOTICE

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other

persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

DANGER

This indicates that a condition will result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other per-

sons if the danger notice is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the danger notice.

CAUTION

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the

caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai.We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people who drive Hyundais.

The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-

fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal-

er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-

ual in the vehicle for their use.Thank you.

system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor America.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai

specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-5 in the

Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the Owner's Manual.

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts

1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same

parts used by Hyundai Motor

Company to manufacture vehicles.

They are designed and tested for the

optimum safety, performance, and reli-

ability for our customers.

2.Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-

neered and built to meet rigid manu-

facturing requirements. Using imita-

tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts

is not covered under the Hyundai New

Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other

Hyundai warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure of

Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the

installation or failure of an imitation,

counterfeit or used salvage part is not

covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchas-

ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts

Logo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to

the United States are packaged with

labels written only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold

through authorized Hyundai Dealerships.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information,

Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle break-in process / 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-6

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7

Introduction

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your vehi-

cle.Your Owner’s Manual can assist you

in many ways. We strongly recommend

that you read the entire manual. In order

to minimize the chance of death or injury,

you must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this

manual to best explain how to enjoy your

vehicle. By reading your manual, you will

learn about features, important safety

information, and driving tips under vari-

ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-

vided in the Table of Contents. A good

place to start is the index;it has an alpha-

betical listing of all information in your

manual.

Sections:This manual has eight sections

plus an index.Each section begins with a

brief list of contents so you can tell at a

glance if that section has the information

you want.

You will find various WARNINGS, CAU-

TIONS, and NOTICES in this manual.

These WARNINGS were prepared to

enhance your personal safety.You should

carefully read and follow ALL procedures

and recommendations provided in these

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

✽✽

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-

ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which harm, serious bodily injury or

death could result if the warning is

ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which damage to your vehicle could

result if the caution is ignored.

Introduction

Your new vehicle is designed to use only

unleaded fuel having a pump octane

number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not

use methanol blended fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain

maximum performance with UNLEADED

FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-

sions and spark plug fouling.

Gasoline containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),

and gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol (also known as wood alcohol)

are being marketed along with or instead

of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or

gasohol containing any methanol. Either

of these fuels may cause drivability prob-

lems and damage to the fuel system,

engine control system and emission con-

trol system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if

drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability problems

may not be covered by the manufactur-

er’s warranty if they result from the use

of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.

2.Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

Never add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified. (Consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for

details.)

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks one

time, otherwise the Malfunction

Indicator Light “ ” will illumi-

nate.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

Introduction

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-

prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-

cent gasoline, and is manufactured

exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel

Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with

your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in

poor engine performance and damage to

your vehicle's engine and fuel system.

HYUNDAI recommends that customers

do not use fuel with an ethanol content

exceeding 10 percent.

Other fuels

Using fuels such as;

- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,

- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and

- Other metallic additives contained

fuels,

may cause vehicle and engine damage

or cause plugging, misfiring, poor accel-

eration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,

abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,

etc. Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) may illuminate.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful man-

ganese-based fuel additives such as

MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl

Manganese Tricarbonyl).

HYUNDAI does not recommend the use

of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-

formance and affect your emission con-

trol system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the

cluster may come on.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-

hol) should not be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-

formance and damage components of

the fuel system, engine control system

and emission control system.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

may not cover damage to the fuel

system and any performance prob-

lems that are caused by the use of

fuels containing methanol.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

gasohol product which impairs dri-

vability.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

does not cover damage to the fuel

system or any performance prob-

lems caused by the use of “E85”fuel.

Introduction

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

good quality gasolines treated with deter-

gent additives such as TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent

deposit formation in the engine. These

gasolines will help the engine run cleaner

and enhance performance of the Emission

Control System. For more information on

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go

to the website (www.toptiergas.com)

For customers who do not use TOP Tier

Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have

problems starting or the engine does not

run smoothly, additives that you can buy

separately may be added to the gasoline.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not

available, one bottle of additive added to

the fuel tank at every 7,500mile or every

engine oil change is recommended.

Additives are available from your author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer along with informa-

tion on how to use them. Do not mix other

additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in

another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding reg-

istration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-

able.

No special break-in period is needed. By

following a few simple precautions for the

first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to

the performance, economy and life of

your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-

cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-

erly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200

miles (2,000 km) of operation.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehicles

or emitted from them are known to

the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or reproduc-

tive harm.These include:

• Gasoline and its vapors

• Engine exhaust

• Used engine oil

• Interior passenger compartment

components and materials

• Component parts which are sub-

ject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, terminals

and related accessories contain

lead, lead compounds and other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

reproductive harm.

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR).The main purpose

of an EDR is to record,in certain crash

or near crash-like situations, such as

an air bag deployment or hitting a road

obstacle, data that will assist in under-

standing how a vehicle's systems per-

formed.The EDR is designed to record

data related to vehicle dynamics and

safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less.The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and pas-

senger safety belts were buckled/

fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances

in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-

ation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving condi-

tions and no personal data (e.g.,

name, gender, age, and crash loca-

tion) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement,

could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data

routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,spe-

cial equipment is required, and

access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if

they have access to the vehicle or the

EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Introduction

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

ABS warning light

Brake system & Parking brake &

Brake fluid warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Malfunction indicator light

Air bag warning light

Cruise indicator

Cruise SET indicator

Immobilizer indicator

Low fuel level warning light

* For more detailed explanations, refer

to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.

Charging system warning light

Tail light indicator

Trunk ajar warning light

Front fog light indicator

(if equipped)

Door open position indicator

Low tire pressure telltale

(TPMS malfunction indicator)

ECO Guide

Electric power steering (EPS)

system warning light

EPS

ESC indicator

(ESC malfunction indicator)

ESC OFF indicator

Vehicle ready indicator

EV (Electronic Vehicle) MODE

Service indicator

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

Trunk overview / 2-5

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

OYFH013001N

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-12

2. Outside rearview mirror control

switch...................................................4-38

3. Central door lock switch....................4-12

4. Power window lock switch.................4-20

5. Power window switches....................4-17

6. Hood release lever............................4-21

7. Parking brake....................................5-16

8. Instrument panel illumination control

switch................................................4-41

9. ESC OFF button...............................5-19

10. Fuel filler lid release button.............4-22

11.Trunk lid release switch...................4-15

12. Fuse box.........................................7-51

13. Brake pedal.....................................5-14

14. Accelerator pedal .............................5-6

15. Steering wheel................................4-29

16. Steering wheel manual tilt control*...4-30

17. High voltage battery air intake ..........H12

* : if equipped

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

OYF013002N

1. Instrument cluster.............................4-40

2. Light control/Turn signals.................4-71

3. Audio controls ................................4-126

4. Horn .................................................4-30

5. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-48

6.Wiper/Washer...................................4-76

7. Engine start/stop button.....................5-5

8. Hazard warning flasher switch...4-70, 6-2

9. Audio*.............................................4-139

10. Climate control system...................4-83

11. Shift lever .........................................5-9

12. AUX, USB, iPod............................4-124

13. Power outlet .................................4-122

14. Passenger’s front air bag ...............3-48

15. Glove box .....................................4-119

* : if equipped

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OYFH071001

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Sub relay box....................................7-54

2. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-24

3.Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-28

4. Radiator cap .....................................7-26

5. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-22

6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-22

7. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-27

8. Air cleaner.........................................7-29

9. Fuse box...........................................7-51

10. Inverter coolant reservoir................7-24

* : if equipped

Your vehicle at a glance

TRUNK OVERVIEW

OYFH023007

1. Safety plug.........................................H10

2. 12V battery cover..............................7-34

3. Cooling duct ......................................H12

4. High voltage battery ............................H9

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-15

Child restraint system / 3-27

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-35

Safety features of your vehicle

Driver’s seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height

(4) Lumbar support*

(5) Seat warmer*

(6) Headrest

Front passenger’s seat

(7) Forward and backward

(8) Seatback angle*

(9) Seat warmer*

(10) Headrest

Rear seat

(11) Headrest

(12) Armrest

(13) Seat warmer*

*: if equipped

SEATS

OYFH031001N-1

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control,

and an accident causing death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• Do not allow anything to interfere

with the normal position of the

seatback. Storing items against a

seatback or in any other way

interfering with proper locking of

a seatback could result in serious

or fatal injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap por-

tion of the seat belt snug and low

across the hips. This is the best

position to protect you in case of

an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessary

and perhaps severe air bag

injuries, always sit as far back as

possible from the steering wheel

while maintaining comfortable

control of the vehicle. We recom-

mend that your chest be at least

10 inches (250 mm) away from

the steering wheel.

WARNING - Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot

area could interfere with the opera-

tion of the foot pedals, possibly

causing an accident. Do not place

anything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver respon-

sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with the seat-

back reclined could lead to serious

or fatal injury in an accident. If a

seat is reclined during an accident,

the occupant’s hips may slide

under the lap portion of the seat

belt, applying great force to the

unprotected abdomen. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result.

The driver must advise the passen-

ger to keep the seatback in an

upright position whenever the vehi-

cle is in motion.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupants

around the seat. If the seatback is

returned without being held and

controlled, the back of the seat

could spring forward resulting in

accidental injury to a person struck

by the seatback.

WARNING

Do not use a sitting cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and passenger. The passenger's

hips may slide under the lap por-

tion of the seat belt during an acci-

dent or a sudden stop. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result

because the seat belt can't operate

normally.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat

Manual adjustment

Forward and rearward

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up

and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and rearward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

OYF039002

WARNING

• Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If

objects are large, heavy, or must

be piled, they must be secured.

Under no circumstances should

cargo be piled higher than the

seatbacks. Failure to follow these

warnings could result in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop, collision or rollover.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,

do not remove the carpet in the

cargo area. Emission control

devices beneath this floor gener-

ate high temperatures.

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always

check that it is securely locked into

place by attempting to move the

seat forward or reverse without

using the lock release lever.

Sudden or unexpected movement

of the driver's seat could cause you

to lose control of the vehicle result-

ing in an accident.

WARNING

• Use extreme caution so that

hands or other objects are not

caught in the seat mechanisms

while the seat is moving.

• Do not put a cigarette lighter on

the floor or seat. When you oper-

ate the seat, gas may gush out of

the lighter and cause a fire.

• Use extreme caution when pick-

ing small objects trapped under

the seats or between the seat and

the center console. Your hands

might be cut or injured by the

sharp edges of the seat mecha-

nism.

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat cushion,

push the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

Automatic adjustment (if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by using

the control switch located on the outside

of the seat cushion.Before driving, adjust

the seat to the proper position so as to

easily control the steering wheel, pedals

and switches on the instrument panel.

WARNING

The power seat is operable with the

ignition OFF.

Therefore, children should never be

left unattended in the vehicle.

OYF039003 OYF039004

CAUTION

• The power seat is driven by an

electric motor. Stop operating

once the adjustment is complet-

ed. Excessive operation may dam-

age the electrical equipment.

• When in operation, the power seat

consumes a large amount of elec-

trical power. To prevent unneces-

sary charging system drain, don’t

adjust the power seat longer than

necessary while the engine is not

running.

• Do not operate two or more power

seat control switches at the same

time. Doing so may result in

power seat motor or electrical

component malfunction.

Safety features of your vehicle

Forward and rearward

Push the control switch forward or rear-

ward to move the seat to the desired

position. Release the switch once the

seat reaches the desired position.

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

Pull the front portion of the control switch

up to raise or push down to lower the

front part of the seat cushion. Pull the

rear portion of the control switch up to

raise or push down to lower the rear part

of the seat cushion. Release the switch

once the seat reaches the desired posi-

tion.

Seatback angle (if equipped)

Push the upper part of the switch forward

or rearward to move the seatback to the

desired angle. Release the switch once

the seat reaches the desired position.

OYF039005 OYF039007 OYF039006

Safety features of your vehicle

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)

(if equipped)

The lumbar support can be adjusted by

pressing the lumbar support switch on

the side of the driver’s seat. Press the

front portion of the switch to increase

support, or the rear portion of the switch,

to decrease support.

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger's seats

are equipped with a headrest for the

occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort

for the driver and front passenger, but

also helps to protect the head and neck

in the event of a collision.

OYF039008 OMG038400

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middle

of the headrest is at the same

height of the center of gravity of

an occupant's head. Generally,

the center of gravity of most peo-

ple's head is similar with the

height of the top of their eyes.

Also, adjust the headrest as close

to your head as possible. For this

reason, the use of a cushion that

holds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severe

injury to the occupants may

occur in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protec-

tion against neck injuries when

properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest posi-

tion of the driver's seat while the

vehicle is in motion.

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)

on the headrest support and lower the

headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the headrest:

1.Recline the seatback(2) with the

recline lever or switch(1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button (3)

while pulling the headrest up (4).

OYF039010

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat

with the headrest removed.

OYFH034201

OYFH034203

■ Type A

■ Type B

CAUTION

If you recline the seatback towards

the front with the head restraint and

seat cushion raised, the head

restraint may come in contact with

the sunvisor or other parts of the

vehicle.

OYFH034205

Safety features of your vehicle

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the release but-

ton (1).

2.Recline the seatback(4) with the

recline lever or switch(3)

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate

height.

Active headrest (if equipped)

The active headrest is designed to move

forward and upward during a rear impact.

This helps to prevent the driver's and

front passenger’s head from moving

rearward and thus helps prevent neck

injuries.

HNF2041-1

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest

locks into position after reinstalling

and adjusting it properly.

OYFH034202

OYFH034204

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

103

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the

front seats during cold weather. With the

engine start/stop button in the ON position,

push either of the switches to warm the dri-

ver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions

where the operation of the seat warmer is

not needed, keep the switches in the

"OFF" position.

• The temperature setting of the seat is

changed as follows :

✽✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the LO

or HI position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such as

thinner, benzene, alcohol or gaso-

line. Doing so may damage the

surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat

warmer, do not place anything on

the seats, that insulates against

heat, such as blankets, cushions

or seat covers while the seat

warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat warmers. Damage to the seat

warming components could occur.

WARNING - Seat warmer

burns

Passengers should use extreme

caution when using seat warmers

due to the possibility of excess

heating or burns. The occupants

must be able to feel if the seat is

becoming too warm and to turn the

seat warmer off. The seat warmer

may cause burns even at low tem-

peratures, especially if used for

long periods of time. In particular,

the driver must exercise extreme

care for the following types of pas-

sengers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-

abled persons, or hospital outpa-

tients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or

those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold

tablets, etc.)

OYF039013N

Switch

position

LO Center HI

Temperature LOW OFF HIGH

311

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on the

back of the front passenger’s and driver’s

seatbacks.

Rear seat

Headrest

The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-

rests in all the seating positions for the

occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort

for passengers, but also helps to protect

the head and neck in the event of a colli-

sion.

ONF039401

WARNING

- Seatback

pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects

in the seatback pockets. In an acci-

dent they could come loose from

the pocket and injure vehicle occu-

pants.

OYF039015

WARNING

For proper operation of the occu-

pant classification system:

• Do not place any items cumula-

tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg)

in the seatback pocket or on the

seat.

• Do not hang onto the front pas-

senger seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

123

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up (1). To

lower the headrest, push and hold the

release button (2) on the headrest sup-

port and lower the headrest (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as

it can go then press the release button

(1) while pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the head-

rest poles (3) into the holes while press-

ing the release button (1). Then adjust it

to the appropriate height.

OYF039047 OYF039048

WARNING

Make sure the headrest locks in

position after adjusting it to proper-

ly protect the occupants.

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middle

of the headrest is at the same

height of the center of gravity of

an occupant's head. Generally,

the center of gravity of most peo-

ple's head is similar with the

height of the top of their eyes.

Also adjust the headrest as close

to your head as possible. For this

reason, the use of a cushion that

holds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severe

injury to an occupant may occur

in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protec-

tion against severe neck injuries

when properly adjusted.

313

Safety features of your vehicle

Armrest

The armrest is located in the center of

the rear seat. Pull the armrest down and

you will find the cup holders.

Carrying long/narrow cargo (if equipped)

Pull the armrest down using the strap

provided on the armrest. Pull the cover

down while pushing the release lever

down.Additional cargo space is provided

to accommodate long/narrow cargo

(skis, poles, lumber, etc.) that would not

otherwise fit into the trunk.

OYF039019N OYFH031020N

CAUTION

• Make sure the engine is off, the

shift lever is in P and the parking

brake is applied whenever load-

ing or unloading cargo.The vehi-

cle may move if the shift lever is

inadvertently moved to another

position.

• Be careful when loading cargo

through the rear passenger seats

to prevent damage to the vehicle

interior.

• When cargo is loaded through the

rear passenger seats, ensure the

cargo is properly secured to pre-

vent it from moving while driving.

Unsecured cargo in the passen-

ger compartment can cause dam-

age to the vehicle or injury to it’s

occupants.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

WARNING

When you use the cargo access

opening behind the armrest, be

careful not to damage the high volt-

age battery. Do not remove the trim

covering the high voltage battery,

or load it with enough weight to

deform the trim. Damage to the

high voltage battery may cause

electric shock or burns that can

result in death or serious injury.

WARNING - Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to

prevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-

ing injury to the vehicle occupants.

Do not place objects on the rear

seats, since they cannot be proper-

ly secured and may hit the front

seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING - Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the

shift lever is in P (Park) and the

parking brake is securely applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo. Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if the

shift lever is inadvertently moved to

another position.

315

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt restraint system

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear

upon the bony structure of the

body, and should be worn low

across the front of the pelvis, chest

and shoulders, as applicable; wear-

ing the lap section of the belt

across the abdominal area must be

avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the occupant.

Care should be taken to avoid con-

tamination of the webbing with pol-

ishes, oils and chemicals and par-

ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may

safely be carried out using mild

soap and water.The belt should be

replaced if webbing becomes

frayed, contaminated or damaged.

It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in

a severe impact even if damage to

the assembly is not obvious.

(Continued)

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its job as

well. In a collision, it could even

cut into you. Be sure the belt

webbing is straight and not twist-

ed.

• Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. If the belt

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged, replace it.

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must

always be used whenever the car

is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective

when seatbacks are in the

upright position.

• Children age 12 and younger

must always be properly

restrained in the rear seat. Never

allow children to ride in the front

passenger seat. If a child over 12

must be seated in the front seat,

he/she must be properly belted

and the seat should be moved as

far back as possible.

• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back. An improperly positioned

shoulder belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned midway

over your shoulder across your

collarbone.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

163

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

The driver's seat belt warning light and

chime will activate to the following table

when the engine start/stop button is in

"ON" position.

1GQA2083

WARNING

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the seat

belt adjusting devices from oper-

ating to remove slack, or prevent

the seat belt assembly from being

adjusted to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, be

careful not to latch the seat belt in

buckles of other seat. It's very dan-

gerous and you may not be pro-

tected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and

do not fasten and unfasten the

seat belt repeatedly while driving.

This could result in loss of con-

trol, and an accident causing

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

• When fastening the seat belt,

make sure that the seat belt does

not pass over objects that are

hard or can break easily.

• Make sure there is nothing in the

buckle. The seat belt may not be

fastened securely.

(Continued)

Belts should not be worn with

straps twisted. Each seat belt

assembly must only be used by one

occupant; it is dangerous to put a

belt around a child being carried on

the occupant's lap.

317

Safety features of your vehicle

Warning pattern repeats 11 times with

an interval of 24 seconds.If the driver's

seat belt is buckled, the light will stop

within 6 seconds and chime will stop

immediately.

The light will stop within 6 seconds and

chime will stop immediately.

Seat belt warning (for front passen-

ger’s seat)

The front passenger's seat belt warning

light will activate to the following table

when the engine start/stop button is in

"ON" position.

The seat belt warning light will go off if

the vehicle speed decreases below 3

mph (5 km/h). If the vehicle speed

increases above 3 mph (5 km/h), the

warning light will blink again.

✽✽

NOTICE

• You can find the front passenger's seat

belt warning light on the center fascia

panel.

• Although the front passenger seat is

not occupied, the seat belt warning

light will blink for 6 seconds.

• The seat belt warning light can blink

when a briefcase or purse is placed on

the front passenger seat.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Light-Blink

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Unbuckled

Above 6mph

(10 km/h)

Continuously

Buckled 6 seconds

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Above 6mph

(10 km/h)

Continuously *

Below 6mph

(10 km/h)

None

OYF039060N

OYF039054N

■ Type A

■ Type B

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Light-Blink

Chime-

Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds None

3 mph~

6 mph

6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds *

↓

Stop *

Safety features of your vehicle

183

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system

with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the

retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into

the buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt por-

tion is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips. If you lean for-

ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will

extend and let you move around. If there

is a sudden stop or impact, however, the

belt will lock into position. It will also lock

if you try to lean forward too quickly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-

imum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt

should not be too near your neck. The

shoulder portion should be adjusted so

that it lies across your chest and midway

over your shoulder nearest the door and

not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster

into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).

To lower it, push it down (3) while press-

ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has locked

into position.

WARNING

• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-

priate height. Never position the

shoulder belt across your neck or

face. Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious injuries

in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts after

an accident could leave you with

damaged seat belts that will not

provide protection in the event of

another collision leading to per-

sonal injury or death. Replace

your seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

OHD036019

Front seat

B180A01NF-1

319

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear

seat 3-point system with combination

locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are

installed in the rear seat positions to help

accommodate the installation of child

restraint systems. Although a combina-

tion retractor is also installed in the front

passenger seat position, it is strongly

recommended that children always be

seated in the rear seat. NEVER place

any infant restraint system in the front

seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the fea-

tures of both an emergency locking

retractor seat belt and an automatic lock-

ing retractor seat belt.To fasten your seat

belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert

the metal tab into the buckle. There will

be an audible "click" when the tab locks

into the buckle. When not securing a

child restraint, the seat belt operates in

the same way as the driver's seat belt

(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It

automatically adjusts to the proper length

only after the lap belt portion of the seat

belt is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended from

the retractor to allow the installation of a

child restraint system, the seat belt oper-

ation changes to allow the belt to retract,

but not to extend (Automatic Locking

Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child

restraint system” in this section.

✽✽

NOTICE

Although the combination retractor

provides the same level of protection for

seated passengers in either emergency

or automatic locking modes, it is recom-

mended that seated passengers use the

emergency locking feature for improved

convenience. The automatic locking

function is intended to facilitate child

restraint installation. To convert from

the automatic locking feature to the

emergency locking operation mode,

allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully

retract.

B200A02NF

WARNING

You should place the lap belt por-

tion as low as possible and snugly

across your hips, not on your waist.

If the lap belt is located too high on

your waist, it may increase the

chance of injury in the event of a

collision. Both arms should not be

under or over the belt. Rather, one

should be over and the other under,

as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the

arm nearest the door.

Safety features of your vehicle

203

When using the rear center seat belt, the

buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be

used.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should auto-

matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to

be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Passenger front seat belt lower

anchor connection

The front seat passenger seat belt has a

serviceable lower anchor that should

NEVER be disconnected except when

being serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. Disconnecting the

lower anchor may result in serious injury

in death if an accident occurs while the

seat belt is being worn.

B210A01NF-1 OYFH041138N

OYF039022N

321

Safety features of your vehicle

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and

front passenger's pre-tensioner seat

belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is

to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly

against the occupant's body in certain

frontal collisions or side collisions. The

pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated

in crashes where the frontal collision or

side collisions is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if

the occupant tries to lean forward too

quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock

into position. In certain frontal collisions

or side collisions, the pre-tensioner will

activate and pull the seat belt into tighter

contact against the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive tension

on the driver or passenger's seat belt

when the pre-tensioner activates, the

load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will

release some of the pressure on the

affected seat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

WARNING

• Do not put anything near the

buckle. Placing objects near the

buckle can adversely affect the

buckle pre-tensioner and may

increase the risk of personal

injury in the event of a collision.

• For your safety, be sure that the

belt webbing is not loose or twist-

ed and always sit properly on

your seat.

OED030300

OBH038100

Safety features of your vehicle

223

CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not

working properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if there is no

malfunction of the SRS air bag. If

the SRS air bag warning light does

not illuminate when the engine

start/stop button is turned ON, or if

it remains illuminated after illumi-

nating for approximately 6 seconds,

or if it illuminates while the vehicle

is being driven, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-

tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag

system as soon as possible.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be

activated in certain frontal collisions

or side collisions.

The pre-tensioners will not be activat-

ed if the seat belts are not being worn

at the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are

activated, a loud noise may be heard

and fine dust, which may appear to be

smoke, may be visible in the passenger

compartment. These are normal oper-

ating conditions and are not haz-

ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should

not be breathed for prolonged peri-

ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-

ed.

• Because the sensor that activates the

SRS air bag is connected with the pre-

tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag

warning light on the instrument

panel will illuminate for approximate-

ly 6 seconds after the engine start/stop

button has been turned to the ON

position, and then it should turn off.

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a

pre-tensioner seat belt:

1.The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the proper

position. Please read and follow

all of the important information

and precautions about your vehi-

cle’s occupant safety features –

including seat belts and air bags

– that are provided in this manu-

al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-

gers always wear seat belts prop-

erly.

323

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt precautions

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat belts

must be replaced. All seat belts,

of any type, should always be

replaced after they have been

worn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat belt

assembly mechanisms become

hot during activation. Do not

touch the pre-tensioner seat belt

assemblies for several minutes

after they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect or

replace the pre-tensioner seat

belts yourself. This must be done

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.

• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, and

failure to heed the warnings not

to strike, modify, inspect, replace,

service or repair the pre-tension-

er seat belt assemblies may lead

to improper operation or inadver-

tent activation and serious injury.

(Continued)

• Always wear the seat belts when

driving or riding in a motor vehi-

cle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner

seat belt must be discarded, con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must

wear their seat belts at all times.

Seat belts and child restraints

reduce the risk of serious or fatal

injuries for all occupants in the

event of a collision or sudden stop.

Without a seat belt, occupants

could be shifted too close to a

deploying air bag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the

vehicle. Properly worn seat belts

greatly reduce these hazards.

Even with advanced air bags,

unbelted occupants can be severe-

ly injured by a deploying air bag.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant seating contained in this man-

ual.

Safety features of your vehicle

243

Infant or small child

All 50 states have child restraint laws.You

should be aware of the specific require-

ments in your state. Child and/or infant

seats must be properly placed and

installed in the rear seat. For more infor-

mation about the use of these restraints,

refer to “Child restraint system” in this

section.

✽✽

NOTICE

Small children are best protected from

injury in an accident when properly

restrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. Before buying any

child restraint system, make sure that it

has a label certifying that it meets

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

213. The restraint must be appropriate

for your child's height and weight.

Check the label on the child restraint for

this information. Refer to “Child

restraint system” in this section.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child

restraint systems should always occupy

the rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts.The lap portion should

be fastened snug on the hips and as low

as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt out of

position. Children are afforded the most

safety in the event of an accident when

they are restrained by a proper restraint

system in the rear seat. If a larger child

(over age 12) must be seated in the front

seat, the child should be securely

restrained by the available lap/shoulder

belt and the seat should be placed in the

rearmost position. Children age 12 and

under should be restrained securely in

the rear seat. NEVER place a child age

12 and under in the front seat. NEVER

place a rear facing child seat in the front

seat of a vehicle.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs

to be properly restrained at all

times, including infants and chil-

dren. Never hold a child in your

arms or lap when riding in a vehi-

cle. The violent forces created dur-

ing a crash will tear the child from

your arms and throw the child

against the interior. Always use a

child restraint appropriate for your

child's height and weight.

325

Safety features of your vehicle

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-

es the child’s neck or face, try placing the

child closer to the center of the vehicle. If

the shoulder belt still touches their face

or neck they need to be returned to a

child restraint system.

Pregnant women

The use of a seat belt is recommended

for pregnant women to lessen the chance

of injury in an accident.When a seat belt

is used, the lap belt portion should be

placed as low and snugly as possible on

the hips, not across the abdomen. For

specific recommendations, consult a

physician.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should con-

sult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the

event of an accident and to achieve max-

imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-

tem, all passengers should be sitting up

and the front and rear seats should be in

an upright position when the car is mov-

ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper

protection if the person is lying down in

the rear seat or if the front and rear seats

are in a reclined position.

WARNING - Pregnant

women

Pregnant women must never place

the lap portion of the safety belt

over the area of the abdomen

where the unborn child is located

or above the abdomen where the

belt could seriously injure or even

cause the death of the unborn child

during an impact.

WARNING - Shoulder belts

on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be

in contact with a child’s neck or

face while the vehicle is in

motion.

• If seat belts are not properly worn

and adjusted on children, there is

a risk of death or serious injury.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disas-

sembled or modified. In addition, care

should be taken to assure that seat belts

and belt hardware are not damaged by

seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected peri-

odically for wear or damage of any kind.

Any damaged parts should be replaced

as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.

If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solution

and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong

detergents or abrasives should not be

used because they may damage and

weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an accident.

This should be done even if no damage

is visible. Additional questions concern-

ing seat belt operation should be directed

to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a col-

lision or sudden stop. The protec-

tion of your restraint system (seat

belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seat.

Seat belts must be snug against

your hips and chest to work proper-

ly. The more the seatback is

reclined, the greater the chance

that an occupant's hips will slide

under the lap belt causing serious

internal injuries or the occupant's

neck could strike the shoulder belt.

Drivers and passengers should

always sit well back in their seats,

properly belted, and with the seat-

backs upright.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after the rear

seatback was folded down, be care-

ful not to damage the seat belt web-

bing or buckle. Be sure that the

webbing or buckle does not get

caught or pinched in the rear seat.

A seat belt with damaged webbing

or buckle will not be as strong and

could possibly fail during a colli-

sion or sudden stop, resulting in

serious injury.

327

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passen-

ger seat can be forcefully struck

by an inflating air bag resulting in

serious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the child restraint

system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use of

the child restraint.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car and

your child is securely restrained

in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms or

lap when riding in a vehicle. The

violent forces created during a

crash will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into the

child causing serious internal

injuries.

(Continued)

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in the

rear seat and must always be properly

restrained to minimize the risk of injury in

an accident, sudden stop or sudden

maneuver. According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in the front

seat.Larger children not in a child restraint

should use one of the seat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your state. Child and/or

infant safety seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat.You

must use a commercially available child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS).

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the

lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or

by a LATCH system (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a

crash if their restraints are not properly

secured. For small children and babies, a

child seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraint

system, make sure it fits your car seat and

seat belts, and fits your child.Follow all the

instructions provided by the manufacturer

when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never

install a child or infant seat on the

front passenger's seat. Should an

accident occur and cause the

passenger-side air bag to deploy,

it could severely injure or kill an

infant or child seated in an infant

or child seat. Thus only use a

child restraint in the rear seat of

your vehicle.

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sunny

day, even if the outside tempera-

ture does not feel hot. Be sure to

check the seat cover and buckles

before placing a child there.

• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the lug-

gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden

stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injured

or killed by an inflating air bag.

All children, even those too large

for child restraints, must ride in

the rear seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

283

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of

a child seat or infant seat is required.This

child seat or infant seat should be of

appropriate size for the child and should

be installed in accordance with the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a short

time. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in serious

injuries to children inside. Even

very young children may inadver-

tently cause the vehicle to move,

entangle themselves in the win-

dows, or lock themselves or oth-

ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any

two persons, to use the same

seat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.

Never let a child ride with the

shoulder belt under their arm or

behind their back. Always proper-

ly position and secure children in

the rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floor of a

moving vehicle. During a colli-

sion or sudden stop, the child

can be violently thrown against

the vehicle’s interior, resulting in

serious injury.

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate security in an acci-

dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is parked

in direct sunlight. Always check

seat belt buckles before fasten-

ing them over a child.

• After an accident, have an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer check the

child restraint system, seat belt,

tether anchor and lower anchor.

• If there is not enough space to

place the child restraint system

because of the driver's seat,

install the child restraint system

in the rear right seat.

CRS09

OYF039056N

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

329

Safety features of your vehicle

For safety reasons, we recommend that

the child restraint system be used in the

rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts move

freely under normal conditions and only

lock under extreme or emergency condi-

tions (emergency locking mode), you

must manually change these seat belts

to the automatic locking mode to secure

a child restraint.

Placing a passenger seat belt into

the automatic locking mode

The automatic locking mode will help

prevent the normal movement of the

child in the vehicle from causing the seat

belt to loosen and compromise the child

restraint system. To secure a child

restraint system, use the following proce-

dure.

WARNING - Child seat

installation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the vehicle and the child is not

properly restrained in the child

restraint. Before installing the

child restraint system, read the

instructions supplied by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operate

as described in this section, have

the system checked immediately

by your authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual's

instructions regarding child

restraint systems and the

instructions provided with the

child restraint system could

increase the chance and/or

severity of injury in an accident.

• If the vehicle headrest prevents

proper installation of a child seat,

the headrest of the respective

seating position shall be read-

justed or entirely removed.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger

seat, because of the danger that an

inflating passenger-side air bag

could impact the rear-facing child

restraint and kill the child.

E2MS103005

Safety features of your vehicle

303

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder belt

around or through the restraint, follow-

ing the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.Be sure the seat belt web-

bing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into

the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”

sound.

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat

belt all the way out.When the shoulder

portion of the seat belt is fully extend-

ed, it will shift the retractor to the “auto-

matic locking” (child restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of

the seat belt to retract and listen for an

audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.

This indicates that the retractor is in

the “automatic locking”mode.If no dis-

tinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3

and 4.

OBH039102

OEN036101

OBH039103

331

Safety features of your vehicle

5. Remove as much slack from the belt

as possible by pushing down on the

child restraint system while feeding the

shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat belt is

holding it firmly in place. If it is not,

release the seat belt and repeat steps

2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the

“Automatic locking” mode by attempt-

ing to pull more of the seat belt out of

the retractor.If you cannot, the retractor

is in the “Automatic locking” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the

release button on the buckle and then

pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the

restraint and allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position, the

retractor will automatically switch

from the “Automatic locking” mode to

the emergency locking mode for nor-

mal adult usage.

Securing a child restraint seat with

“Tether Anchor” system

Child restraint hook holders are located

on the package tray.

OEN036104

WARNING - Automatic

locking mode

The lap/shoulder belt automatically

returns to the “emergency lock

mode”whenever the belt is allowed

to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-

ceding seven steps must be fol-

lowed each time a child restraint is

installed.

If the retractor is not in the

Automatic Locking mode, the child

restraint can move when your vehi-

cle turns or stops suddenly. A child

can be seriously injured or killed if

the child restraint is not properly

anchored to the car, including set-

ting the retractor to the Automatic

Locking mode.

OYF039023A

Safety features of your vehicle

323

1. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable head-

rests, route the tether strap under the

headrest and between the headrest

posts, otherwise route the tether strap

over the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

appropriate child restraint hook holder

and tighten to secure the child restraint

seat.

OYF039024N

WARNING - Child restraint

check

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing and

pulling it in different directions.

Incorrectly fitted child restraints

may swing, twist, tip or separate

causing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether anchor

or to a single lower anchorage

point. The increased load caused

by multiple seats may cause the

tethers or lower anchorage points

to break, causing serious injury or

death.

WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not prop-

erly restrained in the child restraint.

Always follow the child seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

WARNING

- Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses or

for attaching other items or

equipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work

properly if attached somewhere

other than the correct tether

anchor.

333

Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat with

child seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturers make

child restraint seats that are labeled as

LATCH or LATCH-compatible child

restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children".These

seats include two rigid or webbing

mounted attachments that connect to

two LATCH anchors at specific seating

positions in your vehicle. This type of

child restraint seat eliminates the need to

use seat belts to attach the child seat in

the two outboard rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located on

the left and right rear seat backs to indi-

cate the position of the lower anchors for

child restraints.

B230D01NF OYF039025N

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

WARNING

• When using the vehicle's "LATCH"

system to install a child restraint

system in the rear seat, all unused

vehicle rear seat belt metal latch

plates or tabs must be latched

securely in their seat belt buckles

and the seat belt webbing must be

retracted behind the child restraint

to prevent the child from reaching

and taking hold of unretracted

seat belts. Unlatched metal latch

plates or tabs may allow the child

to reach the unretracted seat belts

which may result in strangulation

and a serious injury or death to the

child in the child restraint.

• Do not place anything around the

lower anchors. Also make sure

that the seat belt is not caught in

the lower anchors.

WARNING

Install the child restraint seat fully

rearward against the seatback with

the seatback reclined two positions

from the most upright latched posi-

tion.

Safety features of your vehicle

343

LATCH anchors have been provided in

your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are

located in the left and right outboard rear

seating positions. Their locations are

shown in the illustration. There is no

LATCH anchor provided for the center

rear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located between

the seatback and the seat cushion of the

rear seat left and right outboard seating

positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions to properly install child

restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-

compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child

restraint, assure that the seat is properly

attached to the LATCH and tether

anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat before

you place the child in it.Tilt the seat from

side to side. Also try to tug the seat for-

ward. Check to see if the anchors hold

the seat firmly in place.

WARNING

If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH lower

anchors

LATCH lower anchors are only to

be used with the left and right rear

outboard seating positions. Never

attempt to attach a LATCH

equipped seat in the center seating

position. You may damage the

anchors or the anchors may fail

and break in a collision.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt web-

bing to get scratched or pinched by

the child-seat latch and LATCH

anchor during the installation.

WARNING

The recommended weight for the

LATCH system is under 65 lbs (30

kg).

How to calculate the child restraint

weight :

Child restraint weight =

65 lbs (30 kg) - Child weight

335

Safety features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side impact air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

OYFH033050

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

WARNING

Even in vehicles with air bags, you

and your passengers must always

wear the seat belts provided in

order to minimize the risk and

severity of injury in the event of a

collision or rollover.

Safety features of your vehicle

363

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the engine

start/stop button is turned to the ON or

START position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of serious

frontal or side collision in order to help

protect the occupants from serious

physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the

air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate by the severity of a collision and

its direction. These two factors deter-

mine whether the sensors sendout an

electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the densi-

ty and stiffness of the vehicles or

objects which your vehicle hits in the

collision. Though, factors are not limit-

ed to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will sim-

ply see the deflated air bags hanging

out of their storage compartments after

the collision.

• In order to help provide protection in a

severe collision, the air bags must

inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag

inflation is a consequence of the

extremely short time in which a collision

occurs and the need to get the air bag

between the occupant and the vehicle

structures before the occupant impacts

those structures.This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries in a severe collision

and is thus a necessary part of air bag

design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which normally can

include facial abrasions, bruises and

broken bones because the inflation

speed also causes the air bags to

expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the air bag

can cause fatal injuries, especially if

the occupant is positioned exces-

sively close to the air bag.

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air

bags in a collision, the driver

should sit as far back from the

steering wheel air bag as possi-

ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)

away). The front passengers

should always move their seats

as far back as possible and sit

back in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the

event of collision, and passen-

gers may be injured by the air bag

expansion force if they are not in

proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause

injuries which normally include

facial or bodily abrasions,

injuries from broken glasses or

burns by the air bag inflation

gasses.

337

Safety features of your vehicle

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a

loud noise and leave smoke and powder

in the air inside of the vehicle.This is nor-

mal and is a result of the ignition of the

air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates,

you may feel substantial discomfort in

breathing due to the contact of your

chest with both the seat belt and the air

bag, as well as from breathing the smoke

and powder. Open your doors and/or

windows as soon as possible after

impact in order to reduce discomfort

and prevent prolonged exposure to

the smoke and powder.

Though the smoke and powder are non-

toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin

(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the

case, wash and rinse with cold water

immediately and consult a doctor if the

symptom persists.

Do not install a child restraint on the

front passenger’s seat.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in the front passenger’s seat. If the air

bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-

ing child restraint, causing serious or

fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child

restraints in the front passenger’s seat

either. If the front passenger air bag

inflates, it could cause serious or fatal

injuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air

bag related parts in the steering

wheel and/or instrument panel

and/or in both sides of the roof rails

above the front and rear doors and

in the front seat backs are very hot.

To prevent injury, do not touch the

air bag storage area’s internal com-

ponents immediately after an air

bag has inflated.

Safety features of your vehicle

383

Air bag warning light

The purpose of air bag warning light in

your instrument panel is to alert you of a

potential problem with your air bag -

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the engine start/stop button is

turned ON, the indicator light should illu-

minate for approximately 6 seconds, then

go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

• The light blinks when the engine

start/stop button is in ON position.

WARNING

• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it!

• Never put a child restraint in the

front passenger’s seat.If the front

passenger air bag inflates, it

would cause serious or fatal

injuries.

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats of a vehicle

equipped with side air bags, be

sure to install the child restraint

system as far away from the door

side as possible, and securely

lock the child restraint system in

position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain air

bags could cause serious injury

or death to an infant or child.

W7-147

339

Safety features of your vehicle

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side impact air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator

(Front passenger’s seat only)

11. Occupant classification system

(Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt buckle sensors

13. Driver’s seat track position sensor

14. Anchor pre-tensioner

15. Side pressure sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components while the engine

start/stop button is ON to determine if a

crash impact is severe enough to require

air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat

belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light " " on the

instrument panel will illuminate for about 6

seconds after the engine start/stop button

is turned to the ON position, after which

the SRS air bag warning light " " should

go out.

OYF039055N W7-147

Safety features of your vehicle

403

The front air bag modules are located

both in the center of the steering wheel

and in the front passenger's panel above

the glove box.When the SRSCM detects

a sufficiently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically deploy

the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will separate

under pressure from the expansion of the

air bags. Further opening of the covers

then allows full inflation of the air bags.

WARNING

If any of the following conditions

occurs,this indicates a malfunction

of the SRS. Have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag

system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the engine

start/stop button is in ON position.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B02L

Driver’s front air bag (2)

341

Safety features of your vehicle

A fully inflated air bag, in combination

with a properly worn seat belt, slows the

driver's or the passenger's forward

motion, reducing the risk of head and

chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling the

driver to maintain forward visibility and

the ability to steer or operate other con-

trols.

B240B03L

Driver’s front air bag (3)

WARNING

• Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, CD or discs

holder, sticker, etc.) on the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box in a vehicle with a pas-

senger's air bag. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-

uid air freshener inside the vehi-

cle, do not place it near the

instrument cluster nor on the

instrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-

jectile and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a fine

dust released in the vehicle.

These conditions are normal and

are not hazardous - the air bags

are packed in this fine powder.

The dust generated during air

bag deployment may cause skin

or eye irritation as well as aggra-

vate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin

areas thoroughly with lukewarm

water and a mild soap after an

accident in which the air bags

were deployed.

• The SRS can function only when

the engine start/stop button is in

the ON position. If the SRS air

bag warning light " " does not

illuminate, or continuously

remains on after illuminating for

about 6 seconds when the engine

start/stop button is turned to the

ON position, or after the engine is

started, comes on while driving,

the SRS is not working properly.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

immediately inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

423

Occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-

pant classification system in the front

passenger's seat.

The occupant classification system is

designed to detect the presence of a

properly-seated front passenger and

determine if the passenger's front air bag

should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

The driver's front air bag is not affected

or controlled by the occupant classifica-

tion system.

(Continued)

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn

the engine start/stop button to the

OFF position. Never remove or

replace the air bag related fuse(s)

when the engine start/stop button

is in the ON position. Failure to

heed this warning will cause the

SRS air bag warning light " " to

illuminate.

OYF039059N

OYF039053N

■ Type A

■ Type B

343

Safety features of your vehicle

Main components of occupant

classification system

• A detection device located within the

front passenger seat frame.

• Electronic system to determine whether

the front passenger air bag system

should be activated or deactivated.

• A warning light located on the instru-

ment panel which illuminates the words

PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicating the

front passenger air bag system is deac-

tivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warning

light is interconnected with the occupant

classification system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by

a person that the system determines to be

of adult size, and he/she sits properly (sit-

ting upright with the seatback in an upright

position, centered on the seat cushion

with their seat belt on, legs comfortably

extended and their feet on the floor), the

PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will be

turned off and the front passenger's air

bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in

frontal crashes.

You will find the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"

indicator on the center facia panel. This

system detects the conditions 1~4 in the

following table and activates or deacti-

vates the front passenger air bag based

on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained

properly (sitting upright with the seat in

an upright position, centered on the seat

cushion, with the person's legs comfort-

ably extended, feet on the floor, and

wearing the safety belt properly) for the

most effective protection by the air bag

and the safety belt.

• The OCS may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which can

affect the classification system. These

include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.

(2) Leaning against the door or center

console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or the

front of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or

resting them on other locations

which reduce the passenger weight

on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

Safety features of your vehicle

443

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult.When a smaller adult sits in

the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending

on his/her physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.When a larger child who

has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system

may recognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting

position.

*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above

12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front

passenger seat.This is a normal condition.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position or

placing weight on the front passen-

ger's seat when it is unoccupied by

a passenger adversely affects the

occupant classification system

(OCS).

(Continued)

Condition detected by the

occupant classification system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator light

SRS

warning light

Front passenger

air bag

1. Adult *

or child age 13 and up*

Off Off Activated

2. Infant or child restraint system with

12 months old*

On Off

Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off

Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated

345

Safety features of your vehicle

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shifted

towards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or center

console.

- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-

board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in the

front passenger seat or seatback

pocket.

- Never excessively recline the

front passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front pas-

senger seatback.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

463

When an adult is seated in the front pas-

senger seat, if the PASS AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator is on, turn the engine start/stop

button to the OFF position and ask the

passenger to sit properly (sitting upright

with the seat back in an upright position,

centered on the seat cushion with their

seat belt on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor). Restart the

engine and have the person remain in

that position.This will allow the system to

detect the person and to enable the pas-

senger air bag.

If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is

still on, ask the passenger to move to the

rear seat.

✽✽

NOTICE

The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator

illuminates for about 4 seconds after the

engine start/stop button is turned to the

ON position or after the engine is start-

ed. If the front passenger seat is occu-

pied, the occupant classification sensor

will then classify the front passenger

after several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNING

Do not allow an adult passenger to

ride in the front seat when the PASS

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is illumi-

nated because the air bag will not

deploy in the event of a crash. If the

PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator

remains illuminated after the adult

passenger repositions themselves

properly and the car is restarted, it

is recommended that passenger

move to the rear seat because the

passenger's front air bag will not

deploy.

Front seat passengers must stay

properly seated to avoid serious

injury from a deploying air bag.

Proper position

WARNING

Do not put a heavy load in the front

passenger seatback pocket or on the

front passenger seat. Do not hang

onto the front passenger seat.Do not

hang any items, such as a seatback

table, on the front passenger seat-

back. Do not place feet on the front

passenger seatback. Do not place

any items under the front passenger

seat. Any of these could interfere

with proper sensor operation.

WARNING

• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant clas-

sification system, never install a

child restraint system in the front

passenger's seat. A deploying air

bag can forcefully strike a child

resulting in serious injuries or

death. Any child age 12 and

under should ride in the rear seat.

Children too large for child

restraints should use the avail-

able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-

ter what type of crash, children of

all ages are safer when restrained

in the rear seat.

(Continued)

347

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• A smaller-stature adult in the front

passenger’s seat who is not seat-

ed correctly (for example: seat

excessively reclined, leaning on

the door or center console, or hips

shifted forward in the seat) can

cause a condition where the occu-

pant classification system senses

less weight than if the occupant

were seated properly (sitting

upright with the seatback in an

upright position, centered on the

seat cushion with their seat belt

on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor).

This condition can result in an

adult potentially being misclassi-

fied as a child and illumination of

the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indica-

tor.

(Continued)

• Accident statistics show that

children are safer if they are

restrained in the rear, as opposed

to the front seat. It is recom-

mended that child restraints be

secured in a rear seat, including

an infant riding in a rear-facing

infant seat, a child riding in a for-

ward-facing child seat and an

older child riding in a booster

seat.

• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer replace the air bag imme-

diately after deployment.

• The occupant classification sys-

tem may not work properly if

water, coffee or any other liquid

including rain gets on the seat.

Keep the front seat dry at all

times.

(Continued)

• If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indi-

cator is illuminated when the

front passenger's seat is occu-

pied by an adult and he/she sits

properly (sitting upright with the

seatback in an upright position,

centered on the seat cushion

with their seat belt on, legs com-

fortably extended and their feet

on the floor), have that person sit

in the rear seat.

• Do not modify or replace the front

passenger seat. Don't place any-

thing on or attach anything such

as a blanket or seat heater to the

front passenger seat. This can

adversely affect the occupant

classification system.

• Do not sit on sharp objects such

as tools when occupying the

front passenger seat. This can

adversely affect the occupant

classification system.

• Do not use accessory seat cov-

ers on the front seats.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

483

Driver's and passenger's front air

bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System

and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver

and passenger seating positions. The

indications of the system's presence are

the letters "SRS AIR BAG" or “AIR BAG"

embossed on the air bag pad cover in the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the center of the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt system alone in

case of a frontal impact of sufficient

severity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-

er information about the driver's seat

position, the driver's and front passen-

ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-

ty.

OYF039030

Driver’s front air bag

WARNING

If the occupant classification sys-

tem is not working properly, the

SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate

because the passenger's front air

bag is connected with the occupant

classification system. If there is a

malfunction of the occupant classi-

fication system, the PASS AIR BAG

"OFF" indicator will not illuminate

and the passenger's front air bag

will inflate in frontal impact crashes

even if there is no occupant in the

front passenger's seat. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illu-

minate when the engine start/stop

button is turned to the ON position,

remains illuminated after approxi-

mately 6 seconds when the engine

start/stop button is turned to the

ON position, or if it illuminates

while the vehicle is being driven,

have an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er inspect the occupant classifica-

tion system and the SRS air bag

system as soon as possible.

OYF039031

Passenger’s front air bag

349

Safety features of your vehicle

The driver's seat track position sensor,

which is installed on the seat track, deter-

mines if the seat is fore or aft of a refer-

ence position. The seat belt buckle sen-

sors determine if the driver and front pas-

senger's seat belts are fastened. These

sensors provide the ability to control the

SRS deployment based on how close the

driver's seat is to the steering wheel,

whether or not the seat belts are fas-

tened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to

control the air bag inflation within two lev-

els.A first stage level is provided for mod-

erate-severity impacts. A second stage

level is provided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, seating

position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM

(SRS Control Module) controls the air

bag inflation. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or sever-

ity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped

with an occupant classification system in

the front passenger's seat.The occupant

classification system detects the pres-

ence of a passenger in the front passen-

ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-

senger's air bag under certain condi-

tions. For more detail, see "Occupant

classification system" in this section.

WARNING

If the occupant classification sys-

tem is not working properly, the

SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate

because the SRS air bag warning

light is connected with the occu-

pant classification system. If the

SRS air bag warning light does not

illuminate when the engine

start/stop button is turned to the

ON position, remains illuminated

after approximately 6 seconds

when the engine start/stop button

is turned to the ON position, or if it

illuminates while the vehicle is

being driven, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the

advanced SRS air bag system as

soon as possible.

WARNING

• Modification to the seat structure

can adversely affect the seat

track position sensor and cause

the air bag to deploy at a different

level than should be provided.

• Do not place any objects under-

neath the front seats as they

could damage the seat track

position sensor or interfere with

the occupant classification sys-

tem.

• Do not place any objects that may

cause magnetic fields near the

front seat. These may cause a

malfunction of the seat track

position sensor.

Safety features of your vehicle

503

✽✽

NOTICE

• Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sun

visor.

• Advanced air bags are combined with

pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-

vide enhanced occupant protection in

frontal crashes. Front air bags are not

intended to deploy in collisions in

which protection can be provided by

the pre-tensioner seat belt.

(Continued)

• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,

while still maintaining control of

the vehicle.

• You and your passengers should

never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags. Improperly

positioned driver and passengers

can be severely injured by inflat-

ing air bags.

• Never lean against the door or

center console – always sit in an

upright position.

• Do not allow an adult passenger

to ride in the front seat when the

PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is

illuminated, because the air bag

will not deploy in the event of a

moderate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child

restraints – every trip, every time,

everyone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink of

an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain

maximum benefit from the air bag.

Even with advanced air bags,

improperly and unbelted occupants

can be severely injured when the

air bag inflates. Always follow the

precautions about seat belts, air

bags and occupant safety con-

tained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries and receive the maxi-

mum safety benefit from your

restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safest

place for children of any age to

ride.

• Front and side air bags can injure

occupants improperly positioned

in the front seats.

(Continued)

WARNING

If you are considering modification

of your vehicle due to a disability,

please contact the Hyundai

Customer Assistance Center at 1-

800-633-5151.

351

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant clas-

sification system, do not install a

child restraint system in the front

passenger seat position. A child

restraint system must never be

placed in the front seat.The infant

or child could be severely injured

or killed by an air bag deployment

in case of an accident.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he or

she must be properly belted and

the seat should be moved as far

back as possible.

• For maximum safety protection in

all types of crashes, all occu-

pants including the driver should

always wear their seat belts

whether or not an air bag is also

provided at their seating position

to minimize the risk of severe

injury or death in the event of a

crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-

sarily close to the air bag while

the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blankets or

seat warmers on the passenger

seat as these may interfere with

the occupant classification sys-

tem.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental deployment of the air bags

or by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning light

remains illuminated while the

vehicle is being driven, have an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer

inspect the air bag system as

soon as possible.

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer replace the air bag imme-

diately after deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploy

the front air bags only when an

impact is sufficiently severe and

when the impact angle is less

than 30° from the forward longitu-

dinal axis of the vehicle.

Additionally, the air bags will only

deploy once. Seat belts must be

worn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-

impact or rollover crashes. In

addition, front air bags will not

deploy in frontal crashes below

the deployment threshold.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

523

Side impact air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

impact air bag in each front seat. The

purpose of the air bag is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side-impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and point of impact.The

side impact air bags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal

injury in a crash. All occupants

should sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

their seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and their feet on

the floor until the vehicle is

parked and the smart key is

removed.

• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide

protection in a crash. If an occu-

pant is out of position because of

not wearing a seat belt, the air

bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal

injuries.

OYF039032N

OYFH033057N

Front

WARNING

Do not allow the passengers to lean

their heads or bodies onto doors,

put their arms on the doors, stretch

their arms out of the window, or

place objects between the doors

and passengers when they are

seated on seats equipped with side

and/or curtain air bags.

353

Safety features of your vehicle

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along both

sides of the roof rails above the front and

rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants and

the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-

tain side impact collisions.

WARNING

• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's and the

passenger's seat belt systems

and is not a substitute for them.

Therefore your seat belts must be

worn at all times while the vehicle

is in motion. The air bags deploy

only in certain side impact condi-

tions severe enough to cause

significant injury to the vehicle

occupants.

• For best protection from the side

impact air bag system and to

avoid being injured by the

deploying side impact air bag,

both front seat occupants should

sit in an upright position with the

seat belt properly fastened. The

driver's hands should be placed

on the steering wheel at the 9:00

and 3:00 positions. The passen-

ger's arms and hands should be

placed on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seat

covers.

(Continued)

• Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness of

the system.

• Do not install any accessories on

the side or near the side air bag.

• Do not place any objects over the

air bag or between the air bag

and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan-

gerous projectiles and cause

injury if the supplemental side air

bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-

ment of the side impact air bag

that may result in personal injury,

avoid impact to the side impact

sensor when the engine

start/stop button is on.

• If the seat or seat cover is dam-

aged, have the vehicle checked

and repaired by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer because your

vehicle is equipped with side

impact air bags and an occupant

classification system.

OYF039026

OYFH033058N

Safety features of your vehicle

543

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and impact.The curtain

air bags are not designed to deploy in all

side impact situations, collisions from the

front or rear of the vehicle or in most

rollover situations.

WARNING

• In order for side and curtain air

bags to provide the best protec-

tion, front seat occupants and

outboard rear occupants should

sit in an upright position with the

seat belts properly fastened.

Importantly, children should sit in

a proper child restraint system in

the rear seat.

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must be

seated in the proper child

restraint system. Make sure to

put the child restraint system as

far away from the door side as

possible, and secure the child

restraint system in a locked posi-

tion.

• Do not allow the passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and passen-

gers when they are seated on

seats equipped with side and/or

curtain air bags.

(Continued)

• Never try to open or repair any

components of the side curtain

air bag system. This should only

be done by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to follow the above instruc-

tions can result in injury or death to

the vehicle occupants in an acci-

dent.

355

Safety features of your vehicle

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-

tion conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in

which the air bag would not be expect-

ed to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts,second or

third collisions in multiple impact

accidents, as well as low speed

impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

(4) Side pressure sensor

OYFH031040N-1/OYF039041/OYFH031042N-1/OHD036030/OYF039062N

1 2 3 4

Safety features of your vehicle

563

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a

frontal collision depending on the intensi-

ty, speed or angles of impact of the front

collision.

WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air

bag deployment, which could

result in serious personal injury

or death.

• If the installation location or

angle of the sensors is altered in

any way, the air bags may deploy

when they should not or they may

not deploy when they should,

causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the air

bag sensors. Have the vehicle

checked and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed

due to the deformation of the

front bumper, body or B pillars or

front door where side collision

sensors are installed. Have the

vehicle checked and repaired by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy the

air bag(s) in certain collisions.

Installing bumper guards or

replacing a bumper with non-gen-

uine parts may adversely affect

your vehicle’s collision and air

bag deployment performance.

1JBA3513

357

Safety features of your vehicle

Side impact and curtain air bags

Side impact and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors

depending on the strength, speed or

angles of impact resulting from a side

impact collision.

Although the front air bags (driver’s and

front passenger’s air bags) are designed

to inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of colli-

sions if the front impact sensors detect a

sufficient impact.Side impact and curtain

air bags are designed to inflate only in

side impact collisions, but they may

inflate in other collisions if the side

impact sensors detect a sufficient

impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved roads,

the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully

on unimproved roads or on surfaces not

designed for vehicle traffic to prevent

unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags are

designed not to deploy in such cases

because they may not provide benefits

beyond the protection of the seat belts

in such collisions.

1JBA3514

1LDA2057

1JBA3515

Safety features of your vehicle

583

• Air bags are not designed to inflate in

rear collisions, because occupants are

moved backward by the force of the

impact. In this case, inflated air bags

would not be able to provide any addi-

tional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move to the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side impact and curtain air

bags may inflate depending on the

intensity, vehicle speed and angles of

impact.

• In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would not

be able to provide any additional bene-

fit, and thus the system may not deploy

any air bags.

OBH038060OBH038058 1JBA3516

359

Safety features of your vehicle

• Just before impact, drivers often brake

heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the

front portion of the vehicle causing it to

“ride” under a vehicle with a higher

ground clearance. Air bags may not

inflate in this "under-ride" situation

because deceleration forces that are

detected by sensors may be signifi-

cantly reduced by such “under-ride”

collisions.

• Front air bags may not inflate in

rollover accidents because air bag

deployment would not provide protec-

tion to the occupants.

Side impact and curtain air bags may

inflate when the vehicle is rolled over

by a side impact collision.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with object such as utility poles

or trees, where the point of impact is

concentrated to one area, the collision

energy is absorbed by the vehicle

structure, and the full force of the

impact is not delivered to the sensors.

1JBA35181JBA3517 1JBA3522

Safety features of your vehicle

603

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free

and so there are no parts you can safely

service by yourself. If the SRS air bag

warning light " " does not illuminate,

when you turn the ignition on, or continu-

ously remains on, have your vehicle

immediately inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as

removing, installing, repairing, or any

work on the steering wheel, the front

passenger's panel, front seats and roof

rails must be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of

the SRS system may result in serious

personal injury.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the addition

of any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to the

body structure, can adversely

affect SRS performance and lead

to possible injury.

• Modification of the components

where the SRS sensors are

installed and also modification of

other components of the vehicle

may affect SRS performance and

lead to possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-

ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or

one which has been moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely affect

the air bag covers and proper

deployment of the system.

•

No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on the

steering wheel, instrument panel,

and the front passenger's panel

above the glove box, because any

such object could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a crash severe enough

to cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, they must

be replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring, or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental inflation of the air bags or

by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-

tem must be discarded, or if the

vehicle must be scrapped, certain

safety precautions must be

observed. An authorized

HYUNDAI dealer knows these

precautions and can give you the

necessary information. Failure to

follow these precautions and pro-

cedures could increase the risk

of personal injury.

• If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on the

flooring, you shouldn't try to start

the hybrid system. Have the car

towed to an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

361

Safety features of your vehicle

Additional safety precautions

• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-

down back seat. All occupants should

sit upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor.

• Passengers should not move out of

or change seats while the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not wear-

ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-

gency stop can be thrown against the

inside of the vehicle, against other

occupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed to

restrain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat belt,

they could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the seat

belt can reduce the protection provided

by the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hard

or sharp objects between them-

selves and the air bags. Carrying

hard or sharp objects on your lap or in

your mouth can result in injuries if an

air bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the air

bag covers. All occupants should sit

upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor. If occupants are too close to the

air bag covers, they could be injured if

the air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on or

near the air bag covers. Any object

attached to or placed on the front or

side air bag covers could interfere with

the proper operation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.

• Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the operation

of the supplemental restraint system

sensing components and wiring har-

nesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on your

lap. The infant or child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of a

crash. All infants and children should

be properly restrained in appropriate

child safety seats or seat belts in the

rear seat.

Adding equipment to or modifying

your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be

shifted too close to a deploying

air bag, strike the interior struc-

ture or be thrown from the vehicle

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

your seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and your feet on

the floor.

• Be careful not to forcefully close

or slam the doors when the igni-

tion is ON. The air bags may

inflate.

Safety features of your vehicle

623

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, some required by

the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA), are attached to

alert the driver and passengers of poten-

tial risks of the air bag system.

OYF039045

OYF039046

Smart key / 4-3

Theft-alarm system / 4-9

Door locks / 4-11

Trunk / 4-15

Windows / 4-17

Hood / 4-21

Fuel filler lid / 4-22

Panorama sunroof / 4-25

Steering wheel / 4-29

Mirrors / 4-31

Instrument cluster / 4-40

Rear view camera / 4-69

Hazard warning flasher / 4-70

Lighting / 4-71

Wipers and washers / 4-76

Interior light / 4-78

Defroster / 4-82

Automatic climate control system (Type A) / 4-83

Automatic climate control system (Type B) / 4-94

Automatic climate control system (Type C) / 4-105

Features of your vehicle

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-116

Storage compartments / 4-119

Interior features / 4-121

Audio system / 4-125

Features of your vehicle

SMART KEY

1.Door lock

2.Door unlock

3.Trunk unlock

4.Panic

With a smart key, you can lock or unlock

a door (and trunk) and even start the

engine without inserting the key.

Locking

Using the door handle switch

Pressing the button of the front outside

door handles with all doors closed and

any door unlocked, locks all the doors. If

all doors, trunk and engine hood are

closed, the hazard warning lights will

blink and the chime will sound once to

indicate that all doors are locked.

However, if any door remains open, the

doors won't lock and the chime will sound

for 3 seconds. Close the door and try

again to lock the doors.

If the trunk lid or engine hood remains

open, the hazard warning light and chime

won't operate. After the, trunk lid and

engine hood are closed, the hazard

warning lights blink once.

The button will only operate when the

smart key is within 28~40in. (0.7~1m)

from the outside door handle.

If you want to make sure that a door has

locked, you should check the door lock

button inside the vehicle or pull the out-

side door handle.

Even though you press the outside door

handle buttons, the doors will not lock

and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if

any of following occur:

• The smart key is in the vehicle.

• The engine start/stop button is in ACC

or ON position.

• Any door except the trunk is open.

Using the button on the smart key

All doors are locked if the lock button(1)

is pressed. If all doors, trunk and hood

are closed, the hazard warning lights will

blink and the chime will sound once to

indicate that all doors are locked.

However, if any door, trunk or engine

hood remains open, the hazard warning

lights and the chime will not operate.If all

doors, trunk and engine hood are closed

after the lock button is pressed, the haz-

ard warning lights blink.

OYF049213

OYF049003

WARNING

The smart key would enable chil-

dren to operate power windows or

other controls, or even make the

vehicle move, which could result in

serious bodily injury or even death.

Never leave the smart key in your

vehicle with unsupervised children.

Features of your vehicle

Unlocking

Using the door handle switch

Pressing the button on the driver’s out-

side door handle with all doors closed

and locked, unlocks the driver’s door.The

hazard warning lights will blink and the

chime will sound twice to indicate that the

driver’s door is unlocked. All doors are

unlocked if the button is pressed once

more within 4 seconds.The hazard warn-

ing lights will blink and the chime will

sound twice to indicate that all the doors

are unlocked.

Pressing the button of the front passen-

ger’s outside door handle with all doors

closed and locked, unlocks all the doors.

The hazard warning lights will blink and

the chime will sound twice to indicate that

all doors are unlocked. The button will

only operate when the smart key is with-

in 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outside

door handle.

When the smart key is recognized in the

area of 28~40 in.(0.7~1 m) from the front

outside door handle, other people can

also open the doors without possession

of the smart key.

After pressing the button, the doors will

lock automatically unless you open any

door within 30 seconds.

Using the button on the smart key

The driver's door is unlocked if the unlock

button(2) is pressed once. The hazard

warning lights will blink and the chime will

sound twice to indicate that the driver's

door is unlocked.

All doors are unlocked if the unlock button

is pressed once more within 4 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will blink and

chime will sound twice again to indicate

that all doors are unlocked.

After pressing this button, the doors will

lock automatically unless you open any

door within 30 seconds.

✽✽

NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate the Two

Press Unlock function. Refer to "User

settings" in this section.

Trunk unlocking

Using the trunk handle switch

If you are within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from

the outside trunk handle with your smart

key in your possession, the trunk will

unlock when you press the trunk handle

switch.

Also, once the trunk is opened and then

closed, the trunk will be locked automati-

cally.

Using the button on the smart key

The trunk is opened if the trunk unlock but-

ton(3) is pressed for more than 1 second.

Once the trunk is opened and then closed,

the trunk will lock automatically.

Panic

The horn sounds and hazard warning

lights flash for about 30 seconds if this

button(4) is pressed for more than 1 sec-

ond. To stop the horn and lights, press

any button on the smart key.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting

the key. For detailed information refer to

the “Engine start/stop button”in section 5.

Features of your vehicle

Smart key precautions

✽✽

NOTICE

• If, for some reason, you happen to lose

your smart key, you will not be able to

start the hybrid system. Tow the vehi-

cle, if necessary, and contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be

registered to a single vehicle. If you

lose a smart key, you should immedi-

ately take the vehicle and the second

key to your authorized HYUNDAI

dealer to protect it from potential

theft.

• The smart key will not work if any of

the following occur:

- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the smart key.

- The smart key near a mobile two-

way radio system or a cellular

phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is being

operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work

correctly, open and close the door with

the mechanical key. If you have a

problem with the smart key, contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

• If the smart key is in close proximity

to your cell phone or smart phone, the

signal from the smart key could be

blocked by normal operation of your

cell phone or smart phone. This is

especially important when the phone

is active such as making call, receiving

calls, text messaging, and/or send-

ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing

the smart key and your cell phone or

smart phone in the same pants or

jacket pocket and maintain adequate

distance between the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2.This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from

water or any liquid. If the keyless

entry system is inoperative due to

exposure to water or liquids, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to

changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

Restrictions in handling keys

When leaving keys with parking lot and

valet attendants, the following proce-

dures will ensure that your vehicle’s trunk

and glove box compartment can only be

opened with the mechanical key.

Lock

Remove the mechanical key from the

smart key and leave the smart key with

the attendant. In this manner the smart

key can only be used to start the hybrid

system and operate door locks.

Trunk

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Set the trunk lid control switch to

LOCK position ( ).

3. Close the trunk lid.

Glove box

Lock the glove box using the mechanical

key.

Lock release

Trunk

1. Unlock doors by using the smart key

and unlock the trunk lid with the

mechanical key.

2. Set the trunk lid control switch to

UNLOCK ( ).

3. Close the trunk lid.

In this position the trunk will open with

the trunk lid release button or smart key.

Glove box

Unlock the glove box using the mechani-

cal key.

Battery replacement

A smart key battery should last for sever-

al years. If the smart key is not working

properly, try replacing the battery with a

new one. If you are unsure how to use

your smart key or replace the battery,

contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1. Insert a slim tool into the opening and

gently pry open the rear cover of the

smart key.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery

(CR2032).When replacing the battery,

make sure the battery position.

3. Install the battery cover in the reverse

order of removal.

OYF049004

OYF049212

OBH048004

Features of your vehicle

Immobilizer system

Your vehicle is equipped with an electron-

ic engine immobilizer system to reduce

the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of

a small transponder in the smart key and

electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever

you turn the engine start/stop button to

the ON position by pressing the button

while carrying the smart key, it checks

and determines and verifies if the smart

key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the

engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the

engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer sys-

tem:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the

ON position by pressing the button while

carrying the smart key.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the

OFF position. The immobilizer system

activates automatically. Without a valid

smart key for your vehicle, the engine will

not start.

CAUTION

• The smart key is designed to give

you years of trouble-free use,

however it can malfunction if

exposed to moisture or static

electricity. If you are unsure how

to use or replace the battery, con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

• Using the wrong battery can

cause the smart key to malfunc-

tion. Be sure to use the correct

battery.

• To avoid damaging the smart key,

don't drop it, get it wet, or expose

it to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed bat-

tery can be harmful to the envi-

ronment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to

your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

Immobilizer password is a customer

unique password and should be

kept confidential. Do not leave this

number anywhere in your vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the

key with other immobilizer keys around.

Otherwise the engine may not start or

may stop soon after it starts. Keep each

key separate in order to avoid a starting

malfunction.

✽✽

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your

keys, consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2.This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

The transponder in your smart key

is an important part of the immobi-

lizer system. It is designed to give

years of trouble-free service, how-

ever you should avoid exposure to

moisture, static electricity, and

rough handling. Immobilizer sys-

tem malfunction could occur.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

immobilizer system because it

could cause the immobilizer sys-

tem to malfunction and should only

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the immobilizer system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to

changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near

the smart key.

The engine may not start because

the metal accessories may interrupt

the transponder signal from trans-

mitting normally.

Features of your vehicle

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

This system is designed to provide pro-

tection from unauthorized entry into the

vehicle. This system is operated in three

stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the

second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and

the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-

gered, the system provides an audible

alarm with blinking of the hazard warning

lights.

Armed stage

Park the vehicle and stop the engine.

Arm the system as described below.

1.Turn off the engine.

2.Make sure that all doors, the engine

hood and trunk lid are closed and

latched.

• Lock the doors by pressing the button of

the front outside door handle with the

smart key in your possession.

After completion of the steps above, the

hazard warning lights and chime will

operate once to indicate that the system

is armed.

If any door remains open, the doors won't

lock and the chime will sound for 3 sec-

onds.Close the door and try again to lock

the doors.

If the trunk lid or engine hood remains

open, the hazard warning lights and

chime won't operate and the theft-alarm

will not arm. After closing the trunk lid

and engine hood, the hazard warning

lights blink once.

• Lock the doors by pressing the lock but-

ton on the smart key.

After completion of the steps above, the

hazard warning lights and chime will

operate once to indicate that the system

is armed.

If any door, trunk lid or engine hood

remains open, the hazard warning lights

and chime won't operate and the theft-

alarm will not arm. After closing all doors,

trunk lid and engine hood, the hazard

warning lights blink once.

Do not arm the system until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

system is armed while a passenger(s)

remains in the vehicle, the alarm may

be activated when the remaining pas-

senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any

door or trunk or engine hood is

opened within 30 seconds after the

system enters the armed stage, the

system is disarmed to prevent an

unnecessary alarm.

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stage

Disarmed

stage

Features of your vehicle

104

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the

following occurs while the system is

armed.

• A door is opened without using the

smart key.

• The trunk is opened without using the

smart key.

• The engine hood is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning lights will blink continuously for

approximately 30 seconds, and the alarm

will repeat once more unless the system

is disarmed. To turn off the system,

unlock the doors with the smart key.

Opening the trunk with the alarm

armed (if equipped)

When the alarm is armed, the alarm will

not sound if the trunk lid is opened with

the smart key.

Once the trunk is opened and then

closed, the trunk will be locked automati-

cally and the system will be armed again.

Also, if any of the doors or hood is

opened while the trunk lid is open and

the alarm is armed, the alarm will sound.

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when the

doors are unlocked by pressing the

unlock button on the smart key or press-

ing the lock/unlock button of the front out-

side door handle with the smart key in

your possession.

After unlocking the doors, the hazard

warning lights and chime will operate

twice to indicate that the system is dis-

armed.

After unlocking the doors, if any door is

not opened within 30 seconds, the sys-

tem will be rearmed.

✽✽

NOTICE - Smart key system

• If the system is not disarmed with the

smart key, start the engine with the

smart key. Then the system will be

disarmed.

• If you lose your keys, consult your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

theft-alarm system because it could

cause the theft-alarm system to

malfunction and should only be

serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the theft-alarm system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

411

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from out-

side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front

of the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-

cle doors will lock automatically.

• From the driver’s door, turn the key

toward the rear of the vehicle once to

unlock the driver’s door and once more

within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.

• Doors can be locked and unlocked with

the smart key.

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may

be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

✽✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door locks

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operating

temporarily in order to protect the

circuit and prevent damage to system

components.

• To lock a door without the key, push the

inside door lock button (1) or central

door lock switch (2

)

to the “Lock” posi-

tion and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central

door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors

will lock automatically.

✽✽

NOTICE

Always remove the smart key, engage

the parking brake, close all windows

and lock all doors when leaving your

vehicle unattended.

DOOR LOCKS

OYFH041005N

Lock

Unlock

OYF049007

WARNING

• If you don't close the door secure-

ly, the door may open again.

• Be careful that someone's body

and hands are not trapped when

closing the door.

Features of your vehicle

124

Operating door locks from inside

the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The

red mark (2) on the button will be visi-

ble.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-

ton (1) to the “Lock”position. If the door

is locked properly, the red mark (2) on

the button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle

(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the front

door is pulled when the door lock but-

ton is in lock position, the button is

unlocked and door opens.

• A door cannot be locked if the smart

key is in the vehicle and any door is

open.

With central door lock switch

Operate by depressing the central door

lock switch.

• When pushing down on the front por-

tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors

will lock.

• When pushing down on the rear por-

tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors

will unlock.

OYF049008

Lock

Unlock

OYF049009

Driver’s door

OYF049228N

Passenger’s door

CAUTION -

Door lock malfunction

If a power door lock ever fails to

function while you are in the vehi-

cle, try one or more of the following

techniques to exit:

•

Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) while simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

•

Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

•

Lower a front window and use the

key to unlock the door from out-

side.

413

Features of your vehicle

• If the smart key is in the vehicle and

any door is open, the doors will not

lock even though the front portion(1) of

central door lock switch is pressed.

✽✽

NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate some auto

door lock/unlock features as follows:

• Speed sensing auto door lock

• Auto door unlock by unlocking the

driver's door

• Auto door unlock when the smart key

is removed from the smart key holder.

• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the

transmission shift lever out of P

(Park) or into P (Park)

If you want to activate or deactivate a

door lock/unlock feature, refer to the

"vehicle setting" in this chapter.

WARNING - Unlocked

vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can

invite theft or possible harm to you

or others from someone hiding in

your vehicle while you are gone.

Always remove the smart key,

engage the parking brake, close all

windows and lock all doors when

leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattended

children

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

severe injury to unattended chil-

dren or animals who cannot escape

the vehicle. Furthermore, children

might operate features of the vehi-

cle that could injure them, or they

could encounter other harm, possi-

bly from someone gaining entry to

the vehicle. Never leave children or

animals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors

• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-

cle is in motion to prevent acci-

dental opening of the door.

Locked doors will also discour-

age potential intruders when the

vehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doors

and watch for vehicles, motorcy-

cles, bicycles or pedestrians

approaching the vehicle in the

path of the door. Opening a door

when something is approaching

can cause damage or injury.

Features of your vehicle

144

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help

prevent children from accidentally open-

ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

The rear door safety locks should be

used whenever children are in the vehi-

cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the

hole and turn it to the lock ( ) posi-

tion. When the child safety lock is in

the lock position, the rear door will not

open even when the inner door handle

is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside

door handle (1).

Even though the doors may be unlocked,

the rear door will not open by pulling the

inner door handle (2) until the rear door

child safety lock is unlocked.

OYF049010

WARNING - Rear door

locks

If children accidentally open the

rear doors while the vehicle is in

motion, they could fall out of the

vehicle,resulting in severe injury or

death. To prevent children from

opening the rear doors from the

inside, the rear door safety locks

should be used whenever children

are in the vehicle.

415

Features of your vehicle

Opening the trunk

• For vehicles equipped with the Smart

Key system: press the release button

above the license plate (right side).

• All vehicles: Press and hold the trunk

release button on the remote key fob.

• All vehicles: Insert the mechanical key

into the key cylinder above the license

plate (left side).

✽✽

NOTICE

Smart Key equipped vehicles have the

mechanical key integrated in the key

fob. See the smart key section for

details.

• To open the trunk from inside the vehi-

cle, press the trunk lid release button.

Once the trunk is reclosed, the trunk is

locked automatically.

✽✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door locks and

door mechanisms may not work proper-

ly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the trunk

To close the trunk, lower the trunk lid,

then press down on it until it locks.To be

sure the trunk lid is securely fastened,

always check by trying to pull it up again.

TRUNK

OYF049012

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the

trunk before driving your vehicle.

Possible damage may occur to the

trunk lift cylinders and attached

hardware if the trunk is not closed

prior to driving.

WARNING

The trunk lid should always be kept

completely closed while the vehicle

is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,

poisonous exhaust gases may

enter the vehicle and serious ill-

ness or death may result.

OYFH041011N

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

164

Emergency trunk safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-

gency trunk release cable located inside

the trunk. The lever glows in the dark

when the trunk lid is closed. If someone

is inadvertently locked in the trunk,

pulling this handle will release the trunk

latch mechanism and open the trunk.

Trunk lid control switch

The trunk lid control switch is used to

prevent unauthorized access to the

trunk.

• When the trunk lid control switch is in

the UNLOCK position ( ), the trunk

can be unlocked with the trunk lid

release button and the smart key.

• When the trunk lid control switch is in

the LOCK position ( ), the trunk can

be unlocked with the master key (or the

mechanical key of the smart key) only.

OYF049013N

WARNING

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the trunk of the vehicle at

any time. If the trunk is partially

or totally latched and the person

is unable to get out, severe injury

or death could occur due to lack

of ventilation, exhaust fumes and

rapid heat build-up,or because of

exposure to cold weather condi-

tions. The trunk is also a highly

dangerous location in the event

of a crash because it is not a pro-

tected occupant space but mere-

ly a part of the vehicle’s crush

zone.

• Your vehicle should be kept

locked and keys be kept out of

the reach of children. Parents

should teach their children about

the dangers of playing in trunks.

OYF049004

417

Features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window up/down

(if equipped)

(7) Power window lock switch

✽✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power windows

may not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

WINDOWS

OYF049014

* : if equipped

Features of your vehicle

184

Power windows

The engine start/stop button must be in

the ON position for power windows to

operate.

Each door has a power window switch

that controls the door's window.The driv-

er has a power window lock switch which

can block the operation of passenger

windows. The power windows can be

operated for approximately 30 seconds

after the engine start/stop button is

turned to the ACC or LOCK position.

However, if the front doors are opened,

the power windows cannot be operated

even within the 30 second period.

✽✽

NOTICE

While driving with the rear windows

down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in

an open (or partially open) position, your

vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffet-

ing or pulsation noise. This noise is a

normal occurrence and can be reduced

or eliminated by taking the following

actions. If the noise occurs with one or

both of the rear windows down, partially

lower both front windows approximate-

ly one inch. If you experience the noise

with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the

size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

To open or close a window, press down

or pull up the front portion of the corre-

sponding switch to the first detent posi-

tion (5).

Auto down window (if equipped)

(driver’s window)

Pressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent posi-

tion (6) completely lowers the driver’s

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position while the window is in

operation, momentarily pull the switch in

the direction opposite of the window

movement.

OYF049016 OYF049015N

419

Features of your vehicle

Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window

switch momentarily to the second detent

position (6) completely lowers or lifts the

window even when the switch is released.

To stop the window at the desired position

while the window is in operation, momen-

tarily pull the switch in the direction oppo-

site of the window’s movement.

If the power window is not operated cor-

rectly, the automatic power window system

must be reset as follows:

1.Turn the engine start/stop button to the

ON position.

2. Close driver’s windows and continue

pulling up on the power window switch

for at least 1 second after the window is

completely closed.

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is

blocked by an object or part of the body,

the window will detect the resistance and

will stop upward movement.The window

will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30

cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

while the power window switch is pulled

up continuously, the window will stop

upward movement then lower approxi-

mately 1 in.(2.5 cm). If the power window

switch is pulled up continuously again

within 5 seconds after the window is low-

ered by the automatic window reversal

feature, the automatic window reversal

will not operate.

✽✽

NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature for the

driver’s window is only active when the

“auto up” feature is used by fully

pulling up the switch. The automatic

reverse feature will not operate if the

window is raised using the halfway posi-

tion on the power window switch.

WARNING

Always check for obstructions

before raising any window to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage. If an

object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in

diameter is caught between the

window glass and the upper win-

dow channel, the automatic reverse

window may not detect the resist-

ance and will not stop and reverse

direction.

OUN026013OYF049015

Features of your vehicle

204

Power window lock button

• The driver can disable the power win-

dow switches on the front and rear

passengers' doors by pressing the

power window lock switch to lock posi-

tion (pressed).

• When the power window lock switch is

pressed, the driver's master control

cannot operate the front and rear pas-

sengers' power windows.

OYF049017

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not

open or close two windows or

more at the same time. This will

also ensure the longevity of the

fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposing directions at

the same time. If this is done, the

window may stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

WARNING - Windows

• NEVER leave the smart key in the

vehicle.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even very

young children may inadvertently

cause the vehicle to move, entan-

gle themselves in the windows,

or otherwise injure themselves or

others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head and

other obstructions are safely out

of the way before closing a win-

dow.

• Do not allow children to play with

the power windows. Keep the dri-

ver’s door power window lock

switch in the LOCK position

(depressed). Serious injury can

result from unintentional window

operation by the child.

• Do not extend any head or arms

outside through the window

opening while driving.

421

Features of your vehicle

Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop open

slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the

hood slightly, pull the secondary latch

(1) inside of the hood center and lift

the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:

• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and push

down to securely lock in place.

HOOD

OYF049018

OYFH041019N-1

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removed

from the hood opening. Closing

the hood with an obstruction

present in the hood opening may

result in property damage or

severe personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause a fire.

• Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latched

before driving away. If it is not

latched, the hood could open

while the vehicle is being driven,

causing a total loss of visibility,

which might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with the

hood raised. The view will be

blocked and the hood could fall

or be damaged.

CAUTION

Open the hood after turning off the

engine on a flat surface, shifting the

shift lever to the P(Park) position,

and setting the parking brake.

Features of your vehicle

224

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from

inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel

filler lid opener button.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the fuel filler lid will not open because

ice has formed around it, tap lightly or

push on the lid to break the ice and

release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If

necessary, spray around the lid with an

approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-

ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a

warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2.To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel

filler lid opener button.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully

open.

4.To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1.To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it clicks once. This indicates that the

cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in

lightly making sure that it is securely

closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

OYF049020

OYFH044021

WARNING - Refueling

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin

and thus subject you to the risk

of fire and burns. Always remove

the fuel cap carefully and slowly.

If the cap is venting fuel or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait until

the condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks

once, otherwise the Malfunction

Indicator Light will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

423

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

Use only approved portable plas-

tic fuel containers designed to

carry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones while

refueling. Electric current and/or

electronic interference from cel-

lular phones can potentially

ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

electrical components related to

the engine can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling is

complete, check to make sure the

filler cap and filler door are

securely closed, before starting

the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle while at

a gas station especially during

refueling. Automotive fuel is

highly flammable and can, when

ignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refueling

since you can generate static

electricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or fab-

ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)

capable of producing static elec-

tricity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapors resulting in

rapid burning. If you must re-

enter the vehicle, you should

once again eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching a metal part

of the vehicle, away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-

line source.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure to

place the container on the

ground prior to refueling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling has

begun, contact with the vehicle

should be maintained until the

filling is complete.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refueling dan-

gers

Automotive fuels are flammable

materials. When refueling, please

note the following guidelines care-

fully. Failure to follow these guide-

lines may result in severe personal

injury, severe burns or death by fire

or explosion.

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station facility.

• Before refueling, note the loca-

tion of the Emergency Gasoline

Shut-Off, if available, at the gas

station facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching another metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

244

Emergency fuel filler lid release

An emergency fuel filler lid release is

located in the luggage compartment, on

the left side.

If the fuel filler lid does not open using

the remote fuel filler lid release, you can

open it manually.Pull the handle outward

slightly.

(Continued)

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-

cle, and immediately contact the

manager of the gas station and

then contact the local fire depart-

ment or 911. Follow any safety

instructions they provide.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel require-

ments" suggested in section 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can result

in a serious malfunction of the

fuel system or emission control

system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted surfaces

may damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure the fuel

cap is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event of

an accident.

CAUTION

Do not pull the handle excessively,

otherwise the luggage area trim or

release handle may be damaged.

OYF049023

425

Features of your vehicle

PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,

you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the

sunroof control lever located on the over-

head console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,

or tilted when the engine start/stop but-

ton or ignition key is in the ON position.

✽✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez-

ing conditions.

• After washing the car or after there is

rain, be sure to wipe off any water

that is on the sunroof before operating

it.

✽✽

NOTICE

The sunroof cannot slide when it is in

the tilt position nor can it be tilted while

in an open or slide position.

OYF049024

CAUTION

Do not continue to move the sun-

roof control lever after the sunroof

is in the fully open, closed, or tilt

position(s). Damage to the motor or

system components could occur.

WARNING

Never adjust the sunroof or sun-

shade while driving. This could

result in loss of control and an acci-

dent that may cause death, serious

injury, or property damage.

Features of your vehicle

264

Sunshade

• To open the sunshade, pull the sunroof

control lever backward to the first

detent position.

• To close the sunshade when the sun-

roof glass is closed, push the sunroof

control lever forward.

To stop the sliding at any point, pull or

push the sunroof control lever momentar-

ily.

✽✽

NOTICE

It is normal for wrinkles to form on the

sunshade because of its material charac-

teristic.

Sliding the sunroof

When the sunshade is closed

If you pull the sunroof control lever back-

ward to the second detent position, the

sunshade will slide all the way open then

the sunroof glass will slide all the way

open. To stop the sunroof movement at

any point, pull or push the sunroof control

lever momentarily.

When the sunshade is opened

If you pull the sunroof control lever back-

ward, the sunroof glass will slide all the

way open.To stop the sunroof movement

at any point, pull or push the sunroof con-

trol lever momentarily.

Tilting the sunroof

When the sunshade is closed

If you push the sunroof control lever

upward, the sunshade will slide all the

way open then the sunroof glass will tilt.

To stop the sunroof movement at any

point, pull or push the sunroof control

lever momentarily.

When the sunshade is opened

If you push the sunroof control lever

upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.

To stop the sunroof movement at any

point, pull or push the sunroof control

lever momentarily.

OYF049214 OYF049200

OYF049201

427

Features of your vehicle

Closing the sunroof

To close the sunroof glass only

Push the sunroof control lever forward to

the first detent position or pull the lever

downward.

To close the sunroof glass with the

sunshade

Push the sunroof control lever forward to

the second detent position. The sunroof

glass will close then the sunshade close

automatically.

To stop the sunroof movement at any

point, pull or push the sunroof control

lever momentarily.

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is detect-

ed while the sunroof glass or sunshade is

closing automatically, it will reverse the

direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work

if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding

glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash.

You should always check that all passen-

gers and objects are away from the sun-

roof before closing it.

OYF049215

WARNING - Sunroof

• Be careful that someone’s head,

hands and body are not trapped

by a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend the face, neck,

arms or body outside through the

sunroof opening while driving.

• Make sure everyone is safely out

of the way before closing a sun-

roof

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is below

freezing or when the sunroof is

covered with snow or ice, the

glass or the motor could be dam-

aged.

• The sunroof is made to slide

together with the sunshade. Do

not leave the sunshade closed

while the sunroof is open.

Features of your vehicle

284

Resetting the sunroof

Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol-

lowings)

- Battery is discharged or disconnected

or the related fuse has been replaced

or disconnected.

- The one-touch sliding function of the

sunroof does not normally operate.

1.Turn the engine start/stop button to the

ON position and close the sunroof

glass and sunshade completely.

2.Release the control lever.

3.Push the sunroof control lever forward

in the direction of close (about 10 sec-

onds) until the sunroof is moved a little.

Then, release the lever.

4.Push the sunroof control lever forward

in the direction of close until the sun-

roof operates as follows;

SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN →

SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSE →

SUNSHADE CLOSE

Then, release the control lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof

system is reset.

❈ For more detailed information, contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

If the sunroof is not reset when the

vehicle battery is disconnected or

discharged, or related fuse is

blown, the sunroof may operate

improperly.

429

Features of your vehicle

Electric power steering (EPS)

The power steering uses a motor to

assist you in steering the vehicle. If the

engine is off or if the power steering sys-

tem becomes inoperative, the vehicle

may still be steered, but it will require

increased steering effort.

The steering becomes heavier as the

vehicle’s speed increases and becomes

lighter as the vehicle’s speed decreases

for optimum steering control.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, have the power steer-

ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur dur-

ing normal vehicle operation:

• The EPS warning light does not illumi-

nate.

• The steering effort is high immediately

after turning the engine start/stop but-

ton on. This happens as the system

performs the EPS system diagnostics.

When the diagnostics is completed, the

steering wheel will return to its normal

condition.

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the engine start/stop

button is turned to the ON or LOCK

position.

• A motor noise may be heard when the

vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving

speed.

• If the Electric Power Steering System

does not operate normally, the warn-

ing light will illuminate on the instru-

ment cluster. The steering wheel may

become difficult to control or operate

abnormally. Take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible.

• When you operate the steering wheel

in low temperature, noise could occur.

If temperature rises, the noise will dis-

appear. This is a normal condition.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normal-

ly, the warning light will illuminate

on the instrument cluster. The

steering wheel may become diffi-

cult to control or operate abnor-

mally. Take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible.

• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperature, abnor-

mal noise could occur. If tempera-

ture rises, the noise will disap-

pear.This is a normal condition.

Features of your vehicle

304

Tilt steering

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the

steering wheel before you drive.You can

also raise it to give your legs more room

when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned

so that it is comfortable for you to drive,

while permitting you to see the instru-

ment panel warning lights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle, pull

down the lock release lever (1), adjust

the steering wheel to the desired angle

(2) and height (if equipped) (3), then pull

up the lock-release lever to lock the

steering wheel in place.Be sure to adjust

the steering wheel to the desired position

before driving.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-

bol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it

operates properly.

✽✽

NOTICE

The horn will operate only when the

area indicated in the illustration is

pressed.

OYF049026N OYF049027

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do

not press on the horn with a sharp-

pointed object.

WARNING

• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel while driving. You

may lose steering control and

cause severe personal injury,

death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering

wheel both up and down to be

certain it is locked in position.

431

Features of your vehicle

MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the

center view through the rear window is

seen. Make this adjustment before you

start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and while the day/night lever is in

the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview

clarity in the night position.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with

HomeLink

system and compass

(if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a

Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass Display

and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System.During nighttime driving,

this feature will automatically detect and

reduce rearview mirror glare while the

compass indicates the direction the vehi-

cle is pointed. The HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver allows you to activate your

garage door(s), electric gate, home light-

ing, etc.

WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear

seat or cargo area which would

interfere with your vision through

the rear window.

OYF049028N

Day

Night

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror and

do not install a wide mirror. It could

result in injury, during an accident

or deployment of the air bag.

Features of your vehicle

324

(1) Telematics button

(2) Telematics button

(3) Telematics button

(4) Compass control button & Dimming

ON/OFF button

(5) Status indicator LED

(6) Channel 1 button

(7) Channel 2 button

(8) Channel 3 button

(9) Compass display

(10) Rear light sensor

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS

) Mirror

The NVS

Mirror in your vehicle is the

most advanced way to reduce annoying

glare in the rearview mirror during any

driving situation. For more information

regarding NVS

mirrors and other applica-

tions, please refer to the Gentex website:

www.gentex.com

✽✽

NOTICE

The NVS

Mirror automatically reduces

glare during driving conditions based

upon light levels monitored in front of

the vehicle and from the rear of the vehi-

cle. These light sensors are visible

through openings in the front and rear of

the mirror case. Any object that

obstructs either light sensor will degrade

the automatic dimming control feature.

Automatic-dimming function

Your mirror will automatically dim upon

detecting glare from the vehicles travel-

ing behind you. The auto-dimming func-

tion can be controlled by the Dimming

ON/OFF Button:

1. Pressing and hold the button for 3

seconds turns the autodimming func-

tion OFF which is indicated by the

green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing and hold the button for 3

seconds again turns the auto-dimming

function ON which is indicated by the

green Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON position

each time the vehicle is started.

OYF042250N

433

Features of your vehicle

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is also

equipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass that

shows the vehicle Compass heading in

the Display Window using the 8 basic

cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

Compass function

The Compass can be turned ON and

OFF and will remember the last state

when the ignition is cycled. To turn the

display feature ON/OFF:

1. Press and release the button within

1 second to turn the display feature

OFF.

2. Press and release the button again

within 1 second to turn the display

back ON.

Additional options can be set with press

and hold sequences of the button and

are detailed below.

There is a difference between magnetic

north and true north. The compass in the

mirror can compensate for this difference

when it knows the Magnetic Zone in which

it is operating. This is set either by the

dealer or by the user.The operating Zone

Numbers for North America are shown in

the figure on the following section.

B520C05NF

Features of your vehicle

344

To adjust the Zone setting:

1. Determine the desired Zone Number

based upon your current location on

the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for 6 sec-

onds, the current Zone Number will

appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button

again will cause the numbers to incre-

ment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,

15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button

when the desired Zone Number

appears on the display will set the new

Zone.

4.Within about 5 seconds the compass

will start displaying a compass head-

ing again.

There are some conditions that can

cause changes to the vehicle magnets,

such as installing a ski rack or a CB

antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle

can also cause changes to the vehicle's

magnetic field. In these situations, the

compass will need to be re-calibrated to

quickly correct for these changes. To re-

calibrate the compass:

1. Press and hold the button for more

than 9 seconds. When the compass

memory is cleared a "C" will appear in

the display.

2.To calibrate the compass, drive the

vehicle in 2 complete circles at less

than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control

System

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up

to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)

transmitters with a single built-in device.

This innovative feature will learn the

radio frequency codes of most current

transmitters to operate devices such as

gate operators, garage door openers,

entry door locks, security systems, even

home lighting. Both standard and rolling

code-equipped transmitters can be pro-

grammed by following the outlined proce-

dures. Additional HomeLink

information

can be found at: www.homelink.com or

by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF

device you are programming for use in

other vehicles as well as for future

HomeLink

programming. It is also sug-

gested that upon the sale of the vehicle,

the programmed HomeLink

buttons be

erased for security purposes.

WARNING

Before programming HomeLink

a garage door opener or gate oper-

ator, make sure that people and

objects are out of the way of the

device to prevent potential harm or

damage. Do not use HomeLink

with any garage door opener that

lacks the safety stop and reverse

features required by U.S. federal

safety standards (this includes any

garage door opener model manu-

factured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect an

object - signaling the door to stop

and reverse - does not meet current

U.S. federal safety standards. Using

a garage door opener without these

features increases the risk of seri-

ous injury or death.

435

Features of your vehicle

Programming HomeLink

✽✽

NOTICE

• When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the vehi-

cle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device being programmed to

HomeLink

for quicker training and

accurate transmission of the radio-

frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the igni-

tion switch to be turned to the second

(or "accessories") position for pro-

gramming and/or operation of

HomeLink.

• In the event that there are still pro-

gramming difficulties or questions

after following the programming steps

listed below, contact HomeLink

at:

www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-

3515.

Programming

To train most devices, follow these

instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press and

hold the two outside buttons (

HomeLink

Channel 1 and Channel 3,

until the indicator light begins to flash

(after 10 seconds). Release both but-

tons.Do not hold the buttons for longer

than 20 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away

from the HomeLink

button you wish to

program while keeping the indicator

light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both

the HomeLink

and hand-held trans-

mitter buttons until the HomeLink

indi-

cator light changes from a slow to a

rapid blinking light. Now you may

release both the HomeLink

and hand-

held transmitter buttons.

OYF042252N

Flashing

OYF042251N

Flashing

Features of your vehicle

364

✽✽

NOTICE

Some devices may require you to replace

this Programming step 3 with procedures

noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian

Programming" section. If the

HomeLink

indicator light does not

change to a rapidly blinking light after

performing these steps, contact

HomeLink

at www.homelink.com.

4.Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink

button up to two separate times to acti-

vate the door. If the door does not acti-

vate, press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink

button and observe the

indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete and

your device should activate when the

HomeLink

button is pressed and

released.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2

seconds and then turns to a constant

light, continue with "Programming"

steps 5-7 to complete the program-

ming of a rolling code equipped

device (most commonly a garage

door opener).

5.At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate

the "leam" or "smart" button. This can

usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the motor-

head unit.

6.Firmly press and release the "leam" or

"smart" button.(The name and color of

the button vary by manufacturer).

There are 30 seconds to initiate step 7.

7.Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink

button. Repeat

the "press/hold/release" sequence a

second time, and, depending on the

brand of the garage door opener (or

other rolling code equipped device),

repeat this sequence a third time to

complete the programming process.

HomeLink

should now activate your

rolling code equipped device.

437

Features of your vehicle

Gate operator & Canadian program-

ming

During programming, your handheld

transmitter may automatically stop trans-

mitting. Continue to press the Integrated

HomeLink

Wireless Control System but-

ton (note steps 2 through 3 in the

Programming portion of this document)

while you press and re-press ("cycle")

your handheld transmitter every two sec-

onds until the frequency signal has been

learned. The indicator light will flash

slowly and then rapidly after several sec-

onds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink

button.

Activation will now occur for the trained

device (i.e. garage door opener, gate

operator, security system, entry door

lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For con-

venience, the hand-held transmitter of

the device may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink

button

To program a device to HomeLink

using

a HomeLink

button previously trained,

follow these steps:

1.Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2.The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds.Without releasing the

HomeLink

button, proceed with

"Programming" step 2.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink

at www.homelink.com or 1-

800-355-3515.

Erasing HomeLink

buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased.

However, to erase all three programmed

buttons:

1.Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for

longer than 20 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System is now in the training

(learn) mode and can be programmed at

any time following the appropriate steps

in the Programming sections above.

FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4

IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2.This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NVS

is a registered trademark and Z-

Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex

Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.

HomeLink

is a registered trademark

owned by Johnson Controls,

Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

CAUTION

The transceiver has been tested and

complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifica-

tions not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance

could void the user's authority to

operate the device.

Features of your vehicle

384

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before

driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-

hand and right-hand outside rearview

mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch.The mir-

ror heads can be folded back manually to

prevent damage during an automatic car

wash or when passing in a narrow street.

✽✽

NOTICE - Rearview mirrors

• The right outside rearview mirror is

convex. Objects seen in the mirror are

closer than they appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror or

direct observation to determine the

actual distance of following vehicles

when changing lanes.

Remote control

The electric remote control mirror switch

allows you to adjust the position of the left

and right outside rearview mirrors. To

adjust the position of either mirror, the

engine start/stop button should be in the

ACC or ON position, or engine is running.

Push the switch (1) to R or L to select the

right side mirror or the left side mirror,

then press a corresponding point on the

mirror adjustment control to position the

selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After the adjustment, put the switch into

the neutral (center) position to prevent

inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the surface

of the glass. If ice should restrict

movement of the mirror, do not

force the mirror for adjustment. To

remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a

sponge or soft cloth with warm

water.

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do

not adjust the mirror by force. Use

an approved spray de-icer (not radi-

ator antifreeze) to release the

frozen mechanism or move the

vehicle to a warm place and allow

the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors while the vehicle

is moving.This could result in loss

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injury

or property damage.

OYF049033

439

Features of your vehicle

Folding the outside rearview mirror

(if equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp

the housing of the mirror.

Lift slightly straight up, then rotate mirror

towards the rear of the vehicle.

These mirrors rotate on an upwards

angle.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate while the switch is

pressed. Do not press the switch

longer than necessary, the motor

may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand.

Doing so may damage the mirror.

OYF049034

Features of your vehicle

404

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. EV MODE

2.Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5.Warning and indicator lights

6. Fuel gauge

7.Trip computer

8. ECO guide

9. Odometer

10. Ready

* The actual cluster in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

For more details refer to the "Gauges"

section in the next pages.

OYFH041040N

441

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel illumination

Press the illumination control switch left

or right to adjust the brightness of the

instrument panel illumination.

The illumination intensity will show on the

LCD screen.

READY indicator

This light illuminates if it is possible to

drive your vehicle when the engine

start/stop button is turned to the START

position. If the vehicle fails to start, this

light doesn’t come on. Also, if this light is

blinking while driving, it indicates a fault

to enter into a limited operating mode. If

this light goes off while driving, it indi-

cates a fault that will cause the vehicle to

shut down.If these occur, have your vehi-

cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Gauges

Odometer (mi. or km)

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenance

should be performed.

The odometer is always displayed until

the display is turned off.

OYFH041050N

OYF049042

OYFH041235N

OYFH041302N

Features of your vehicle

424

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the speed of

the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in miles

per hour and/or kilometers per hour.

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the

engine coolant when the engine start/stop

button is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine.If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot.The engine

coolant is under pressure and

could cause severe burns. Wait

until the engine is cool before

adding coolant to the reservoir.

OYFH041047NOYFH041043N

CAUTION

If the gauge moves beyond the nor-

mal range area toward the “H” posi-

tion, it indicates overheating that

may damage the engine.

443

Features of your vehicle

ECO GUIDE gauge

This is a gauge to let drivers know

whether the current driving condition is

economical or not. The fuel efficiency is

high in the blue zone but is low in the red

zone.

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank.

The fuel tank capacity is given in

section 8.

The fuel gauge is supplement-

ed by a low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is near

empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light

may come on earlier than usual due to

the movement of fuel in the tank.

OYFH041048N

CAUTION

Avoid driving with a very low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to malfunction.

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addition-

al fuel as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when the

gauge indicator comes close to the

E level.

OYFH041303N

Features of your vehicle

444

Blue drive mode

Your vehicle is equipped with a highly

efficient power train based on Hyundai's

BlueDrive technology.

• BlueDrive mode is for normal, everyday

driving for smooth efficient operation.

• Each time you start the vehicle,

BlueDrive is activated automatically.

• If needed, the driver can temporarily

switch BlueDrive ON/OFF using the

steering wheel mounted button.

- BlueDrive OFF is intended for brief

periods of unusual driving, such as

steep roads or heavy loads. The cen-

ter cluster background will be Black.

- BlueDrive ON is meant for normal

vehicle driving and provides maxi-

mum fuel efficiency. The instrument

center cluster will glow bright Blue.

• Switch back to BlueDrive ON as soon

as possible for maximum fuel efficien-

cy and to restore the BlueDrive center

display.

• Your vehicle will automatically resume

BlueDrive each time it is restarted.

Trip computer

The trip computer is a microcomputer

controlled driver information system that

displays information related to driving on

the LCD screen when the engine

start/stop button is in the ON position. If

the battery is disconnected, then all

stored driving information is reset.

OYFH041049NOYFH041301N

445

Features of your vehicle

Tripmeter (mi. or km)

TRIP A :Tripmeter A

TRIP B :Tripmeter B

This mode indicates the distance of indi-

vidual trips selected since the last trip-

meter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to

999.9 miles (0.0 to 9999.9 km).

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP

A or TRIP B) is being displayed, clears

the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)

Hyundai hybrid system notifies the driv-

ers of energy flow in various operating

modes. Eleven Modes show drivers the

current operating condition.

Vehicle Stop

This mode means the

vehicle is stopped.

(No energy flow)

OYFH043051N

Distance to Empty

Fuel Consumption

Energy Flow

ECO Level

Total ECO Score

AVG. Speed

Elapsed time

TRIP A

TRIP B

OYFH043320N

Features of your vehicle

464

EV Propulsion

Motor power is used to

propel the vehicle.

(Battery ➞ Wheel)

Power Assist

Motor and Engine

power are used to pro-

pel the vehicle.

(Battery & Energy ➞

Wheel)

Engine Only Propulsion

Engine power is used

to propel the vehicle.

(Engine ➞ Wheel)

Engine Generation

When the vehicle is

stopped, engine charges

the hybrid battery.

(Engine ➞ Battery)

Regeneration

The hybrid battery is

charged by the regen-

erative brake system.

(Wheel ➞ Battery)

Engine Brake

Engine braking is used

to help decelerate the

vehicle.

(Wheel ➞ Engine)

OYFH043333N

OYFH043335N

OYFH043336N

OYFH043333N

OYFH043347N

OYFH043329N

447

Features of your vehicle

Power Reserve

When the engine oper-

ates the vehicle, the

battery is simultane-

ously charged.

(Engine ➞ Wheel &

Battery)

Engine Generation/Motor Drive

To decelerate the vehi-

cle, engine braking is

used while the regener-

ative braking is applied

and also charges the

hybrid battery.

(Engine ➞ Battery ➞

Wheel)

Engine Generation/Regeneration

The engine and regen-

erative brake system

charges the hybrid bat-

tery.

(Engine & Wheel ➞

Battery)

Engine Brake/Regeneration

The engine friction is

used to slack the vehi-

cle and the regenera-

tive brake charges the

hybrid battery.

(Wheel ➞ Engine &

Battery)

ECO Level

Flower mode.1

When the hybrid vehicle is started, the

ECO level step 4 is displayed. If you drive

economically, ECO level will be upgraded.

- However, if you do not drive economi-

cally, the ECO level will be down-grad-

ed.

OYFH043349N

OYFH043323N

OYFH043329N

OYFH043332N

OYFH043337N

Features of your vehicle

484

Flower mode.2

In the "vehicle setting", if you change the

animation mode to "ON", the dynamic

image will be activated.

- This provides the driver with the

dynamic ECO mode.

Earth mode.1

When the hybrid vehicle is started, the

ECO level step 4 is displayed.If you drive

economically, ECO level will be upgrad-

ed.

- However, if you do not drive economi-

cally, the ECO level will be down-grad-

ed.

Earth mode.2

In the "vehicle setting", if you change the

animation mode to "ON", the dynamic

image will be activated.

- This provides the driver with the

dynamic ECO mode.

OYFH043350N

OYFH043351N

OYFH043338N

449

Features of your vehicle

Total ECO score display

If your ECO level achieves the top step,

your ECO score automatically saves 1

point.

In "vehicle setting", if you change the ani-

mation mode to “ON”, the dynamic

image will be on.

Distance to empty (mi. or km)

This mode indicates the estimated dis-

tance to empty based on the current fuel

in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel

delivered to the engine. When the

remaining distance is below 30 miles (50

km), “---” will be displayed and the dis-

tance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 30 to

990 miles (50 to 990 km).

Fuel economy (if equipped)

Average fuel consumption

(MPG or

/100km)

This mode calculates the average fuel

economy from the total fuel used and the

distance since the last average economy

reset. The total fuel used is calculated

from the fuel economy input. For an

accurate calculation, drive more than

0.03 miles (50 m).

Pressing the RESET button for more than

1 second, when the average fuel econo-

my is being displayed, clears the average

fuel economy to zero (----).

If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.6 MPH

(1km/h) after being refueled with more

than 1.6 gallons (6 l), the average fuel

economy will be cleared to zero (----).

OYFH043052N

OYFH043339N

OYFH043055N

Features of your vehicle

504

Instant fuel consumption

(MPG or l/100km)

This mode calculates the instant fuel

consumption every 2 seconds from the

driving distance and the fuel used.

Average speed (MPH or km/h)

This mode calculates the average speed

of the vehicle since the last average

speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

average speed keeps changing while the

engine is running.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the average speed

is being displayed, clears the average

speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time

This mode indicates the total time trav-

eled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

driving time keeps increasing while the

engine is running.

The meter’s working range is from

0:00~99:59.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the driving time is

being displayed, clears the driving time to

zero (0:00).

OYFH043057NOYFH043056NOYFH043054N

451

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-

ed, the “Distance to empty” function

may not operate correctly.

The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6

liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel consumption and distance to

empty values may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-

mate of the available driving distance.

This value may differ from the actual

driving distance available.

Vehicle setting

When the vehicle is parked, pressing the

TRIP button for more than 2 seconds

with the engine start/stop button in the

ON position or engine running, the LCD

screen on the cluster will change to the

vehicle setting mode.

You can change the item by pressing the

TRIP button and choose the item by

pressing the RESET button.

ECO background setting

Earth - If you change the ECO back-

ground to "Earth", The ECO

background will be changed to

Earth.

Flower - If you change the ECO back-

ground to "Flower", The ECO

background will be changed to

Flower.

Animation setting

On - If you change the animation mode

to "ON", the dynamic image will be

on.

Off - If you change the animation mode

to "OFF", the dynamic image will be

off.

AVG fuel economy

Auto Reset - The average fuel economy

will reset automatically

when you drive after refuel-

ing.

Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-

my will not reset auto-

matically when you drive

after refueling.

OYFH043313N

Features of your vehicle

524

Auto door lock

Off - The auto door lock operation will be

canceled.

Speed - All doors will be automatically

locked when the vehicle speed

exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).

Shift Lever

All doors will be automatically locked if

the shift lever is shifted from the P(Park)

position to the R(Reverse), N(Neutral) or

D(Drive) position.

Auto door unlock

Off - The auto door unlock operation will

be canceled.

Key Out - All doors will be automatically

unlocked when smart key is

removed from the smart key

holder.

Door - All doors will be automatically

unlocked if the driver's door is

unlocked inside.

Shift Lever

All doors will be automatically unlocked if

the shift lever is shifted to the P(Park)

position.

Two-press unlock

Driver Door 1st Press - The driver's door

will unlock when pressing the unlock but-

ton on the transmitter or smart key, press-

ing the button of the driver's outside door

handle with the smart key, or inserting the

key into the key hole of the driver's out-

side door and turning the key toward the

rear of the vehicle. All doors will unlock

when pressing the unlock button on the

smart key, pressing the button of the dri-

ver's outside door handle with the smart

key, or inserting the key into the key hole

of the driver's outside door and turning

the key toward the rear of the vehicle

within 4 seconds.

All Doors 1st Press - All doors will

unlock when pressing the unlock button

on the smart key, pressing the button on

the driver's outside door handle with the

smart key, or inserting the key into the

key hole of the driver's outside door and

turning the key toward the rear of the

vehicle.

Headlamp delay

On - If you turn the engine start/stop but-

ton to the ACC or OFF position with

the headlamp ON, the headlamps

remain on for about 20 minutes.

Also, the headlamp welcome opera-

tion will be activated. Refer to the

[LIGHTING] section in this chapter.

Off - The headlamp delay and headlamp

welcome operation will be disabled.

453

Features of your vehicle

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning

the engine start/stop button ON (do not

start the engine). Any light that does not

illuminate should be checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

After starting the Hybrid system, check to

make sure that all warning lights are off.

If any are still on, this indicates a situa-

tion that needs attention.When releasing

the parking brake, the brake system

warning light should go off. The fuel

warning light will stay on if the fuel level

is low.

EV mode

This light illuminates if the vehicle is

moved only by the electric motor.

Service indicator

This indicator comes on when any mal-

function occurs in the hybrid system. If

this occurs, have your vehicle checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the engine start/stop button to the

ON position.

This light also comes on when the

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is

not working properly. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not come on, or

continuously remains on after operating

for about 6 seconds when you turned the

engine start/stop button to the ON posi-

tion or started the engine, or if it comes

on while driving, have the SRS inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Features of your vehicle

544

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the engine

start/stop button is turned ON and goes

off in approximately 3 seconds if the sys-

tem is operating normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on, comes

on while driving, or does not come on when

the engine start/stop button is turned to the

ON position, this indicates that there may

be a malfunction with the ABS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.The normal braking sys-

tem will still be operational, but without the

assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

Electronic brake force distri-

bution (EBD) system warning

light

If these two warning lights illuminate at

the same time while driving, your vehicle

may have a malfunction with the ABS

and EBD system.

Have the vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-

ing light is on and stays on, the

speedometer or odometer/tripmeter

may not work. In this case, have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Seat belt warning

The driver's seat belt warning light and

chime will activate to the following table

when the engine start/stop button is in

"ON" position.

Warning pattern repeats 11 times with

interval 24 seconds. If the driver's seat

belt is buckled, the light will stop within

6 seconds and chime will stop immedi-

ately.

The light will stop within 6 seconds and

chime will stop immediately.

WARNING

If both the ABS and brake warning

lights are on and stay on,your vehi-

cle’s brake system will not work

normally during sudden braking. In

this case, avoid high speed driving

and abrupt braking. Have your vehi-

cle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Light-Blink

Chime-

Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds None

3 mph~

6 mph

6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds *

↓

Stop *

455

Features of your vehicle

Turn signal indicator

The blinking arrows on the instrument

panel show the direction indicated by the

turn signals. If the arrow comes on but

does not blink, blinks more rapidly than

normal, or does not illuminate at all, a

malfunction in the turn signal system is

indicated.Your dealer should be consult-

ed for repairs.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

lights are on and in the high beam posi-

tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Tail light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the tail

lights are on.

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oil

pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates while driv-

ing:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.

2.With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil or if oil is not available, call an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

If the engine is not stopped imme-

diately after the engine oil pressure

warning light is illuminated, severe

damage could result.

CAUTION

If the oil pressure warning light

stays on while the engine is run-

ning, serious engine damage may

result. The oil pressure warning

light comes on whenever there is

insufficient oil pressure. In normal

operation, it should come on when

the engine start/stop button is

turned on, then go out when the

engine is started. If the oil pressure

warning light stays on while the

engine is running, there is a serious

malfunction.

If this happens, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so, turn off

the engine and check the oil level. If

the oil level is low, fill the engine oil

to the proper level and start the

engine again. If the light stays on

with the engine running, turn the

engine off immediately. In any

instance where the oil light stays on

when the engine is running, the

engine should be checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer before

the car is driven again.

Features of your vehicle

564

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning

light on is dangerous. If the brake

warning light remains on, have the

brakes checked and repaired imme-

diately by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Brake system &

Parking brake &

Brake fluid warning light

When the service brake system or the

regenerative brake system malfunctions,

the brake warning light is turned on and

'check brake' is displayed on the LCD.

Have the system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

Parking brake warning

This light illuminated when the parking

brake is applied with engine start/stop

button in the START or ON position. The

warning light should go off when the

parking brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2.With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required.Then check all brake

components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are

found, the warning light remains on or

the brakes do not operate properly.

Have the vehicle towed to any author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-

tem inspection and necessary repairs.

Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-

diagonal braking system.This means you

still have braking on two wheels even if

one of the brake circuits is damaged or

malfunctions.With only one of the circuits

working, more than normal pedal travel

and greater pedal pressure are required

to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop

in as short a distance with only a portion

of the brake system working. If the

brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a

lower gear for additional engine braking

and stop the car as soon as it is safe to

do so.

To check bulb operation, check whether

the parking brake and brake fluid warning

light illuminates when the engine

start/stop button is in the ON position.

CAUTION

When the service brake system and

the regenerative brake system mal-

functions, the brake warning light is

turned on and 'check brake' is dis-

played on the LCD,and also the warn-

ing chime will sound. If this occurs

you can stop your vehicle by apply-

ing greater force to the brake pedal

than normal and the stopping dis-

tance will be longer. Have the system

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

457

Features of your vehicle

Low tire pressure

telltale

The low tire pressure telltale illuminates

when one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly underinflated.

The low tire pressure telltale will illumi-

nate after it blinks for approximately one

minute when there is a problem with the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

If this occurs, have the system checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

For details, refer to the TPMS on Chapter 6.

Automatic Transaxle shift

indicator

The indicator displays which automatic

transaxle shift position is selected.

✽✽

NOTICE

When the system is not working proper-

ly, the gear is not displayed. Have the

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Low tire pres-

sure

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and can

contribute to loss of vehicle control

and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on tires with low

pressure will cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

WARNING - Safe stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,

immediately take your foot off the

accelerator, apply the brakes

gradually and with light force,

and slowly move to a safe posi-

tion off the road.

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

584

Charging system warning

light

This warning light indicates a malfunction

of either the generator or electrical

charging system.

If the warning light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2.With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-

age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-

lem exists somewhere in the electrical

charging system. Have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem

as soon as possible.

Front fog light indicator

(if equipped)

This light comes on when the front fog

lights are ON.

Trunk lid open warning

light

This warning light illuminates when the

trunk lid is not closed securely with the

engine start/stop button in any position.

Door open warning

light

This indicator illuminates when a door is

not closed securely.

Immobilizer indicator

With smart key system

If any of the following occurs in a vehicle

equipped with the smart key, the immobi-

lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or the

light goes off.

• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if

the engine start/stop button is turned

to the ON position, the indicator will

illuminate for a few seconds. However,

when the smart key is not in the vehi-

cle, if the engine start/stop button is

depressed, the indicator will blink for a

few seconds to indicate that you will

not be able to start the hybrid system.

• When the engine start/stop button is

turned to the ON position and the indi-

cator turns off after 2 seconds, the sys-

tem may need repair. Have the vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

459

Features of your vehicle

• If the battery in the Smart Key remote

is weak, the engine may not start when

you push the start/stop button (and the

indicator will flash). Place the smart

key into the smart key holder in the

center console. If the vehicle now

starts normally, replace the battery

inside the smart key fob. If the indicator

still flashes, the system may need

repair. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer for assistance.

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tank

is nearly empty. When it comes on, you

should add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the fuel level warning light on

or with the fuel level below “E” can cause

the engine to misfire and damage the

catalytic converter.

Engine coolant

temperature warning light

(if equipped)

The warning light illuminates if the tem-

perature of the engine coolant is above

257±4.5°F (125±2.5°C).

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine.If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “Overheating” in Chapter 6.

Malfunction indicator light

(MIL) (check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the Engine

Control System which monitors various

emission control system components. If

this light illuminates while driving, it indi-

cates that a potential malfunction has

been detected somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

This light will also illuminate when the

engine start/stop button is in the ON

position, and will go out in a few seconds

after the engine is started.If it illuminates

while driving, or does not illuminate when

the engine start/stop button is in the ON

position, take your vehicle to your near-

est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be

drivable, but have the system checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.

Features of your vehicle

604

ESC indicator (Electronic

Stability Control)

The ESC indicator will illuminate when

the engine start/stop button is pressed to

ON, but should go off after approximate-

ly 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it

monitors the driving conditions under

normal driving conditions, the ESC light

will remain off. When a slippery or low

traction condition is encountered, the

ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator

will blink to indicate the ESC is operating.

The ESC indicator stays on when the

ESC may have a malfunction. Take your

car to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

and have the system checked.

ESC OFF indicator

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate

when the engine start/stop button is

pressed to ON, but should go off after

approximately 3 seconds. To switch to

ESC OFF mode, press the ESC OFF

button.The ESC OFF indicator will illumi-

nate indicating the ESC is deactivated.

If this indicator stays on when ESC OFF

is not selected, the ESC may have mal-

functioned. Take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have

the system checked.

CAUTION

• Prolonged driving with the

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nated may cause damage to the

emission control systems which

could effect drivability and/or fuel

economy.

•

If the Malfunction Indicator Light

illuminates, potential catalytic

converter damage is possible.

This could result in loss of engine

power. Have the Engine Control

System inspected as soon as pos-

sible by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

461

Features of your vehicle

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the

cruise control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster is illuminated when the

cruise control ON-OFF button on the

steering wheel is pushed.

The indicator light turns off when the

cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed

again. For more information about the

use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise

control system or Smart cruise control

system” in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the

cruise function switch (SET- or RES+) is

ON.

The cruise SET indicator light in the

instrument cluster is illuminated when

the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+)

is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light

does not illuminate when the cruise con-

trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the

system is disengaged.

Electric power steering

(EPS) system warning light

This indicator light comes on after the

engine start/stop button is turned to the

ON position and then it will go out.

This light also comes on when the EPS

needs repairs. If it comes on while driv-

ing, have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

SET

EPS

CRUISE

Features of your vehicle

624

Key reminder warning chime

(if equipped)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

smart key is in the vehicle with the

engine start/stop button in ACC or the

smart key is in the smart key holder with

the engine start/stop button in OFF, the

key reminder warning chime will sound.

The chime sounds until the smart key is

removed from the smart key holder or the

driver’s door is closed.

Warning on the LCD screen

(if equipped)

Key is not in vehicle

If the smart key is not in the vehicle and

if any door is opened or closed with the

engine start/stop button in ACC, ON, or

START, the warning illuminates on the

LCD screen.The chime also sounds for 5

seconds when the smart key is not in the

vehicle and any door is closed.

Key is not detected

If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is

not detected and you push the engine

start/stop button, the warning illuminates

on the LCD screen for 10 seconds.

OYFH043063NOYFH043062N

463

Features of your vehicle

Low key battery

When the smart key in the vehicle dis-

charges, the warning illuminates on the

LCD screen for 10 seconds.

Replace the battery with a new one. If it

is not possible, you can start the engine

by inserting the smart key into the smart

key holder and pushing the engine

start/stop button.

Press brake pedal to start engine

If the engine start/stop button turns to the

ACC position twice by pushing the

engine start/stop button repeatedly with-

out pressing the brake pedal, the warn-

ing illuminates on the LCD screen for 10

seconds to indicate that you should

press the brake pedal to start the engine.

Shift to "P"

If you push the engine start/stop button

with the engine start/stop button ON and

the shift lever not in P(Park), the warning

illuminates on the LCD screen for 10 sec-

onds to indicate that you should press

the engine start/stop button with the shift

lever in P(Park) to turn off the engine.

OYFH043065N OYFH043066N-1OYFH043064N

Features of your vehicle

644

Remove key

When you turn off the engine with the

smart key in the smart key holder, the

warning illuminates on the LCD screen

for 10 seconds.

Push the smart key inward and pull it out

from the smart key holder.

Insert key

If you push the engine start/stop button

while the "Key is not detected" illuminates

on the LCD screen, the “Insert Key” warn-

ing illuminates for 10 seconds.

Press start button again

If there is a problem with the engine

start/stop button system, the warning illu-

minates for 10 seconds to indicate that

you could start the engine by pressing

the engine start/stop button while press-

ing the brake pedal.

If the warning illuminates each time you

push the engine start/stop button, take

your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and have the system checked.

OYFH043069NOYFH043068NOYFH043067N

465

Features of your vehicle

Shift to "P" to start engine

If you try to start the engine with the shift

lever not in P(Park), the warning illumi-

nates for 10 seconds on the LCD screen.

Low tire pressure

When one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly under-inflated, the warning light

comes on.

The low tire pressure telltale will illumi-

nate after it blinks for approximately one

minute when there is a problem with the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

If this occurs, have the system checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

For details, refer to the TPMS on chapter 6.

Low washer fluid

This warning light indicates the washer

fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the

washer fluid as soon as possible.

OYFH043073N OYFH043075NOYFH043070N-1

Features of your vehicle

664

Check brake

If the 'Check brake' is displayed this indi-

cates there may be a malfunction with

the brake system or with the regenerative

brake system. Refer to page 4-56 for the

related information. Have the system

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

Check charging system

This warning will illuminate along with an

indicator light and warning chime if there

is a malfunction with the LDC (Low volt-

age DC inverter) system.

✽✽

NOTICE

The 'Check Charging system' warning

may occur when the battery voltage

level is too low. However, once the bat-

tery is charged by the engine, the warn-

ing may turn off.

Check active air flap system

This warning will be illuminated as fol-

lows:

- If an actuator flap malfunction is detected

- If an actuator air flap controller mal-

function is detected

- If the air flap does not open when

required.

When all the conditions causing the warn-

ing to be illuminated have been cleared,

the warning will turn off.

OYFH043306N OYFH043076N OYFH043310N

WARNING

Driving with the 'check brake' on is

dangerous. Have the system

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

467

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• The above warning message may

appear even though the active air flap

has not malfunctioned. If this occurs,

check the air flap for foreign matter

or if the flap has frozen.

• If the active air flap has frozen, the

warning message may not illuminate

immediately.

State of charge

This State of Charge(SOC) gauge indi-

cates the remaining Hybrid battery power.

If the SOC is near L level, the vehicle

automatically operates the engine to

charge the battery.However, if the service

indicator and MIL(Malfunction indicator

lamp) turn on when the State of

Charge(SOC) is near L(Low), have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer immediately.

OYFH041311N

CAUTION

Never try to start the vehicle if the

fuel tank is empty. In this condition,

the engine cannot charge the high

voltage battery of the hybrid sys-

tem. If you try to start the vehicle

when the fuel is empty, the high

voltage battery will become dis-

charged and be damaged.

Features of your vehicle

684

Refuel now to prevent Hybrid battery

damage

If the fuel tank is nearly empty, a message

“Refuel now to prevent Hybrid battery

damage!” will appear on the LCD display.

Also, the chime will sound several times.

You must stop and obtain additional fuel

as soon as possible.

Hybrid system warning! Safely stop

and do not drive

If the hybrid system error occurs, a mes-

sage “Hybrid system warning! Safely

stop and do not drive” will appear on the

LCD display and the Ready indicator will

blink. Also, the chime will sound until the

problem is resolved.

Have the vehicle towed to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer to inspect the hybrid

system.

Hybrid battery low! Safely stop and

shift to “P”

If the SOC (State Of Charge) is very low,

a message “Hybrid battery low! Safely

stop and shift to “P”” will appear on the

LCD display.

To charge the hybrid battery, stop in a

safe place and move the shift gear to the

P(Park) position as soon as possible.

OYFH043420L OYFH043423L OYFH043421L

CAUTION

Avoid driving with very low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could

damage the hybrid battery.

469

Features of your vehicle

Hybrid battery low! Do not start

engine

If the engine does not start and SOC

(State Of Charge) is very low, a message

“Hybrid battery low! Do not start engine”

will appear on the LCD display. Also, the

chime will sound until the problem is

resolved.

Have the vehicle towed to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer to inspect the hybrid

system and the engine.

The rearview camera will activate when

the back-up light is ON with the engine

start/stop button ON and the shift lever in

the R position.

This system is a supplemental system

that shows behind the vehicle through

the monitor while backing-up.

✽✽

NOTICE

The rearview camera may not operate

normally, in extremely high or low

temperatures (operating temperature :

-13°F~149°F (-20°C~65°C)).

OYFH043422L

REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-

bility of the driver to always

check the inside/outside rearview

mirror and the area behind the

vehicle before and while backing

up.

• Always keep the camera lens

clean. If the lens is covered with

foreign matter, the camera may

not operate normally.

OYF049081

OYF049082N

Features of your vehicle

704

The hazard warning flasher should be

used whenever you find it necessary to

stop the car in a hazardous location.When

you must make such an emergency stop,

always pull off the road as far as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on by

pushing in the hazard switch. This causes

all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard

warning lights will operate even if the vehi-

cle is off.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,

push the switch a second time.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OYF043084L

OYF049084N

■ Type B

■ Type A

471

Features of your vehicle

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lights when the

driver turns off the hybrid system and

opens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights will

be turned off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of the road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the vehicle is off, perform the fol-

lowing:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on the

steering column.

Headlamp delay (if equipped)

If you press the engine start/stop button

to the ACC or OFF position with the

headlights ON, the headlights (and/or tail

lights) remain on for about 5 minutes.

However, if the driver’s door is opened

and closed, the headlights are turned off

after 15 seconds.

The headlights can be turned off by

pressing the lock button on the smart key

twice or turning the light switch to the

OFF or Auto position.

However, if you turn the light switch to the

Auto position when it is dark outside, the

headlights will not be turned off.

Headlamp welcome function

When the headlight switch is in the ON or

AUTO position and all doors (and trunk)

are closed and locked, if you press the

door unlock button on the smart key, the

headlights will come on for about 15 sec-

onds. At this time, if you press the door

lock button on the smart key, the head-

lights will turn off immediately.

Daytime running light

(if equipped)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make

it easier for others to see the front of your

vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-

ful in many different driving conditions,

and it is especially helpful after dawn and

before sunset.

The DRL system will turn OFF when:

1.The headlight is ON.

2.Engine stops.

3.If the multifunction switch is on “DRL

OFF” position.

4. Parking brake ON.

LIGHTING

CAUTION

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors, the battery

saver function does not operate.

Therefore, it causes the battery to

be discharged. In this case, make

sure to turn off the lamp before get-

ting out of the vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

724

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a

Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the

end of the control lever to one of the fol-

lowing positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parking

light position, the tail, position and

license lights are ON and the tail light

indicator is ON (if equipped).

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlight

position the head, tail, license and instru-

ment panel lights are ON.

✽✽

NOTICE

The engine start/stop button must be in

the ON position to turn on the head-

lights.

OYFH041900N OYFH041901N OYFH041902N

473

Features of your vehicle

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO light

position, the taillights and headlights will

be turned ON or OFF automatically

depending on the amount of light outside

the vehicle.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights, push

the lever away from you. Pull it back for

low beams. The high beam indicator will

light when the headlight high beams are

switched on.

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on for a

prolonged time while the engine is not

running.

OYFH041906N

CAUTION

• Never place anything over the

sensor (1) located on the instru-

ment panel.This will ensure prop-

er auto-light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a

window cleaner. The cleaner may

leave a light film which could

interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or

other types of metallic coating on

the front windshield, the Auto

light system may not work prop-

erly.

OYFH041904N

WARNING

Do not use the high beams improp-

erly. Always follow local laws and

regulations when using the high

beams. Using high beam could

obstruct the other driver's vision,

causing an accident, resulting in

injury or death.

Features of your vehicle

744

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the normal

(low beam) position when released. The

headlight switch does not need to be on

to use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane change sig-

nals

The engine start/stop button must be on

for the turn signals to function.To turn on

the turn signals, move the lever up or

down (A). Green arrow indicators on the

instrument panel indicate which turn sig-

nal is operating. They will self-cancel

after a turn is completed. If the indicator

continues to flash after a turn, manually

return the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn

signal lever slightly and hold it in position

(B).The lever will return to the OFF posi-

tion when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the

turn signal bulbs may be burned out and

will require replacement.

One-touch triple turn signal

To activate a one-touch triple turn signal

move the turn signal lever up or down

slightly and then release it. The lane

change signal will blink 3 times.

✽✽

NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick

or slow, a bulb may be burned out or

have a poor electrical connection in the

circuit.

OYFH041903N OYFH041907N

475

Features of your vehicle

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved

visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,

rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn

on when fog light switch (1) is turned to

ON after the headlights are turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch

to OFF.

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor or

unnecessary battery and generator

drain could occur.

OYFH041905N

Features of your vehicle

764

WIPERS AND WASHERS

A :Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent or Auto control wipe

time adjustment

C :Wash with brief wipes (if equipped)

* : if equipped

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the engine

start/stop button is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push

the lever upward and release it

with the lever in the OFF position.

The wipers will operate continu-

ously if the lever is pushed

upward and held.

OFF: Wiper is not in operation

INT :Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals.Use this

mode in a light rain or mist.To vary

the speed setting, turn the speed

control knob(1).

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

✽✽

NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield, defrost the

windshield for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windshield wipers to

ensure proper operation.

OYF049100 OYF049102

CAUTION

When starting the vehicle in winter,

set the wiper switch in the OFF

position. Otherwise, wipers may

operate and ice may damage the

windshield wiper blades. Always

remove all snow and ice and defrost

the windshield properly prior to

operating the windshield wipers.

(AUTO)

477

Features of your vehicle

Windshield washers (if equipped)

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently

toward you to spray washer fluid on the

windshield and to run the wipers 1-3

cycles.

Use this function when the windshield is

dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will con-

tinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the

washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not

sufficient, you will need to add appropri-

ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid

to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the

front of the engine compartment on the

passenger side.

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to the

washer pump, do not operate the

washer when the fluid reservoir is

empty.

WARNING

Do not use the washer in freezing

temperatures without first warming

the windshield with the defrosters;

the washer solution could freeze on

contact with the windshield and

obscure your vision.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not

operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

OYF049101

Features of your vehicle

784

Map lamp

Type A

Push the lens to turn the map lamp on or

off. This light produces a spot beam for

convenient use as a map lamp at night or

as a personal lamp for the driver and the

front passenger.

• DOOR :

In the DOOR position, the map lamp and

the room lamp come on when any door is

opened regardless of the engine

start/stop button position.

When doors are unlocked by the smart

key, the map lamp and the room lamp

come on for approximately 30 seconds

as long as any door is not open.The map

lamp and the room lamp goes out gradu-

ally after approximately 30 seconds if the

door is closed. However, if the engine

start/stop button is ON or all doors are

locked, the map lamp and the room lamp

will turn off immediately. If a door is

opened with the engine start/stop button

in the ACC or LOCK position, the map

lamp and the room lamp stay on for

about 20 minutes. However, if a door is

opened with the engine start/stop button

in the ON position, the map lamp and the

room lamp stay on continuously.

• ON :

The light stays on at all times.

• OFF :

The lights turn off even if a door is

opened.

❈ When the lamp is turned ON by press-

ing the lens (1) the lamp does not turn

off even if the switch (2) is in the OFF

position.

OYF049104K

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine

is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when

driving in the dark. Accidents could

happen because the view may be

obscured by interior lights.

479

Features of your vehicle

Type B

• :

Press the button to turn the map lamp

on. This light produces a spot beam for

convenient use as a map lamp at night or

as a personal lamp for the driver and the

front passenger. To turn the lamp off,

press the button again.

• DOOR :

- The map lamp and room lamp comes

on when door are unlocked with a

transmitter or smart key as long as the

doors are closed. The lamps go out

after approximately 30 seconds.

- The map lamp and room lamp comes

on for approximately 30 seconds when

doors are unlocked with a transmitter

or smart key as long as the doors are

not opened.

- The map lamp and room lamp will stay

on for approximately 20 minutes if a

door is opened with the ignition switch

in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will

stay on continuously if the door is

opened with the ignition switch in the

ON position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will go

out immediately if the ignition switch

is changed to the ON position or all

doors are locked.

• ROOM :

The map lamp and room lamp stays on

at all times.

OYF043104N

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

804

Trunk lamp

The trunk room lamp comes on when the

trunk is opened.

OYF049108

CAUTION

The trunk lamp comes on as long

as the trunk lid is open. To prevent

unnecessary charging system

drain, close the trunk lid securely

after using the trunk.

CAUTION

Do not leave the lamp switches on for an extended period of time when the

vehicle is not running.

OYF049105

OYF049216

OYF042105

OYF042216

■ Type C

■ Type D

Room lamp

To turn the room lamp ON or OFF, push the switch or lens.

■ Type A

■ Type B

481

Features of your vehicle

Glove box lamp

If the glove box is opened, the glove box

lamp will come on.

Vanity mirror lamp

Pull the sunvisor downward and you can

turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or OFF by

pushing the button.

• :To turn the lamp ON.

• O :To turn the lamp OFF.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

• When all entrances are closed, if you

lock the vehicle by using the smart key,

all interior lamps will be off within 5

seconds.

• If you do not operate anything in the

vehicle after turning off the engine, the

lights will turn off after 20 minutes.

OYF049209

CAUTION

To prevent unnecessary charging

system drain, turn off the lamp by

pushing the O button after using

the lamp.

OYF049107

CAUTION

To prevent unnecessary charging

system drain, close the glove box

securely after using the glove box.

Features of your vehicle

824

✽✽

NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windshield, refer to “Windshield

defrosting and defogging” in this sec-

tion.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from the

rear window, while the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,

press the rear window defroster button

located in the center facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-

ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 20 minutes

or when the engine start/stop button is

turned off.To turn off the defroster, press

the rear window defroster button again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the out-

side rearview mirror defrosters, they will

operate at the same time you turn on the

rear window defroster.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface of

the rear window, never use sharp

instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the

window.

DEFROSTER

OYF043155

OYF049155

■ Type A

■ Type B

483

Features of your vehicle

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (TYPE A)

1. Fan speed control button

2. OFF button

3. Air conditioning button

4. Driver’s temperature control knob

5. AUTO (automatic control) button

6. A/C display

7. Front windshield defrost button

8. Mode selection button

9. Rear window defrost button

10. Air intake control button

11. Passenger’s temperature control knob

12. Dual temperature control selection button

OYFH044403L

Features of your vehicle

844

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and

air-conditioning will be controlled auto-

matically according to the temperature

setting.

2.Turn the temperature control knob to

set the desired temperature.

✽✽

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating and

cooling system.

OYF049122OYF043121 OYF043161

485

Features of your vehicle

Manual heating and air condition-

ing

The heating and cooling system can be

controlled manually by pressing buttons

or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO

button. In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons or knob(s) selected.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-

vert to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

OYF043114

Features of your vehicle

864

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as

follows:

Face-Level (B, D, C, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windshield and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windshield with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

OYF043123 OYF043124

487

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position.To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the max-

imum by turning the knob to the right

extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum by turning the knob to the left

extremely.

The temperature will increase or

decrease by 1°F/0.5°C.

Temperature setting, the air conditioning

will operate continuously.

Adjusting the driver and passenger side

temperature individually

1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperature

individually. Also, if the passenger side

temperature control knob is operated,

it will automatically change to the

DUAL mode as well.

2. Operate the driver side temperature

control to adjust the driver side tem-

perature. Operate the passenger side

temperature control to adjust the pas-

senger side temperature.

When the driver side temperature is set

to the highest (HIGH) or lowest (LOW)

temperature, the DUAL mode deacti-

vates for maximum heating or cooling.

OYF049115 OYF043161L

OYF043226

■ Driver ■ Passenger

Features of your vehicle

884

Adjusting the driver and passenger side

temperature equally

1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-

tivate DUAL mode. The passenger

side temperature will be set to the

same temperature as the driver side.

2. Operate the driver side temperature

control knob. The driver and passen-

ger side temperature will be adjusted

equally.

Temperature conversion

You can switch the temperature mode

between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as fol-

lows:

While pressing the OFF button, press the

AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.

The display will change from Centigrade

to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to

Centigrade.

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh)

air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when the

recirculated air position is

selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button will not illuminate

when the outside (fresh) air

position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

OYF043125

489

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

Fan speed control

The fan speed control button allows you

to control the fan speed of the airflow in

the vehicle.

To change the fan speed:

• Press the up ( ) button to increase

fan speed.

• Press the down ( ) button to

decrease fan speed.

To turn off the fan speed, press the OFF

button.

WARNING

• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-

culated air position may allow

humidity to increase inside the

vehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxygen

level and/or body temperature.

• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-

culated air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss

of vehicle control. Set the air intake

control to the outside (fresh) air

position as much as possible while

driving.

OYF043126

Features of your vehicle

904

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-

tioning system on (indicator light will illu-

minate).

Push the button again to turn the air con-

ditioning system off.

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-

mate control system. However, you can

still operate the air intake buttons as long

as the engine start/stop button is in the

ON position.

Economy air conditioning button

1. If you push the ECON button while the

air conditioning system is working, the

air conditioning system will work less

and it could improve the fuel efficiency.

2. If you want maximum air conditioning

while ECON system is working, turn

the ECON system off by pushing the

ECON button.

OYF043166 OYF043128 OYFH044340N

491

Features of your vehicle

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the

, position.

Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the vehicle through the

ventilation system, temporarily set the

air intake control to the recirculated air

position. Be sure to return the control

to the fresh air position when the out-

side smell or dust has passed, to keep

fresh air in the vehicle.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windshield. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the recir-

culated air position. However, pro-

longed operation of the recirculated air

position will excessively dry the air. In

this case, change the air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position then set the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

Features of your vehicle

924

✽✽

NOTICE

• While using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the engine temperature

gauge closely while driving up hills or

in heavy traffic when outside temper-

atures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the engine temperature

gauge indicates engine overheating.

• Opening the windows in humid

weather while the air conditioning

operates may create water droplets

inside the vehicle. Since excessive

water droplets may cause damage to

electrical equipment, air conditioning

should only be used with the windows

closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristic.

• If you operate the air conditioner

excessively, the difference between the

temperature of the outside air and that

of the windshield could cause the outer

surface of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this case,

set the mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan speed con-

trol to the lower speed.

493

Features of your vehicle

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windshield even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected.If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough roads,

more frequent climate control air fil-

ter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and

amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, damage to the compressor and

abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING

The air conditioning system for the

Hybrid vehicle should be serviced

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The Hybrid air conditioning system

is connected to the high voltage

system and requires special fluids,

tools and service procedures.

Improperly servicing the Hybrid air

conditioning system could result in

electrical shock, serious injury, or

even death.

OMG075033

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

Features of your vehicle

944

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (TYPE B)

1. Front windshield defrost button

2. Rear window defrost button

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. OFF button

5. Driver’s temperature control knob

6. Mode indicator

7. Mode selection button

8. Fan speed indicator

9. Fan speed control button

10. Air intake control button

11. Economy air conditioning button

12. Air conditioning button

13. Dual temperature control selection button

14. Passenger’s temperature control knob

OYFH041157A

495

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and

air-conditioning will be controlled auto-

matically according to the temperature

setting.

2.Turn the temperature control knob to

set the desired temperature.

✽✽

NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defrost button

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other functions

operate automatically.

• For your convenience and to improve

the effectiveness of the climate con-

trol, use the AUTO button and set the

temperature to 73°F (23°C).

✽✽

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating and

cooling system.

OYF049122OYF049121 OYF049161N

Features of your vehicle

964

Manual heating and air condition-

ing

The heating and cooling system can be

controlled manually by pressing buttons

or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO

button. In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons or knob(s) selected.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-

vert to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

OYF049114N

497

Features of your vehicle

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as

follows:

Face-Level (B, C, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windshield and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor & Defrost

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windshield with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

OYF049112 OYFH041124A

Features of your vehicle

984

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position.To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the

maximum by turning the knob to the

extreme right.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum by turning the knob to the

extreme left.

When turning the knob, the temperature

will increase or decrease by 2°F.

Adjusting the driver and passenger side

temperature individually

1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperature

individually. Turning the right tempera-

ture control knob will automatically

switch to the DUAL mode as well.

2.Turn the left temperature control knob

to adjust the driver side temperature.

Turn the right temperature control

knob to adjust the passenger side tem-

perature.

When the driver side temperature is set

to the highest or lowest temperature set-

ting, the DUAL mode is deactivated for

maximum heating or cooling.

OYF049115 OYF049161N

OYFH041226A

499

Features of your vehicle

Adjusting the driver and passenger side

temperature equally

1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-

tivate DUAL mode. The passenger

side temperature will be set to the

same temperature as the driver side

temperature.

2.Turn the left temperature control knob.

The driver and passenger side tem-

perature will be adjusted equally.

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh)

air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when the

recirculated air position is

selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button will not illuminate

when the outside (fresh) air

position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

OYFH041125N

Features of your vehicle

1004

✽✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired

speed by pushing the fan speed control

button.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air

is delivered.

WARNING

• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-

culated air position may allow

humidity to increase inside the

vehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxygen

level and/or body temperature.

• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-

culated air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss

of vehicle control. Set the air intake

control to the outside (fresh) air

position as much as possible while

driving.

OYF049164

4101

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-

tioning system on (indicator light will illu-

minate).

Push the button again to turn the air con-

ditioning system off.

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-

mate control system. However, you can

still operate the mode and air intake but-

tons as long as the engine start/stop but-

ton is in the ON position.

Economy air conditioning button

1. If you push the ECON button while the

air conditioning system is working, the

air conditioning system will work less

and it could improve the fuel efficiency.

2. If you want maximum air conditioning

while ECON system is working, turn

the ECON system off by pushing the

ECON button.

OYFH041127A OYFH041128A OYFH041340A

Features of your vehicle

1024

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the

, position.

Operation Tips

• If you press the engine start/stop but-

ton to the ACC or OFF position with the

headlights ON, the headlights (and/or

tail lights) remain on for about 5 min-

utes. However, if the driver’s door is

opened and closed, the headlights are

turned off after 15 seconds.

• The headlights can be turned off by

pressing the lock button on the smart

key twice or turning the light switch to

the OFF or Auto position.

• However, if you turn the light switch to

the Auto position when it is dark out-

side, the headlights will not be turned

off.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windshield. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the recir-

culated air position. However, pro-

longed operation of the recirculated air

position will excessively dry the air. In

this case, change the air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position then set the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

4103

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• While using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the engine temperature

gauge closely while driving up hills or

in heavy traffic when outside temper-

atures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the engine temperature

gauge indicates engine overheating.

• Opening the windows in humid

weather while the air conditioning

operates may create water droplets

inside the vehicle. Since excessive

water droplets may cause damage to

electrical equipment, air conditioning

should only be used with the windows

closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristic.

• If you operate the air conditioner

excessively, the difference between the

temperature of the outside air and that

of the windshield could cause the outer

surface of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this case,

set the mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan speed con-

trol to the lower speed.

Features of your vehicle

1044

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windshield even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected.If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough roads,

more frequent climate control air fil-

ter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and

amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, damage to the compressor and

abnormal system operation may occur.

OMG075033

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

WARNING

The air conditioning system for the

Hybrid vehicle should be serviced

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The Hybrid air conditioning system

is connected to the high voltage

system and requires special fluids,

tools and service procedures.

Improperly servicing the Hybrid air

conditioning system could result in

electrical shock, serious injury, or

even death.

4105

Features of your vehicle

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (TYPE C)

1. Front windshield defrost button

2. Rear window defrost button

3. ECON (economy air conditioning button)

4. OFF button

5. Driver’s temperature control knob

6. AUTO (automatic control) button

7. Mode selection button

8. Fan speed control button

9. Air intake control button

10. Air conditioning button

11. Climate information screen selection button

12. Passenger’s temperature control knob

13. Dual temperature control selection button

OYFH041341A

Features of your vehicle

1064

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and

air-conditioning will be controlled auto-

matically according to the temperature

setting.

2.Turn the temperature control knob to

set the desired temperature.

✽✽

NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defrost button

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other functions

operate automatically.

• For your convenience and to improve

the effectiveness of the climate con-

trol, use the AUTO button and set the

temperature to 73°F (23°C).

✽✽

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating and

cooling system.

OYF049122

OYFH041345A OYFH041343A

4107

Features of your vehicle

Manual heating and air condition-

ing

The heating and cooling system can be

controlled manually by pressing buttons

or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO

button. In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons or knob(s) selected.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-

vert to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

OYF049114N

Features of your vehicle

1084

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

If you push the button once, the corre-

sponding switch will turn on, and if you

push the button again, the switch will turn

off.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

(Button 1)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield.

Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

(Button 2)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face.Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

(Button 3)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor.

Also you may select 2~3 modes at the

same time for desired air flow.

-( ) Defrost & Face (Button 1 and 2)

-( ) Floor & Defrost (Button 1 and 3)

-( ) Face & Floor (Button 2 and 3)

-( ) All-mode (Button 1,2 and 3)

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

OYFH041112N

OYFH041124A

4109

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position.To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the

maximum by turning the knob to the

extreme right.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum by turning the knob to the

extreme left.

When turning the knob, the temperature

will increase or decrease by 1°F.

Adjusting the driver and passenger side

temperature individually

1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperature

individually. Turning the right tempera-

ture control knob will automatically

switch to the DUAL mode as well.

2.Turn the left temperature control knob

to adjust the driver side temperature.

Turn the right temperature control

knob to adjust the passenger side tem-

perature.

When the driver side temperature is set

to the highest or lowest temperature set-

ting, the DUAL mode is deactivated for

maximum heating or cooling.

OYF049115 OYFH041344A

■ Driver ■ Passenger

OYFH041346A

Features of your vehicle

1104

Adjusting the driver and passenger side

temperature equally

1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-

tivate DUAL mode. The passenger

side temperature will be set to the

same temperature as the driver side

temperature.

2.Turn the left temperature control knob.

The driver and passenger side tem-

perature will be adjusted equally.

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh)

air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

✽✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

OYF049125

4111

Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired

speed by pushing the fan speed control

button.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air

is delivered.

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-

tioning system on (indicator light will illu-

minate).

Push the button again to turn the air con-

ditioning system off.

WARNING

• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-

culated air position may allow

humidity to increase inside the

vehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxygen

level and/or body temperature.

• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-

culated air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss

of vehicle control. Set the air intake

control to the outside (fresh) air

position as much as possible while

driving.

OYFH041164N OYFH041127N

Features of your vehicle

1124

Climate information screen selection

(if equipped)

Press the climate information screen

selection button to display climate infor-

mation on the screen.

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-

mate control system. However, you can

still operate the mode and air intake but-

tons as long as the engine start/stop but-

ton is in the ON position.

Economy air conditioning button

1. If you push the ECON button while the

air conditioning system is working, the

air conditioning system will work less

and it could improve the fuel efficiency.

2. If you want maximum air conditioning

while ECON system is working, turn

the ECON system off by pushing the

ECON button.

OYFH041300N

OYFH041128A OYFH041342A

4113

Features of your vehicle

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the

, position.

Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the vehicle through the

ventilation system, temporarily set the

air intake control to the recirculated air

position. Be sure to return the control

to the fresh air position when the out-

side smell or dust has passed, to keep

fresh air in the vehicle.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windshield. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the recir-

culated air position. However, pro-

longed operation of the recirculated air

position will excessively dry the air. In

this case, change the air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position then set the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

Features of your vehicle

1144

✽✽

NOTICE

• While using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the engine temperature

gauge closely while driving up hills or

in heavy traffic when outside temper-

atures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the engine temperature

gauge indicates engine overheating.

• Opening the windows in humid

weather while the air conditioning

operates may create water droplets

inside the vehicle. Since excessive

water droplets may cause damage to

electrical equipment, air conditioning

should only be used with the windows

closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristic.

• If you operate the air conditioner

excessively, the difference between the

temperature of the outside air and that

of the windshield could cause the outer

surface of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this case,

set the mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan speed con-

trol to the lower speed.

4115

Features of your vehicle

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windshield even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected.If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough roads,

more frequent climate control air fil-

ter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and

amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, damage to the compressor and

abnormal system operation may occur.

OMG075033

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

WARNING

The air conditioning system for the

Hybrid vehicle should be serviced

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The Hybrid air conditioning system

is connected to the high voltage

system and requires special fluids,

tools and service procedures.

Improperly servicing the Hybrid air

conditioning system could result in

electrical shock, serious injury, or

even death.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-

perature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while

defrosting or defogging, set the mode

to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice

from the windshield, rear window, out-

side rear view mirrors, and all side win-

dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood

and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve

heater and defroster efficiency and to

reduce the probability of fogging up the

inside of the windshield.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4.The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is not

selected automatically, adjust the corre-

sponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

4116

Features of your vehicle

OYFH041252N

OYF043131

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type C

OYFH041250A

WARNING - Windshield

heating

Do not use the or position

during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

shield could cause the outer sur-

face of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection knob

or button to the position and

fan speed control knob or button to

a lower speed.

To defrost outside windshield

1.Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4.The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

Defogging logic

To reduce the probability of fogging up

the inside of the windshield, the air intake

is controlled automatically according to

certain conditions such as or

position. To cancel or return the defog-

ging logic, perform the following steps.

Features of your vehicle

1174

OYFH041253N

OYF043132

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type C

OYFH041251A

Automatic climate control system

1. Press the engine start/stop button to

the ON position.

2. Select the defrost position pressing

defrost button ( ).

3.While holding the air conditioning but-

ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intake

control button at least 5 times within 3

seconds.

The indicator on the air intake control

button blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of

interval. It indicates that the defogging

logic is canceled or returned to the pro-

grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, the system resets to the pro-

grammed defogging logic.

4118

Features of your vehicle

OYFH041220N-1

These compartments can be used to

store small items.

Center console storage

To open the center console storage, pull

up the lever.

Glove box

The glove box can be locked and

unlocked with the mechanical key (1).

To open the glove box, pull the handle (2)

and the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNING - Flammable

materials

Do not store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders,or other flamma-

ble/explosive materials in the vehi-

cle. These items may catch fire

and/or explode if the vehicle is

exposed to hot temperatures for

extended periods.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartments.

• Always keep the storage com-

partment covers closed while

driving. Do not attempt to place

so many items in the storage

compartment that the storage

compartment cover cannot close

securely.

OYFH041138N1OYF049137

WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an

accident or sudden stop, always

keep the glove box door closed

while driving.

CAUTION

Do not keep food in the glove box

for a long time.

Features of your vehicle

1194

Sunglass holder

To open the sunglass holder, press the

cover and the holder will slowly open.Place

your sunglasses in the compartment door

with the lenses facing out. Push to close.

Multi box

To open the cover, press the button and

the multibox will automatically open.

4120

Features of your vehicle

OYF049139N

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass holder.

Such objects can be thrown from

the holder in the event of a sudden

stop or an accident, possibly injur-

ing the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder

while the vehicle is moving. The

rear view mirror of the vehicle can

be blocked by an open sunglass

holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly

into a sunglass holder to prevent

breakage or deformation of

glasses. It may cause personal

injury if you try to open it forcibly

when the glasses are jammed in

holder.

OYF043418N

OYF049140N

■ Type A

■ Type B

Cup holder

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull

it downward, unsnap it from the bracket

(1) and swing it to the side (2).

OYF049143N

OYF049144N

■ Rear

■ Front

OYF049145

HTG2174

WARNING - Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder while

the vehicle is in motion. If the hot

liquid spills, you may burn your-

self. Such a burn to the driver

could lead to loss of control of

the vehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personal

injury in the event of sudden stop

or collision, do not place uncov-

ered or unsecured bottles, glass-

es, cans, etc., in the cup holder

while the vehicle is in motion.

INTERIOR FEATURES

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct

sun light and do not put them in a

vehicle that is heated up. It may

explode causing serious burns or

injuries.

Features of your vehicle

1214

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or

backward (4).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the

visor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Push the switch to turn the light on or off.

(if equipped)

• : The light turns on.

•

:The light turns off.

Power outlet

The power outlet is designed to provide

power for mobile telephones or other

devices designed to operate with vehicle

electrical systems. The devices should

draw less than 10 amps with the engine

running.

CAUTION

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove

the accessory plug after use.

Using the accessory plug for pro-

longed periods of time with the

engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in elec-

tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can cause

electronic interference when

plugged into a vehicle’s power out-

let. These devices may cause

excessive audio static and malfunc-

tions in other electronic systems or

devices used in your vehicle.

WARNING

Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-

ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet

and do not touch with a wet hand.

You may get an electric shock.

OYF049146N

CAUTION - Vanity mirror

lamp (if equipped)

• Always have the switch in the off

position when the vanity mirror

lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor

is closed with the lamp on, it may

discharge the battery or damage

the sunvisor.

• Always use the sunvisor exten-

sion, after swinging the sunvisor

to the side.

4122

Features of your vehicle

Digital clock (if equipped)

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-

ed fuses are disconnected, you must

reset the time.

When the engine start/stop button is in

the ACC or ON position, the clock but-

tons operate as follows:

Hour (1)

Pressing the H button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one hour.

Minute (2)

Pressing the M button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one minute.

Display conversion

To change the 12 hour format to the 24

hour format, press the “H” and “M” but-

tons at the same time for more than 3

seconds.

For example, if the “H” and “M” buttons

are pressed for more than 3 seconds

while the time is 10:15 p.m., the display

will be changed to 22:15.

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To use the hanger, pull down the upper

portion of hanger.

OUN026348

CAUTION

Do not hang heavy clothes,

because it may damage the hook.

OYF049224

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driv-

ing. You may lose your steering

control and cause an accident that

results in severe personal injury or

death.

Features of your vehicle

1234

Floor mat anchor(s)

When using a floor mat on the front floor

carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor

mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.This keeps

the floor mat from sliding forward.

Aux, USB and iPod

port

If your vehicle has an aux and/or

USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod

port, you can use an aux port to connect

audio devices, a USB port to plug in a

USB, and an iPod

port to plug in an

iPod

✽✽

NOTICE

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise may

occur during playback. If this happens,

use the power source of the portable

audio device.

❈ iPod

is a trademark of Apple Inc.

WARNING

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat to

the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicle's

floor mat anchor(s) before driving

the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to the

vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of

one another (e.g. all-weather rub-

ber mat on top of a carpeted floor

mat). Only a single floor mat

should be installed in each posi-

tion.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver's side

floor mat anchors that are designed

to securely hold the floor mat in

place. To avoid any interference

with pedal operation, HYUNDAI rec-

ommends that only the HYUNDAI

floor mat designed for use in your

vehicle be installed.

OYF049147NOYF049234N

4124

Features of your vehicle

4125

Features of your vehicle

Navigation system (if equipped)

The navigation system ascertains the

present position of your vehicle by using

information from satellites and guides

you to the place you assign as the desti-

nation.

Detailed information for the navigation

system is described in a separate sup-

plied manual.

Bluetooth hands-free

You can use the mobile phone wirelessly

by using the Bluetooth system.

Detailed information for the Bluetooth

hands-free is described in the “Audio

system” section in this chapter or in the

manual supplied separately.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If you install an after market HID

head lamp, your vehicle's audio and

electronic device may malfunction.

• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,

cosmetil oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,

and air freshener from contacting the

interior parts because they may cause

damage or discoloration.

Antenna

Glass antenna (if equipped)

When the radio power switch is turned on

while the engine start/stop button is in

either the “ON” or “ACC” position, your

car will receive both AM and FM broad-

cast signals through the antenna in the

rear window glass.

AUDIO SYSTEM

OYF049150

CAUTION

• Do not clean the inside of the rear

window glass with a cleaner or

scraper to remove foreign

deposits as this may cause dam-

age to the antenna elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coatings

such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These

can disturb receiving AM and FM

broadcast signals.

Features of your vehicle

1264

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel may incorporate

audio control buttons.

1.VOLUME (VOL+/-)

• Push the lever upward (+) to increase

the volume.

• Push the lever downward (-) to

decrease the volume.

2. PRESET/SEEK ( / )

The SEEK/PRESET button has different

functions based on the system mode.

For the following functions the button

should be pressed for 0.8 second or

more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select

button.

CD/USB/ iPod mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for less than 0.8 second, it will work as

follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION

buttons.

CD/USB/ iPod mode

It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN

button.

3. MODE

Press the button to change audio source.

- FM(1~2)

➟ AM➟ SAT(1~3)➟ CD➟ USB

AUX(iPod) FM...

Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the following

pages in this section.

CAUTION

Do not operate audio remote con-

trol buttons simultaneously.

YF_HANDLE

4127

Features of your vehicle

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast

from transmitter towers located around

your city. They are intercepted by the

radio antenna on your vehicle.This signal

is then processed by the radio and sent

to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached

your vehicle, the precise engineering of

your audio system ensures the best pos-

sible quality reproduction. However, in

some cases the signal coming to your

vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the

distance from the radio station, close-

ness of other strong radio stations or the

presence of buildings, bridges or other

large obstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broadcasts.

This is because AM radio waves are

transmitted at low frequencies. These

long distance, low frequency radio waves

can follow the curvature of the earth

rather than travelling straight. In addition,

they curve around obstructions resulting

in better signal coverage.

JBM001

FM reception

JBM002

AM reception

Features of your vehicle

1284

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

frequencies and do not bend to follow the

earth's surface. Because of this, FM

broadcasts generally begin to fade within

short distances from the station. Also,

FM signals are easily affected by build-

ings, mountains, and obstructions. This

can lead to undesirable or unpleasant

listening conditions which might lead you

to believe a problem exists with your

radio. The following conditions are nor-

mal and do not indicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away

from the radio station, the signal will

weaken and sound will begin to fade.

When this occurs, we suggest that you

select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the trans-

mitter and your radio can disturb the

signal causing static or fluttering nois-

es to occur. Reducing the treble level

may lessen this effect until the distur-

bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal

weakens, another more powerful sig-

nal near the same frequency may

begin to play. This is because your

radio is designed to lock onto the clear-

est signal. If this occurs, select another

station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals

being received from several directions

can cause distortion or fluttering. This

can be caused by a direct and reflect-

ed signal from the same station, or by

signals from two stations with close

frequencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition has

passed.

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM004 JBM005

4129

Features of your vehicle

Using a cellular phone or a two-way

radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the

vehicle, noise may be produced from the

audio system. This does not mean that

something is wrong with the audio equip-

ment. In such a case, try to operate

mobile devices as far from the audio

equipment as possible.

Caring for disc

• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows to ventilate

before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA

files without permission. Use CDs that

are created only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, such as

benzene and thinner, normal cleaners

and magnetic sprays made for ana-

logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-

ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges

or the center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of

soft cloth before playback (wipe it from

the center to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface or

attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.

• Make certain only CDs are inserted

into the CD player (Do not insert more

than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to

protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-

RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate

normally according to the manufactur-

ing companies.In such circumstances,

continued use may cause malfunctions

to your audio system.

✽✽

NOTICE - Playing an

Incompatible Copy

Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not

comply with international audio CD

standards (Red Book), may not play on

your car audio. Please note that inabili-

ties to properly play a copy protected

CD may indicate that the CD is defec-

tive, not the CD player.

CAUTION

When using a communication sys-

tem such as a cellular phone or a

radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-

rate external antenna must be fitted.

When a cellular phone or a radio set

is used with an internal antenna

alone, it may interfere with the vehi-

cle's electrical system and adversely

affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a cellular phone while

driving. Stop at a safe location to

use a cellular phone.

Features of your vehicle

1304

NOTE:

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : to sequen-

tially.

2.Folder playing order :

❋ If no song file is contained in the fold-

er, that folder is not displayed.

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen while

driving. Staring at the screen for

prolonged periods of time could

lead to traffic accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assemble, or

modify the audio system. Such

acts could result in accidents,

fire, or electric shock.

• Using the phone while driving may

lead to a lack of attention of traffic

conditions and increase the likeli-

hood of accidents. Use the

phone feature after parking the

vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill water or

introduce foreign objects into the

device. Such acts could lead to

smoke, fire, or product malfunc-

tion.

(Continued)

4131

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not operate

the audio system for long periods

of time with the ignition turned off

as such operations may lead to

battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Direct

pressure onto the front side of

the monitor may cause damage to

the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make

sure to turn off the device and

use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use tough materials, chem-

ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,

benzene, thinners, etc.) as such

materials may damage the device

panel or cause color/quality dete-

rioration.

(Continued)

CAUTION

• Operating the device while driving

could lead to accidents due to a

lack of attention to external sur-

roundings. First park the vehicle

before operating the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that

allow the driver to hear sounds

from outside of the vehicle. Driving

in a state where external sounds

cannot be heard may lead to acci-

dents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting

when turning the device on. A sud-

den output of extreme volume

upon turning the device on could

lead to hearing impairment.

(Adjust the volume to a suitable

levels before turning off the

device.)

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound can

be heard as these signs may indi-

cate product malfunction.

Continued use in such conditions

could lead to accidents(fires,

electric shock) or product mal-

functions.

• Do not touch the antenna during

thunder or lightening as such

acts may lead to lightning

induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in parking-

restricted areas to operate the

product. Such acts could lead to

traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehicle

ignition turned on. Prolonged use

with the ignition turned off could

result in battery discharge.

Features of your vehicle

1324

(Continued)

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. Spilling bever-

ages may lead to system mal-

function.

• In case of product malfunction,

please contact your place of pur-

chase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio system within

an electromagnetic environment

may result in noise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oil from

contacting the dashboard

because they may cause damage

or discoloration.

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE USB

DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not connect-

ed when starting up the vehicle.

Connect the device after starting

up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may

damage the USB device. (USB

flashdrives are very sensitive to

electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or turned

off while the external USB device is

connected, the external USB device

may not work.

• The System may not play unau-

thenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with the

compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files

with the compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electric-

ity when connecting or disconnect-

ing the external USB device.

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of the

external USB device, the connected

external USB device can be unrec-

ognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector

setting of External USB device is

not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,

then the device will not be recog-

nized.

• Use only a USB device formatted to

FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F

authentication may not be recog-

nizable.

• Make sure the USB connection ter-

minal does not come in contact with

the human body or other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or discon-

nect the USB device in a short peri-

od of time, it may break the device.

• You may hear a strange noise when

connecting or disconnecting a USB

device.

(Continued)

4133

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external USB

device during playback in USB

mode, the external USB device can

be damaged or may malfunction.

Therefore, disconnect the external

USB device when the audio is

turned off or in another mode. (e.g,

Radio, CD)

• Depending on the type and capacity

of the external USB device or the

type of the files stored in the device,

there is a difference in the time

taken for recognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for pur-

poses other than playing music

files.

• Playing videos through the USB is

not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such as

rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or

cause trouble.

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or

external-HDD type devices can be

unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory may

be lost while using this audio.

Always back up important data on

a personal storage device.

• Please avoid using USB

memory products which

can be used as key

chains or cellular phone

accessories as they could

cause damage to the USB jack.

Please make certain only to use

plug type connector products.

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a USB hub

purchased separately, the vehicle’s

audio system may not recognize the

USB device. In that case, connect the

USB device directly to the multimedia

terminal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by logical

drives, only the music files on the

highest-priority drive are recognized

by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/ Cellular

phone/Digital camera can be unrecog-

nizable by standard USB I/F can be

unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB may not

be supported in some mobile devices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable to con-

nection failures due to vehicle vibra-

tions are not supported.

(i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be

unrecognizable.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1344

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

iPod

DEVICE

• Some iPod

models may not sup-

port communication protocol and

files may not properly play.

Supported iPod

models:

- iPhone

3GS/4

- iPod

touch 1st~4th generation

- iPod

nano 1st~6th generation

- iPod

classic

• The order of search or playback of

songs in the iPod

can be different

from the order searched in the

audio system.

• If the iPod

is disabled due to its

own malfunction, reset the iPod

(Reset: Refer to iPod

manual)

• An iPod

may not operate normal-

ly on low battery.

(Continued)

• Some iPod

devices, such as the

iPhone

, can be connected through

the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

interface. The device must have

audio Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology capability (such as for

stereo headphone Bluetooth

Wireless Technology).

The device can play, but it will not

be controlled by the audio system.

• To use iPod

features within the

audio, use the cable provided upon

purchasing an iPod

device.

• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the char-

acteristics of your iPod

/ iPhone

device.

• If your iPhone

is connected to

both the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology and USB, the sound

may not be properly played. In

your iPhone

, select the Dock con-

nector or Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology to change the sound

output (source).

(Continued)

• When connecting iPod

with the

iPod

Power Cable, insert the con-

nector to the multimedia socket

completely. If not inserted com-

pletely, communications between

iPod

and audio may be interrupt-

ed.

• When adjusting the sound effects of

the iPod

and the audio system, the

sound effects of both devices will

overlap and might reduce or distort

the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of an iPod

when adjust-

ing the audio system’s volume, and

turn off the equalizer of the audio

system when using the equalizer of

an iPod

• When not using iPod

with car

audio, detach the iPod

cable from

iPod

. Otherwise, iPod

may

remain in accessory mode, and may

not work properly.

4135

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE -

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

• The Bluetooth

word mark and logos

are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of

such marks is under license.

A Bluetooth

enabled call phone is

required to use Bluetooth

wireless

technology.

• Bluetooth

Wirelss Technology phone

compatibility can be checked by visit-

ing www

. hyundaiusa.com and under

the SERVICE & PARTS - BLUE-

TOOTH COMPATIBILITY menu.

✽✽

NOTICE - BEFORE USING

THE

Bluetooth

HANDSFREE

What is Bluetooth

• Bluetooth

refers to a short-distance

wireless networking technology which

uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz frequency to

connect various devices within a short

distance.

• Supported within PCs, external

devices, Bluetooth

phones, PDAs,

various electronic devices, and auto-

motive environments, Bluetooth

allows data to be transmitted at high

speeds without having to use a con-

nector cable.

• Bluetooth

Handsfree refers to a

device which allows the user to conve-

niently make phone calls with

Bluetooth

mobile phones through the

audio system.

• Bluetooth

Handsfree may not be sup-

ported in some mobile phones. To learn

more about mobile device compatibility,

visit www

. hyundaiusa.com.

✽✽

NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS

FOR SAFE DRIVING

• Bluetooth

Handsfree is a feature that

enables drivers to practice safe driv-

ing. Connecting the head unit with a

Bluetooth

phone allows the user to

conveniently make and receive calls

and use contacts. Before using

Bluetooth

, carefully read the contents

of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations while

driving may lead to negligent driving

practices and result in accidents.

Refrain from excessive operations

while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged peri-

ods of time is dangerous and may lead

to accidents. When driving, view the

screen only for short periods of time.

✽✽

NOTICE -WHEN CONNECT-

ING A

Bluetooth

PHONE

• Before connecting the head unit with

the mobile phone, check to see that the

mobile phone supports Bluetooth

features.

• Even if the phone supports

Bluetooth

, the phone will not be

found during device searches if the

phone has been set to hidden state or

the Bluetooth

power is turned off.

Disable the hidden state or turn on the

Bluetooth

power prior to

searching/connecting with the Head

unit.

• Bluetooth phone is automatically con-

nected when the ignition on.

• If you do not want automatic connec-

tion with your Bluetooth

device, turn

off the Bluetooth

feature within your

mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume and quali-

ty may differ depending on the mobile

phone.

(Continued)

• Park the vehicle when connecting the

head unit with the mobile phone.

• Bluetooth

connection may become

intermittently disconnected in some

mobile phones. Follow these steps to

try again.

1. Within the mobile phone, turn the

Bluetooth

function off/on and try

again.

2. Turn the mobile phone power

Off/On and try again.

3. Completely remove the mobile

phone battery, reboot, and then

again.

4. Reboot the Audio System and try

again.

5. Delete all paired devices, pair and

try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volume

may differ depending on the model of

your mobile phone.

Features of your vehicle

1364

4137

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE VOICE

RECOGNITION

• When using the voice recognition fea-

ture, only commands listed within the

user's manual are supported.

• Be aware that during the operation of

the voice recognition system, pressing

any key other than the key termi-

nate voice recognition mode.

• For superior voice recognition per-

formance, position the microphone

used for voice recognition above the

head of the driver’s seat and maintain

a proper position when saying com-

mands.

• Within the following situations, voice

recognition may not function properly

due to external sound.

- When the windows and sunroof are

open

- When the wind of the cooling / heat-

ing device is strong

- When entering and passing through

tunnels

(Continued)

- When driving on rugged and uneven

roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains,

windstorms)

• Phone related voice commands can be

used only when a Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device is connected.

• When making calls by stating a name,

the corresponding contact must be

downloaded and stored within the

audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone book, it

takes some times to convert the phone

book data into voice information.

During this time, voice recognition

may not properly operate.

• Pronounce the voice commands natu-

rally and clearly as if in a normal con-

versation.

Features of your vehicle

1384

■ 4.3 inch Audio (Color LCD)

Press the key Select [Phone]

1.If you CAN find “Streaming Audio” menu,

(Go to 139 page)

2.If you CANNOT find “Streaming Audio” menu,

(Go to 208 page)

SETUP

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.

Before reading the manual, check the following.

4139

Features of your vehicle

■■

CD Player : AC140INAN, AC241INAN, AC1B2INKN, AC2B1INKN

❋No logo will be shown if the HD Radio

feature is not supported.

Features of your vehicle

1404

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND

FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

(for HD RADIO

equipped model)

1. (EJECT)

• Ejects the disc.

• Convert to Radio mode.

• Each time the key is pressed,the mode

is changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM,

XM1, XM2, XM3.

• Convert to Media Mode

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD,

USB(iPod

), AUX, My Music, BT

Audio.

4. (for

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology equipped model)

• Converts to Phone mode

❈ When a phone is not connected, the

connection screen is displayed.

5. PWR/VOL knob

• Power : Press to turn power on/off.

• Volume :Turn left/right to control vol-

ume.

• When pressed shortly(under 0.8 seconds)

- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-

quency.

- Media (CD/USB/iPod

/My Music)

modes : changes the track, Song(file)

• When pressed and held (Over 0.8 sec-

onds)

- Radio mode : continuously changes

the frequency. Upon release, plays

the current frequency.

- Media(CD/USB/iPod

/My Music)

modes : rewinds or fast forwards the

track or file

- During a Handsfree call, controls the

call volume.

• HD RADIO™ : Channel Change

• XM RADIO™ : Category Search

• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search Folder

HD/CAT

FOLDER

SEEK

TRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

4141

Features of your vehicle

• Turns the monitor display on/off.

When the button is pressed, stopssound

and "Audio Mute" is displayedon LCD.

10.

• Radio Mode : previews all receivable

broadcasts for 5 seconds each

• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :

previews each song (file) for 10 sec-

onds each.

11.

Converts to Setup mode.

12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode :turn to change broadcast

frequencies.

• Media (CD/USB/iPod

/My Music)

modes : turn to search tracks /chan-

nels/files.

13. DISC-IN LED

• LED that indicates whether a disc is

inserted.

14. RESET

• Forced system termination and system

restart.

15.

• XM RADIO™ : Category Search

• CD, USB/MP3 mode : Search Folder

CAT

FOLDER

SETUP

SCAN

MUTE

DISP

Features of your vehicle

1424

Steering remote controller

1.VOLUME

• Used to control volume.

2. SEEK

• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)

- Radio mode : searches broadcast

frequencies saved to presets.

- Media(CD / USB / iPod

/ My Music /

BT Audio) modes :changes the track,

file or chapter.

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- Radio mode, automatically searches

broadcast frequencies and channels

- Media(CD / USB / iPod

/ My Music)

modes, rewinds or fast forwards the

track or song(file)

- BT Audio mode may not be support-

ed in some mobile phones.

3. MODE

• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is

changed in order of FM1

➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟

XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3 ➟ CD ➟ USB or

iPod

➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio

• If the media is not connected or a disc

is not inserted, corresponding modes

will be disabled.

4143

Features of your vehicle

• Ends phone call

• When pressed shortly

- When pressed in the phone screen,

displays call history screen

- When pressed in the dial screen,

makes a call

- When pressed in the incoming call

screen, answers the call

- When pressed during call waiting,

switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- When pressed in the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Handsfree wait

mode, redials the last call

- When pressed during a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Handsfree call,

switches call back to mobile phone

(Private)

- When pressed while calling on the

mobile phone, switches call back to

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree (Operates only when

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree is connected)

• When pressed shortly

- Starts voice recognition

- When selecting during a voice

prompt, stops the prompt and con-

verts to voice command waiting state

• When pressed and held

(over 0.8 seconds)

- Ends voice recognition

Features of your vehicle

1444

HD Radio

Technology

(for HD RADIO

equipped model)

HD Radio Technology manufactured

under license from iBiquity Digital

Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and

“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of

iBiquity Digital Corp.

Program Service Data:Contributes to the

superior user experience of HD Radio

Technology. Presents song name, artist,

station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide,

and other relevant data streams.

Adjacent to traditional main stations are

extra local FM channels. These

HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original

music as well as deep cuts into tradition-

al genre.

Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio

Technology enables local radio stations

to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM

sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds

like a CD.

HD Radio

signal delay

To overcome the delay that digital sys-

tems inherently produce, HD Radio

technology first uses the audio signal of

the analog broadcasting when you tune

to an AM station or to the main channel

of a FM station.After that, the system will

blend from analog to digital signal.

Normally, this blending is very smooth. If

you experience a skip in program content

of several seconds, the radio station has

not implemented HD Radio

broadcast-

ing correctly. This is not a problem with

your audio system.

Due to the fact that sub channels are only

broadcasting digital, blending from analog

to digital signal is not possible if you tune

to a sub channel. In this case playback of

the sub channel starts after several sec-

onds, this is a normal function.

4145

Features of your vehicle

RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Frequency

Displays the current frequency.

3. Preset

Displays current preset number [1] ~ [6].

4. Preset Display

Displays preset buttons.

5. Info

Displays broadcast information.

6. HD

Changes HD Radio channels.

7. A.store

Automatically saves frequencies with

superior reception to Preset buttons.

Features of your vehicle

1464

HD RADIO MODE

(for HD RADIO

equipped model)

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.

2. HD Channel

Displays information for the currently

playing HD Radio broadcast.

3. Song Information

Displays the album, artist, and title infor-

mation.

4. Frequency

Displays the current frequency.

5. HD Radio Broadcast Station

Displays the HD Radio broadcast station

name.

6. Preset

Displays currently playing preset number

[1] ~ [6].

7. Preset Display

Displays saved presets.

8. Info

Displays broadcast information.

9. HD

Changes HD Radio channels.

10. A.Store

Automatically saves frequencies with

superior reception to Preset buttons.

4147

Features of your vehicle

Switching to Radio Mode

Pressing the key will change the

operating mode in order of FM1

➟

FM2

➟

XM1

➟

XM2

➟

XM3

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within

[Display], then pressing the

key will display the Radio Pop-

up Mode screen.

Turn the TUNE knob to move the

focus. Press the knob to select.

Searching Radio Frequencies

Using Seek

Press the key to play the pre-

vious/next frequency.

Using TUNE

Turn the TUNE knob to select the

desired frequency.

• FM : Increases/decreased by 200kHz

• AM : Increases/decreased by 10kHz

Using Radio Mode

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the button to display the

broadcast information for the frequency

saved to each button.

Press the ~ buttons to play the

desired preset.

✽✽

NOTICE

While listening to a frequency you want

to save as a preset, press and hold one of

the ~ preset buttons (over 0.8

seconds) to save the current frequency

to the selected preset.

Preset

SEEK

TRACK

RADIO

SETUP

RADIO

Features of your vehicle

1484

Auto Store

Press the button to automatical-

ly save receivable frequencies to Preset

buttons.

✽✽

NOTICE

While Auto Store is operating, pressing

the [Cancel] button again will cancel

Auto Store and restore the previous fre-

quency.

Scan

Press the key to preview fre-

quencies with superior reception for 5

seconds each.

Press and hold the key (over

0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5

seconds each.

Once scan is complete, the previous fre-

quency will be restored.

While Scan is operating, pressing the

key will cancel the scan opera-

tion.

Listening to HD Radio Stations

HD Radio Technology is a digital radio

technology used by AM and FM radio

station to transmit audio and data via a

digital signal in conjunction with their

analog signals.

While listening to the radio, the HD Radio

icon will become displayed if receiving an

HD Radio broadcast.

Changing HD Radio stations

Press the button to change HD

Radio station.

Viewing Station Information

Press the button to view station

information.

Info

SCAN

A.Store

4149

Features of your vehicle

XM RADIO™ MODE

Features of your vehicle

Satellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties in receiv-

ing XM satellite™ radio signals in the fol-

lowing situations.

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov-

ered parking area.

• If you are driving beneath the top level

of a multi-level freeway.

• If you are driving under a bridge.

• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle

(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks

the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where the

surrounding hills or peaks block the

signal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountain road

where is the signal blocked by moun-

tains.

• If you are driving in an area with tall

trees that block the signal (30 ft. /10m

or more), for example on an road that

goes through a dense forest.

• The signal can become weak in some

areas that are not covered by the XM

repeater network.

NOTE:

There may also be additional unfore-

seen circumstances leading to recep-

tion problems with the XM satellite™

radio signal.

Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH

Unavailable’ may occur when starting

XM Radio™.

SATELLITE2

SATELLITE1

Features of your vehicle

1504

XM RADIO™ MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Channel Information

Displays the category, channel number,

channel name, artist and title informa-

tion.

3. Preset

Displays currently playing preset number

[1] ~ [6].

4. Preset Display

Displays saved presets.

4151

Features of your vehicle

Using SEEK

Press the key to play the pre-

vious/next channel.

❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the cur-

rent category.

Using Tune

Turn the TUNE knob to select the

desired channel.

SCAN

Press the key to scan all chan-

nels with superior reception for 5 sec-

onds each.

Once scan is complete, the previously

played channel will be restored.

During Scan, pressing the key

again will cancel the scan operation and

restore the previously played channel.

If the “Category” icon is displayed, chan-

nels are changed within the current cate-

gory.

Searching Categories

Select the category by using the

( ) key and press

the TUNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected category are

played.

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the button to display the

broadcast information for the channel

saved to each button.

Press the ~ buttons to play the

desired preset.

✽✽

NOTICE

While listening to a channel you want to

save as a preset, press and hold one of

the ~ preset buttons (over 0.8

seconds) to save the current channel to

the selected preset.

Preset

CAT

FOLDER

HD/CAT

FOLDER

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1524

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

DISCS

• This device has been manufactured

to be compatible with software

bearing the following logo marks.

• Do not clean discs with chemical

solutions, such as record sprays,

antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,

benzene, or thinners.

• After using a disc, put the disc back

in its original case to prevent disc

scratches.

• Hold discs by their edges or within

the center hole to prevent damages

to disc surfaces.

• Do not introduce foreign substances

into the disc insert/eject slot.

Introducing foreign substances

could damage the device interior.

• Do not insert two discs simultane-

ously.

• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,

differences in disc reading and

playing times may occur depending

on the disc manufacturer, produc-

tion method and the recording

method as used by the user.

(Continued)

• Clean fingerprints and dust off the

disc surface (coated side) with a soft

cloth.

• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs

attached with labels may result in

disc slot jams or difficulties in disc

removal. Such discs may also result

in noise while playing.

• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not

properly operate depending on the

disc manufacturer, production

method and the record method as

used by the user. If problems per-

sist, trying using a different CD as

continued use may result in mal-

functions.

• The performance of this product

may differ depending on the CD-

RW Drive Software.

• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type

CDs may not function in the device.

DATA discs cannot be played.

(However, such discs may still oper-

ate but will do so abnormally.)

(Continued)

• Do not use abnormally shaped discs

(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-

shaped) as such discs could lead to

malfunctions.

• If the disc is straddled on the disc

slot without removal for 10 seconds,

the disc will automatically be re-

inserted into the disc player.

• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-

ported. Other discs may result in

recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,

CDs with labels)

4153

Features of your vehicle

MEDIA MODE

Pressing the key will change the

operating mode in order of CD

➟

USB(iPod

)

➟

AUX

➟

My Music

➟

Audio.

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within

[Display], then pressing the

key will display the Media Pop-

up Mode screen.

Turn the TUNE knob to move the

focus. Press the knob to select.

✽✽

NOTICE

The media mode pop up screen can be

displayed only when there are two or

more media modes turned on.

Title Icon

When a

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology, iPod

, USB, or AUX device

is connected or a CD is inserted, the cor-

responding mode icon will be displayed.

Icon Title

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

iPod

USB

AUX

MEDIA

SETUP

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1544

AUDIO CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan, dis-

plays the currently operating function.

3.Track Info

Displays information about the current

track.

4. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

5. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

6. Info

Shows detailed information about the

current track.

7. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

8. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

9. List

Moves to the list screen.

4155

Features of your vehicle

Using Audio CD Mode

Playing/Pausing CD Tracks

Once an audio CD is inserted, the mode

will automatically start and begin playing.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Only genuine audio CDs are support-

ed. Other discs may result in recogni-

tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with

labels)

• The artist and title information are

displayed on the screen if track infor-

mation is included within the audio

CD.

Changing Tracks

Press the key to move to the

previous or next track.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

track has been playing for 2 seconds

will start the current track from the

beginning.

• Pressing the key before the

track has been playing for 1 seconds

will start the previous track.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired track.

Once you find the desired track, press

the TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current track.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1564

Audio CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat and

List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current disc.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play tracks in

random(Shuffle) order.

Press the button again to turn the

Random(Shuffle) feature off.

• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in

random(Shuffle) order.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current track. Press the button again to

turn the repeat feature off.

• Repeat : Repeats the current track.

List

Press the button to display the

track list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for tracks. Once the desired track

is displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Repeat

Shuffle

Info

4157

Features of your vehicle

MP3 CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,

displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index

Displays the current file number.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current

file.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Info

Shows detailed information about the

current file.

8. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

9. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

10. Copy

Copies the current file into My Music

11. List

Moves to the list screen.

Using MP3 CD Mode

Playing/Pausing MP3 Files

Once an MP3 disc is inserted the mode

will automatically start and being playing.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

If there are numerous files and folders

within the disc, reading time could take

more than 10 seconds and the list may

not be displayed or song searches may

not operate. Once loading is complete,

try again.

Features of your vehicle

1584

Changing Files

Press the key to move to the

previous or next file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

file has been playing for 2 seconds will

start the current file from the begin-

ning.

• Pressing the key before the

file has been playing for 1 seconds will

start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the

TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

Searching Folders

Press the

(

) key to

select and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,

press the TUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will

begin playing.

MP3 CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat, Copy

and List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current file.

Info

CAT

FOLDER

HD/CAT

FOLDER

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

4159

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as

the default display within Display

setup, the album/artist/file informa-

tion are displayed as detailed file

information.

• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option

is set as the default display, the folder

name/file name are displayed as

detailed file information.

• The title, artist and album info are

displayed only when such information

are recorded within the MP3 file ID3

tag.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play files in

random(Shuffle) order.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of Random

(Shuffle) Folder

➟ Random (Shuffle) All➟

Off.

• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all files

within the current folder in Random

(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files in

Random(Shuffle) order.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of Repeat

➟Repeat

Folder

➟Off.

• Repeat: Repeats the current file.

• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within

the current Folder.

Copying Files

Press the button to copy the cur-

rent file into My Music.

✽✽

NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copy-

ing will display a pop-up asking whether

you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,

select 'Yes’.

List

Press the button to display the file

list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for files. Once the desired file is

displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Copy

Repeat

Shuffle

Features of your vehicle

1604

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE USB

DEVICE

• Connect the USB device after turning

on the engine. The USB device may

become damaged if it is already con-

nected when the ignition is turned

on.The USB device may not operate

properly if the car ignition is turned

on or off with the USB device connect-

ed.

• Heed caution to static electricity when

connecting/disconnecting USB

devices.

• Encoded MP3 Players will not be rec-

ognized when connected as an exter-

nal device.

• When connecting an external USB

device, the device may not properly

recognize the USB is in some states.

• Only products formatted with

byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be

recognized.

• This device recognizes USB devices

formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-

mats. This device does not recognize

files in NTFS file format.

(Continued)

• Some USB devices may not be sup-

ported due to compatibility issues.

• Avoid contact between the USB con-

nector with bodily parts or foreign

objects.

• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of

USB devices within short periods of

time may result in product malfunc-

tion.

• A strange noise may occur when dis-

connecting the USB.

• Make sure to connect/disconnect

external USB devices with the audio

power turned off.

• The amount of time required to recog-

nize the USB device may differ

depending on the type, size or file for-

mats stored in the USB. Such differ-

ences in time are not indications of

malfunctions.

• The device only supports USB devices

used to play music files.

• USB images and videos are not sup-

ported.

(Continued)

• Do not use the USB I/F to charge bat-

teries or USB accessories that gener-

ate heat. Such acts may lead to wors-

ened performance or damage to the

device.

• The device may not recognize the USB

device if separately purchased USB

hubs and extension cables are being

used. Connect the USB directly with

the multimedia terminal of the vehi-

cle.

• When using mass storage USB devices

with separate logical drives, only files

saved to the root drive can be played.

• Files may not properly operate if

application programs are installed to

the USBs.

• The device may not operate normally

if MP3 Players, cellular phones, digi-

tal cameras, or other electronic

devices (USB devices not recognized

as portable disk drives) are connected

with the device.

4161

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Charging through the USB may not

work for some mobile devices.

• The device may not support normal

operation when using a USB memory

type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory.

• The device may not support normal

operation when using formats such as

HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.

• The device will not support files

locked by DRM (Digital Rights

Management.)

• USB memory sticks used by connect-

ing an Adaptor (SD Type or CF Type)

may not be properly recognized.

• The device may not operate properly

when using USB HDDs or USBs sub-

ject to connection failures caused by

vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-stick type)

(Continued)

• Avoid use of USB memo-

ry products that can also

be used as key chains or

mobile phone accessories.

Use of such products may

cause damage to the USB jack.

• Connecting an MP3 device or phone

through various channels, such as

AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may

result in pop noises or abnormal oper-

ation.

Features of your vehicle

1624

USB MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,

displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index

Displays the current file number.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current file.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Info

Displays detailed information for the cur-

rent file.

8. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

9. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

10. Copy

Copies the current file into My Music.

11. List

Moves to the list screen.

4163

Features of your vehicle

Using USB Mode

Playing/Pausing USB Files

Once a USB is connected, the mode will

automatically start and begin playing a

USB file.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Loading may require additional time

if there are many files and folders

within the USB and result in faulty list

display or file searching. Normal

operations will resume once loading is

complete.

• The device may not support normal

operation when using a USB memory

type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory.

Changing Files

Press the keys to move to the

previous or next file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

file has been playing for 2 seconds will

start the current file from the begin-

ning.

• Pressing the key before the

file has been playing for 1 seconds will

start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the

TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind

or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1644

Searching Folders

Press the

(

)key

to select and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,

press the TUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will

begin playing.

USB Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat, Copy

and List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as

the default display within Display

setup, the album/artist/file information

are displayed as detailed file informa-

tion.

• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option

is set as the default display, the folder

name/file name are displayed as

detailed file information.

• The title, artist and album info are

displayed only when such information

are recorded within the MP3 file ID3

tag.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play files in

random(Shuffle) order.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of

Random(Shuffle) Folder

➟Random

(Shuffle) All

➟Off.

• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the

files in the current folder in

random(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files in

random(Shuffle) order.

Shuffle

Info

CAT

FOLDER

HD/CAT

FOLDER

4165

Features of your vehicle

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of Repeat

➟

Repeat Folder ➟ Off.

• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current

file.

• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all files

within the current folder.

Copying Files

Press the button to copy the cur-

rent file into My Music.

✽✽

NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copy-

ing will display a pop-up asking whether

you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,

select 'Yes’.

List

Press the button to display the file

list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for files. Once the desired file is

displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Copy

Repeat

Features of your vehicle

1664

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

iPod

DEVICE

• iPod

is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc.

• In order to use the iPod

while

operating the keys, you must use a

dedicated iPod

cable. (the cable

that is supplied when purchasing

iPod

/iPhone

products)

• If the iPod

is connected to the

vehicle while it is playing, a high

pitch sound could occur for approx-

imately 1-2 seconds immediately

after connecting. If possible, con-

nect the iPod to the vehicle with the

iPod

stopped/paused.

• During ACC ON state, connecting

the iPod

through the iPod

cable

will charge the iPod

through the

car audio system.

• When connecting with the iPod

cable, make sure to fully insert the

jack to prevent communication

interference.

(Continued)

• When the EQ features of an exter-

nal device, such as the iPod

, and

the audio system are both active,

EQ effects could overlap and cause

sound deterioration and distortion.

Whenever possible, turn off the EQ

feature within the external device

upon use by connecting with the

audio system.

• Noise may occur when an iPod

AUX device is connected. When

such devices are not being used, dis-

connect the device for storage.

• When the iPod

or AUX device

power is connected to the power

jack, playing the external device

may result in noise. In such cases,

disconnect the power connection

before use.

• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the char-

acteristics of your iPod

/Phone

device.

(Continued)

• If your iPhone

is connected to

both the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology and USB, the sound

may not be properly played. In

your iPhone

, select the Dock con-

nector or Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology to change the sound

output (source).

• iPod mode cannot be operated

when the iPod

cannot be recog-

nized due to versions that do not

support communication protocols.

• For fifth generation iPod

Nano

devices, the iPod

may not be rec-

ognized when the battery level is

low. Please charge the iPod

for

use.

• Search/play orders shown within the

iPod

device may differ with the

orders shown within the audio sys-

tem.

• If the iPod

malfunctions due to an

iPod

device defect, reset the iPod

and try again. (To learn more, refer

to your iPod

manual)

(Continued)

4167

Features of your vehicle

iPod

MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), displays

the currently operating function.

3. Song Index

Displays the current song/total number of

songs.

4. Song Info

Displays information about the current

song.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

8. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

9. List

Moves to the list screen.

(Continued)

• Some iPod

s may not sync with the

System depending on its version. If

the Media is removed before the

Media is recognized, then the sys-

tem may not properly restore the

previously operated mode. (iPad

charging is not supported.)

Features of your vehicle

1684

Using iPod

Mode

Playing/Pausing iPod

Songs

Once an iPod

is connected, the mode

will automatically start and begin playing

an iPod

song.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

iPod

s with unsupported communica-

tion protocols may not properly operate

in the audio system.

Changing Songs

Press the key to move to the

previous or next song.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

song has been playing for 2 seconds

will start the current song from the

beginning.

• Pressing the key before the

song has been playing for 1 seconds

will start the previous song.

• Slight time differences may exist

depending your iPod

product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current song.

Searching Categories

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category,

press the TUNE knob to select and

play.

✽✽

NOTICE

There are eight categories that can be

searched, including Playlists, Artists,

Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,

Audiobooks and Podcasts.

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

4169

Features of your vehicle

Category Menu

Within the iPod

Category menu, you will

have access to the , Home, and

features.

1. : Displays the play screen

2. Home : Moves to the iPod

root catego-

ry screen

3. : Moves to the previous category

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the search mode is accessed while

playing a song, the most recently

searched category is displayed.

• Search steps upon initial connection

may differ depending on the type of

iPod

device.

Features of your vehicle

1704

iPod

Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Random(Shuffle), Repeat and List

features.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play songs in

random(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all songs

in Random(Shuffle) order.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current song. Press the button again to

turn the repeat feature off.

• Repeat : Repeats the current song

List

Press the button to display the

Category Menu.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category,

press the TUNE knob to select and

play.

AUX MODE

Using AUX Mode

Press the key Select [AUX]

An external device can be connected to

play music.

MEDIA

List

Repeat

Shuffle

4171

Features of your vehicle

Connecting an External Device

External audio players (Camcorders, car

VCR, etc.) can be played through a ded-

icated cable.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If an external device connector is con-

nected with the AUX terminal, then

AUX mode will automatically operate.

Once the connector is disconnected,

the previous mode will be restored.

• AUX mode can be used only when an

external audio player (camcorder, car

VCR, etc.) has been connected.

• The AUX volume can be controlled

separately from other audio modes.

• Connecting a connector jack to the

AUX terminal without an external

device will convert the system to AUX

mode, but only output noise. When an

external device is not being used, also

remove the connector jack.

• When the external device power is

connected to the power jack, playing

the external device may output noise.

In such cases, disconnect the power

connection before use.

• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX

jack upon use.

Features of your vehicle

1724

MY MUSIC MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,

displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index

Displays the current file/total number of

files.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current

file.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Info

Displays detailed information for the cur-

rent file.

8. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

9. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

10. Delete

Deletes the current file.

11. List

Moves to the list screen.

4173

Features of your vehicle

Using My Music Mode

Playing/Pausing My Music Files

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

If there are no files saved within My

Music, the button will be dis-

abled.

Changing Files

Press the key to move to the

previous or next file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

file has been playing for 2 seconds will

start the current file from the begin-

ning.

• Pressing the key before the

file has been playing for 1 seconds will

start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the

TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

My Music

Features of your vehicle

1744

My Music Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat,

Delete and List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current file.

✽✽

NOTICE

The title, artist and album info are dis-

played only when such information is

recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Random

Press the button to play files in

random order. Press the button again to

turn the Random feature off.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current song. Press the button again to

turn the repeat feature off.

Deleting Files

Press the button to delete the

current file.

List

Press the button to display the file

list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for files. Once the desired file is

displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Delete

Repeat

Shuffle

Info

4175

Features of your vehicle

List Menu

From the List screen, it is possible to

delete files you previously saved into My

Music.

Press the button or individually

select the files you want to delete. Once

files are selected, the button

and buttons will be enabled.

1) : Moves to the previous screen

2) Sellect All: Selects all files

3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected

files

4) Delete: Deletes selected files

After selecting the files you want to

delete, press the button to

delete the selected files.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If there is memory available, up to

6,000 files can be saved.

• Identical files cannot be copied more

than 1,000 times.

• To check memory information, go to

[System] [Memory

Information]

SETUP

Delete

Unselect All

Select All

Features of your vehicle

1764

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio Mode

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Audio Mode can be used only when a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone has been connected.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Audio Mode will not be available

when connecting mobile phones that

do not support this feature.

• While Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio is playing, if the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone is connected, then the music

will also stop.

• Moving the Track up/down while

playing Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio mode may result in

pop noises in some mobile phones.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

streaming audio may not be support-

ed in some mobile phones.

(Continued)

• When returning to Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio mode

after ending a call, the mode may not

automatically restart in some mobile

phones.

• Receiving an incoming call or making

an outgoing call while playing

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio

may result in audio interference.

4177

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology AUDIO MODE

Using

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio Mode

Playing/Pausing Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology

Audio

Once a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is connected, the mode will auto-

matically start.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

The play/pause feature may operate

differently depending on the mobile

phone.

Changing Files

Press the key to move to the

previous or next file.

Setting Connection

If a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device has not been connected, press the

key [Phone] button to display

the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology con-

nection screen.

It is possible to use the pair phone, con-

nect/disconnect and delete features from

your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

audio is not operating properly, check

whether the feature is turned off at

[Phone] [Streaming

Audio]. If the feature is off, turn back

on and try again.

• If music is not yet playing from your

mobile device after converting to

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio

mode, pressing the play button once

may start playing the mode. Check to

see that music is playing from the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device

after converting to Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio Mode.

SETUP

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1784

Pairing a

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Device

What is Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchro-

nizing your

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone or device with the car

audio system for connection. Pairing is

necessary to connect and use the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology feature.

Pairing Key / Key on

the Steering Remote Controller

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the key or the key

on the steering remote controller. The

following screen is displayed.

2. Press the button to enter the

Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as shown

when searching from your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the

device

3. From your

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device (i.e. Mobile

Phone), search and select your car

audio system.

PHONE

4179

Features of your vehicle

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played where the passkey is entered.

Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to pair

your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device]

4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played 6 digits passkey.

Hear, check the passkey on your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following

screen is displayed.

✽✽

NOTICE

If Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices are paired but none are current-

ly connected, pressing the key

or the key on the

steering wheel displays the following

screen. Press the [Pair] button to pair a

new device or press the [Connect] to

connect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select

TUNE knob

1.The following steps are the same as

those described in the section "When

No Devices have been Paired" on the

previous page.

SETUP

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1804

✽✽

NOTICE

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology fea-

tures supported within the vehicle are

as follows. Some features may not be

supported depending on your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to

Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC

on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

- Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices can be paired to

the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device can be connected at

a time.

• Other devices cannot be paired while

a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is connected.

• Only Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-

ed features are supported.

• Bluetooth related operations are pos-

sible only within devices that support

Handsfree or audio features, such as a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio

device.

• If a connected Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device becomes discon-

nected due to being out of communi-

cation range, turning the device OFF,

or a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

communication error, corresponding

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices are automatically searched

and reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstable due to

communication errors between the

car Handsfree and the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device, reset the

device by turning off and back on

again. Upon resetting Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device, the sys-

tem will be restored.

• After pairing is complete, a contacts

download request is sent once to the

mobile phone. Some mobile phones

may require confirmation upon

receiving a download request, ensure

your mobile phone accepts the con-

nection. Refer to your phones user’s

manual for additional information

regarding phone pairing and connec-

tions.

4181

Features of your vehicle

Connecting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1)Connected Phone : Device that is cur-

rently connected

2)Paired Phone : Device that is paired

but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the

device you want to connect and press the

button.

Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices with the car

audio system.The "Change Priority" fea-

ture is used to set the connection priority

of paired phones.

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Paired Phone List]

SETUP

Connect

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1824

From the paired phone list, select the

phone you want to switch to the highest

priority, then press the

button from the Menu. The selected

device will be changed to the highest pri-

ority.

✽✽

NOTICE

Priority icon will be displayed when the

selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the

currently connected device and press the

button.

Disconnect

SETUP

Change priority

4183

Features of your vehicle

Deleting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the

device you want to delete and press the

button.

✽✽

NOTICE

• When deleting the currently connect-

ed device, the device will automatical-

ly be disconnected to proceed with the

deleting process.

• If a paired Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device is deleted, the

device’s call history and contacts data

will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, you must

pair the device again.

Delete

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1844

USING

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device connected, press the

key to display the Phone menu screen.

1)Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used

contacts saved for easy access

2)Dial Number : Displays the dial screen

where numbers can be dialed to make

calls

3)Call History : Device the call history list

screen

4)Contacts : Displays the Contacts list

screen

5)Setup : Displays Phone related set-

tings.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If you press the [Call History] button

but there is no call history data, a

prompt is displayed which asks to

download call history data.

• If you press the [Contacts] button but

there is no contacts data stored, a

prompt is displayed which asks to

download contacts data.

• This feature may not be supported in

some mobile phones. For more infor-

mation on download support, refer to

your mobile phone user’s manual.

Favorites

Press the key Select

[Favorites]

1)Saved favorite contact : Connects call

upon selection

2)To add favorite : Downloaded contacts

be saved as favorite.

3)Delete All : Delete all stored favorite

contacts

✽✽

NOTICE

• To save Favorite, contacts should be

downloaded.

• Contact saved in Favorites will not be

automatically updated if the contact

has been updated in the phone. To

update Favorites, delete the Favorite

and create a new Favorite.

PHONE

4185

Features of your vehicle

Calling by Dialing a Number

Press the key Select [Dial

Number]

1)Dial Pad :Used to enter phone number

2)Call : If a number has been entered,

calls the number If no number has

been entered, switches to call history

screen

3)End : Deletes the entered phone num-

ber

4)Delete : Deletes entered numbers one

digit at a time

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device connected

will display the following screen.

1)Caller : Displays the other party’s name

when the incoming caller is saved with-

in your contacts

2)Incoming Number : Displays the

incoming number

3)Accept : Accept the incoming call

4)Reject : Reject the incoming call

✽✽

NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is dis-

played, most Audio and SETUP mode

features are disabled. Only the call

volume will operate.

• The telephone number may not be

properly displayed in some mobile

phones.

• When a call is answered with the

mobile phone, the call mode will auto-

matically revert to Private mode.

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1864

During a Handsfree Call

1)Caller : Displays the other party’s name

if the incoming caller is saved within

your contacts

2)Incoming Number : Displays the

incoming number

3)Call time : Displays the call time

4)End : Ends call

5)Private : Converts to Private mode

6)Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard by

the other party

7)Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off

✽✽

NOTICE

If the mic is muted, the other party will

not be able to hear your voice.

Call History

Press the key Select [Call

History]

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed

calls is displayed.

Press the button to download

the call history.

1) Call History :

- Displays recent calls (call history)

- Connects call upon selection

2) Download : Download Recent Call

History

• Call history may not be saved in the call

history list in some mobile phones.

• Calls received with hidden caller ID will

not be saved in the call history list.

• Calling through the call history is not

possible when there is no call history

stored or a

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone is not connected.

• Up to 20 received, dialed and missed

calls are stored in Call History.

• Time of received/dialed calls and call

time information are not saved.

Download

PHONE

4187

Features of your vehicle

Contacts

Press the key Select

[Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entries is

displayed. Press the button to

download the call history.

1)Contacts List :

- Displays downloaded contacts entries

- Connects call upon selection

2)Sort by :Find a contact in an alphabet-

ical order.

3)Download : Download contacts entries

✽✽

NOTICE

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone can be downloaded into the car

contacts. Contacts that have been

downloaded to the car cannot be edit-

ed or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are managed

separately for each paired Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device (max 5

devices x 1,000 contacts each).

Previously downloaded data is main-

tained even if the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device has been discon-

nected.

(However, the contacts and call histo-

ry saved to the phone will be deleted if

a paired phone is deleted.)

• It is possible to download contacts

during Bluetooth streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, the icon

will be displayed within the status bar.

(Continued)

• It is not possible to begin downloading

a contact list when the contact down-

load feature has been turned off with-

in the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device. In addition, some devices may

require device authorization upon

attempting to download contacts. If

downloading does not normally occur,

check the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device settings or the

screen state.

• The contacts download feature may

not be supported in some mobile

phones. For more information of sup-

ported Bluetooth

devices and func-

tion support, refer to your phone’s

user manual.

Download

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1884

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Setting

Pairing a New Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices

can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the “Pairing

through Phone Setup” section within

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile

phones that have been paired with the

audio system. Upon selecting a paired

phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the “Setting

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Connection” section within

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

1) : Moves to the previous screen

2)Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/

disconnects currently selected phone

3)Delete : Deletes the currently selected

phone

4)Change Priority : Sets currently selected

phone to highest connection priority

SETUP

4189

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-

LOADING CONTACTS

• Only contacts within connected

phones can be downloaded. Also

check to see that your mobile phone

supports the download feature.

• To learn more about whether your

mobile phone supports contacts

downloads, refer to your mobile

phone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connected

phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded from

the mobile phone, a download progress

bar is displayed.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Upon downloading phone contacts,

the previous corresponding data is

deleted.

• This feature may not be supported in

some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operate

while contacts are being downloaded.

Auto Download (Contacts)

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Auto Download]

This feature is used to automatically

download mobile contacts entries once a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone

is connected.

✽✽

NOTICE

• The Auto Download feature will download

mobile contacts entries every time the

phone is connected. The download time

may differ depending on the number of

saved contacts entries and the communi-

cation state.

• Before downloading contacts, first

check to see that your mobile phone

supports the contacts download fea-

ture.

SETUP SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1904

Streaming Audio

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Streaming Audio]

When Streaming Audio is turned on, you

can play music files saved in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device

through the audio system.

Outgoing Volume

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use the , buttons to adjust the

outgoing volume level.

✽✽

NOTICE

While on a call, the volume can be

changed by using the key.

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]

Once

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology is

turned off,

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology related features will not be

supported within the audio system.

✽✽

NOTICE

To turn Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

back on, go to [Phone] and

press “Yes

SETUP

SEEK

TRACK

SETUP SETUP

4191

Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing wheel remote controller. Say a com-

mand.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the

system will say “Please say a command

after the beep (BEEP)”

• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode,

then the system will only say “(BEEP)”

• To change Prompt Feedback

[On]/[Off], go to [System]

[Prompt Feedback]

✽✽

NOTICE

For proper recognition, say the com-

mand after the voice instruction and

beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1)Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

“Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).

Instead, always use full names (includ-

ing first and last names) for all contacts

(e.g., use “Jacob Stevenson” instead of

“Dad”).

2)Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use

“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or

“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).

3)Do not use acronyms (i.e., use “County

Finance Department” instead of

“CFD”).

4)Do not use special characters (e.g.,

“@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”, “amper-

sand &”).

5)If a name is not recognized from the

contact list, change it to a more

descriptive name (e.g., use “Grandpa

Joseph” instead of “Pa Joe”).

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing remote controller

The prompt message is immediately

ended and the beep tone will sound.

After the “beep”, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing remote controller

The command wait state is immediately

ended and the beep ton will sound. After

the “beep”, say the voice command.

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1924

❈ Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• End voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command after

the beep (BEEP)

Please say a command after

the beep (BEEP)

Please say a...

Contacts

Please say the name of the contacts you want

to call (BEEP)

Ding~

(BEEP)

Ding~

Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

Shortly pressing the key

(under 0.8 seconds)

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's

manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's

manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

4193

Features of your vehicle

Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used within the current mode.

Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts

Ex) Call “John Smith”

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-

mands. After saying this command, say

“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or

“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Display the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contact

saved in the Contacts to automatically con-

nect the call.

Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying

this command, you can say the number that

you want to call.

Redial Connects the most recently called number.

Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice

recognition and Bluetooth

connections.

Command Function

•

When listening to the radio, displays the

next radio screen. (FM1

➟

FM2

➟

XM1

➟

XM2

➟

XM3

➟

FM1)

Radio

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played radio screen.

•

When currently listening to the FM radio,

maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.

FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency.

AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency.

XM (Satellite)

•

When currently listening to the XM, main-

tains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played XM screen.

(Call by Name)

Voice Command List

• Common Commands:These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available dur-

ing certain operations)

Features of your vehicle

1944

0~255

Command Function

XM (Satellite) 1~3

Displays the selected XM screen.

XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played media

screen.

CD Plays the music saved in the CD.

USB Plays USB music.

iPod

Plays iPod music.

Command Function

My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.

AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth

Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth

device.

Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.

Mute Mutes the sound

Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.

4195

Features of your vehicle

• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM

radio operation

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used

while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current

present and plays for 10 seconds each.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.(This feature can be used when receiving

RBDS broadcasts.)

Command Function

Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan Scans receivable channels from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.

Features of your vehicle

1964

• Audio CD commands: Commands available during Audio

CD operation

• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during

USB and MP3 CD operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused track.

Pause Pauses the current track.

Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused file.

Pause Pauses the current file.

Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current

folder.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order.

Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder

Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder

4197

Features of your vehicle

•iPod

Commands: Commands available during iPod

oper-

ation

• My Music Commands: Commands available during My

Music operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.

Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current

category.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused file.

Pause Pauses the current file.

Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order.

Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an

additional confirmation process.

Features of your vehicle

1984

SETUP

Starting Mode

Press the key to display the

Setup screen.

You can select and control options related

to [Display], [Sound], [Clock/Calendar],

[Phone] and [System].

Display Settings

Adjusting the Brightness

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Brightness]

Use the , buttons to adjust the

screen brightness or set the Brightness

on Automatic, Daylight, or Night mode.

Press the button to reset.

1)Automatic : Adjusts the brightness

automatically

2)Daylight : Always maintains the bright-

ness on high

3)Night : Always maintains the bright-

ness on low

Pop-up Mode

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]

This feature is used to display the Pop-up

Mode screen when entering radio and

media modes.

When this feature is turned on, pressing

the or key will display

the Pop-up Mode screen.

✽✽

NOTICE

The media Pop-up Mode screen can be

displayed only when two or more media

modes have been connected.

MEDIA RADIO

SETUP

Default

SETUP

4199

Features of your vehicle

Text Scroll

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Text Scroll]

This feature is used to scroll text dis-

played on the screen when it is too long

to be displayed at once.

When turned on, the text is repeatedly

scrolled. When turned off, the text is

scrolled just once.

MP3 Information Display

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Media Display]

This feature is used to change the infor-

mation displayed within USB and MP3

CD modes.

1)Folder File : Displays file name and

folder name

2)Album Artist Song : Displays album

name/artist name/song

Sound Settings

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

2004

Use the , , , buttons to

adjust the Fader/Balance settings.

Use the , buttons to adjust the

Bass/Middle/Treble settings.

Press the button to reset.

SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume

Control)

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]

The volume level is controlled automati-

cally according to the vehicle speed.

SDVC can be set by selecting from

Off/Low/Mid/High.

Voice Recognition Volume

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the

Voice Recognition volume.

SETUP

Default

4201

Features of your vehicle

Touch Screen Beep

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Touch Screen Beep]

This feature is used to turn the touch

screen beep on/off.

Blue Link Voice Volume (if equipped)

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Blue Link Voice Vol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the

Blue Link Voice Volume.

System Setting

HD Radio™ On/Off

Press the key Select [System]

Select [FM], [AM]

This feature is used to set whether to

receive FM/AM HD Radio™ broadcasts.

SETUP

SETUP SETUP

Features of your vehicle

2024

Prompt Feedback

Press the key Select [System]

Select [Prompt Feedback]

This feature is used to select the desired

prompt feedback option from ON and OFF.

1) ON : When using voice recognition,

provides detailed guidance prompts

2) OFF : When using voice recognition,

omits some guidance prompts

Language

Press the key Select

[System] Select [Language]

This feature is used to change the system

and voice recognition language.

If the language is changed, the system

will restart and apply the selected lan-

guage.

Memory Information

Press the key Select [System]

Select [Memory Information]

This feature displays information related

to system memory.

1)Using : Displays capacity currently in

use

2)Capacity : Displays total capacity

SETUP SETUP SETUP

4203

Features of your vehicle

REAR VIEW CAMERA

(if equipped)

• The system has been equipped with a

rear view camera for user safety by

allowing a wider rear range of vision.

• The rear view camera will automatical-

ly operate when the ignition key is

turned ON and the transmission lever

is set to R.

• The rear view camera will automatical-

ly stop operating when set to a differ-

ent lever.

CAUTION

• The rear view camera has been

equipped with an optical lens to

provide a wider range of vision

and may appear different from the

actual distance. For safety, directly

check the rear and left/right sides.

WARNING

• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-

bility of the driver to always

check the inside/outside rearview

mirror and the area behind the

vehicle before and while backing

up.

• Always keep the camera lens

clean. If the lens is covered with

foreign matter, the camera may

not operate normally.

Features of your vehicle

2044

Blue Link

(if equipped)

Hyundai aims to offer differentiated cus-

tomer values through a ‘Connected Car

Life,’ which is to provide consumers with

fast and reliable IT technology. As con-

sumers’ lifestyles become more and more

mobile in thanks to remarkable advances

in smart phones, tablet PCs and overall

wireless telecommunication, new lifestyle

patterns demand seamless connection

between one’s office, home, outdoors and

automobiles.

Automobile companies are now faced with

the task of shifting their paradigm from

vehicle-centered services to customer

value-centered services, with the ultimate

goal of securing global leadership in the

field of vehicle IT and telematics.

Hyundai Motor plans to achieve this by

realizing a terminal platform flexible to

changes in IT technology, cooperating

with global IT companies, creating an

eco-system and providing the latest con-

tents & services based on an open envi-

ronment.

Using the Room Mirror Key

Selecting the room mirror key will allow

you to make service required inquiries,

POI info searches, and emergency res-

cues by connecting to the Blue Link

Center.

Such features can be used only after

subscribing to the Blue Link

service.

➀ (Blue Link

Center)

Makes requests for Blue Link

service

related inquiries and consultations.

A call is connected to the Blue Link

service center employee.

Re-pressing the key will end the call.

This feature does not operate when you

are on a Bluetooth

phone call.

➁ (Blue Link

for POI)

• Blue Link

for Voice command

Starts Blue Link

voice command.

Voice receiving voice guidance, shortly

press the button to convert to voice com-

mand mode.Press and hold the button to

end voice command.

• TBT VR Commands

1. Navigate to

“Navigate to” voice command is used to

request the download of route data for a

new destination, saved destinations,

daily routes and previous destinations.

2. Save Destination

“Save Destination” VR command is used

to assign a voice tag to the last down-

loaded destination and store it in a desti-

nation directory.

4205

Features of your vehicle

NOTE:

The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup-

ports the store of ten(10) destinations

in the TBT destinations directory.

3. Route Preview

“Route Preview”VR command allows the

user to preview the route instructions

(upcoming maneuver instructions) at any

time during the route guidance.

4. Destinations List

“Destinations List” VR command allows

the user to preview and delete the stored

destinations with their associated voice

tags in the Turn by Turn destinations

directory.

5.Voice Guidance

“Voice Guidance” VR command allows

the user to mute/unmute the Turn by

Turn(TBT) direction announcements.

6. Suspend Route

“Suspend Route” VR command allows

the user to suspend and pause Turn by

Turn(TBT) route guidance while in the

guidance mode.

7. Resume Route

“Resume Route” VR command allows

the user to resume Turn by Turn(TBT)

route guidance.

➂ (Blue Link

for SOS)

In the case of an emergency, requests for

help to the Blue Link

center.

Call is connected to the Blue Link

emer-

gency rescue center. Re-pressing the

key will end the call.

If already on a Bluetooth

phone call, the

call will end to connect you to the Blue Link

Emergency Rescue Center.

CAUTION

• You cannot talk simultaneously

on the Bluetooth

phone and

Blue Link

phone.

• While on a Bluetooth

call, press-

ing the key or key will

display a message indicating that

you are currently on a call.

• A message will be displayed if you

receive a Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology call while

already on a Blue Link

call. At

this time, press the key on the

steering wheel remote controller

to accept the call. The phone bell

will not ring.

Features of your vehicle

2064

Eco Coach

• What is Eco Coach?

Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach compares

your fuel economy against the govern-

ment tested average (EPA) or other simi-

lar Hyundai models (community), based

on your preference. Each month, or after

every tank fill up, Eco Coach rates your

extended average and gives you a

reward star if you best the average.

See your My Hyundai web page for more

information.

• What does the bar graph and horizontal

line mean?

The horizontal line is adjusted once per

month or at each tank full, based on your

preference; it represents the EPA com-

bined average or community average

fuel economy target.

• What is My Eco MPG?

Your actual fuel economy average over

2.5 minutes.

This value is also shown in bar graph as

your “now” rating.

• What are Eco Rewards?

If you beat the average (the EPA or com-

munity), you will receive an Eco Reward

point.

See your my Hyundai web page for more

information.

[Eco Driving] will not operate if the vehi-

cle ignition is not turned on. Please oper-

ate with the ignition turned on.

4207

Features of your vehicle

Turn by Turn

The Turn by Turn feature can be used

through Blue Link

1.Direction Indicator Image

2.Remaining distance until next point

3.The Count bar is divided into a total of

9 levels.

9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi

7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi

5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft

3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft

1 Level 100ft

4.Next Street name

5.Distance to destination

6.Expected Time Arrival

7. Current Street name

❈ For information on specific

Blue Link

operations, please refer to

a separate manual.

Features of your vehicle

2084

■■

CD Player : AC140INAN, AC241INAN, AC1B2INKN, AC2B1INKN

❋No logo will be shown if the HD Radio

feature is not supported.

4209

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND

FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

(for HD RADIO

equipped model)

1. (EJECT)

• Ejects the disc.

• Convert to Radio mode.

• Each time the key is pressed,the mode

is changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM,

XM1, XM2, XM3.

• Convert to Media Mode

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD,

USB(iPod

), AUX, My Music, BT

Audio.

4. (for

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology equipped model)

• Converts to Phone mode

❈ When a phone is not connected, the

connection screen is displayed.

5. PWR/VOL knob

• Power : Press to turn power on/off.

• Volume : Turn left/right to control

volume.

• When pressed shortly(under 0.8 seconds)

- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-

quency.

- Media (CD/USB/iPod

/My Music)

modes : changes the track, Song(file)

• When pressed and held (Over 0.8 sec-

onds)

-Radio mode : continuously changes

the frequency.Upon release, plays the

current frequency.

-Media(CD/USB/iPod

/My Music) modes :

rewinds or fast forwards the track or

file

-During a Handsfree call, controls the

call volume.

• HD RADIO™ : Channel Change

• XM RADIO™ : Category Search

• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search Folder

HD/CAT

FOLDER

SEEK

TRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

Features of your vehicle

2104

• Turns the monitor display on/off.

When the button is pressed, stopssound

and "Audio Mute" is displayedon LCD.

10.

• Radio Mode : previews all receivable

broadcasts for 5 seconds each

• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :

previews each song (file) for 10 sec-

onds each.

11.

Converts to Setup mode.

12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode :turn to change broadcast

frequencies.

• Media (CD/USB/iPod

/My Music)

modes : turn to search tracks /chan-

nels/files.

13. DISC-IN LED

• LED that indicates whether a disc is

inserted.

14. RESET

• Forced system termination and system

restart.

15.

• XM RADIO™ : Category Search

• CD, USB/MP3 mode : Search Folder

CAT

FOLDER

SETUP

SCAN

MUTE

DISP

4211

Features of your vehicle

Steering remote controller

1.VOLUME

• Used to control volume.

2. SEEK

• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)

- Radio mode : searches broadcast

frequencies saved to presets.

- Media(CD / USB / iPod

/ My Music /

BT Audio) modes :changes the track,

file or chapter.

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- Radio mode, automatically searches

broadcast frequencies and channels

- Media(CD / USB / iPod

/ My Music)

modes, rewinds or fast forwards the

track or song(file)

- BT Audio mode may not be support-

ed in some mobile phones.

3. MODE

• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is

changed in order of FM1

➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟

XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3 ➟ CD ➟ USB or

iPod

➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio

• If the media is not connected or a disc

is not inserted, corresponding modes

will be disabled.

Features of your vehicle

2124

• Ends phone call

• When pressed shortly

-When pressed in the phone screen,

displays call history screen

-When pressed in the dial screen,

makes a call

-When pressed in the incoming call

screen, answers the call

-When pressed during call waiting,

switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)

- When pressed in the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Handsfree wait

mode, redials the last call

- When pressed during a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Handsfree call,

switches call back to mobile phone

(Private)

- When pressed while calling on the

mobile phone, switches call back to

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree (Operates only when

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree is connected)

• When pressed shortly

- Starts voice recognition

- When selecting during a voice prompt,

stops the prompt and converts to voice

command waiting state

• When pressed and held

(over 0.8 seconds)

- Ends voice recognition

4213

Features of your vehicle

HD Radio

Technology

(for HD RADIO

equipped model)

HD Radio Technology manufactured

under license from iBiquity Digital

Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and

“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of

iBiquity Digital Corp.

Program Service Data:Contributes to the

superior user experience of HD Radio

Technology. Presents song name, artist,

station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide,

and other relevant data streams.

Adjacent to traditional main stations are

extra local FM channels. These

HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original

music as well as deep cuts into tradition-

al genre.

Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio

Technology enables local radio stations

to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM

sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds

like a CD.

HD Radio

signal delay

To overcome the delay that digital sys-

tems inherently produce, HD Radio

technology first uses the audio signal of

the analog broadcasting when you tune

to an AM station or to the main channel

of a FM station.After that, the system will

blend from analog to digital signal.

Normally, this blending is very smooth. If

you experience a skip in program content

of several seconds, the radio station has

not implemented HD Radio

broadcast-

ing correctly. This is not a problem with

your audio system.

Due to the fact that sub channels are only

broadcasting digital, blending from analog

to digital signal is not possible if you tune

to a sub channel. In this case playback of

the sub channel starts after several sec-

onds, this is a normal function.

Features of your vehicle

2144

RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Frequency

Displays the current frequency.

3. Preset

Displays current preset number [1] ~ [6].

4. Preset Display

Displays preset buttons.

5. Info

Displays broadcast information.

6. HD

Changes HD Radio channels.

7. A.store

Automatically saves frequencies with

superior reception to Preset buttons.

4215

Features of your vehicle

HD RADIO MODE

(for HD RADIO

equipped model)

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.

2. HD Channel

Displays information for the currently

playing HD Radio broadcast.

3. Song Information

Displays the album, artist, and title infor-

mation.

4. Frequency

Displays the current frequency.

5. HD Radio Broadcast Station

Displays the HD Radio broadcast station

name.

6. Preset

Displays currently playing preset number

[1] ~ [6].

7. Preset Display

Displays saved presets.

8. Info

Displays broadcast information.

9. HD

Changes HD Radio channels.

10. A.Store

Automatically saves frequencies with

superior reception to Preset buttons.

Features of your vehicle

2164

Switching to Radio Mode

Pressing the key will change the

operating mode in order of FM1

➟

FM2

➟

XM1

➟

XM2

➟

XM3

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within

[Display], then pressing the

key will display the Radio Pop-

up Mode screen.

Turn the TUNE knob to move the

focus. Press the knob to select.

Searching Radio Frequencies

Using Seek

Press the key to play the pre-

vious/next frequency.

Using TUNE

Turn the TUNE knob to select the

desired frequency.

• FM : Increases/decreased by 200kHz

• AM : Increases/decreased by 10kHz

Using Radio Mode

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the button to display the

broadcast information for the frequency

saved to each button.

Press the ~ buttons to play the

desired preset.

✽✽

NOTICE

While listening to a frequency you want

to save as a preset, press and hold one of

the ~ preset buttons (over 0.8

seconds) to save the current frequency

to the selected preset.

Preset

SEEK

TRACK

RADIO

SETUP

RADIO

4217

Features of your vehicle

Auto Store

Press the button to automatical-

ly save receivable frequencies to Preset

buttons.

✽✽

NOTICE

While Auto Store is operating, pressing

the [Cancel] button again will cancel

Auto Store and restore the previous fre-

quency.

Scan

Press the key to preview fre-

quencies with superior reception for 5

seconds each.

Press and hold the key (over

0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5

seconds each.

Once scan is complete, the previous fre-

quency will be restored.

While Scan is operating, pressing the

key will cancel the scan opera-

tion.

Listening to HD Radio Stations

HD Radio Technology is a digital radio

technology used by AM and FM radio

station to transmit audio and data via a

digital signal in conjunction with their

analog signals.

While listening to the radio, the HD Radio

icon will become displayed if receiving an

HD Radio broadcast.

Changing HD Radio stations

Press the button to change HD

Radio station.

Viewing Station Information

Press the button to view station

information.

Info

SCAN

A.Store

Features of your vehicle

2184

XM RADIO™ MODE

Features of your vehicle

Satellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties in receiv-

ing XM satellite™ radio signals in the fol-

lowing situations.

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov-

ered parking area.

• If you are driving beneath the top level

of a multi-level freeway.

• If you are driving under a bridge.

• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle

(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks

the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where the

surrounding hills or peaks block the

signal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountain road

where is the signal blocked by moun-

tains.

• If you are driving in an area with tall

trees that block the signal (30 ft. /10m

or more), for example on an road that

goes through a dense forest.

• The signal can become weak in some

areas that are not covered by the XM

repeater network.

NOTE:

There may also be additional unfore-

seen circumstances leading to recep-

tion problems with the XM satellite™

radio signal.

Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH

Unavailable’ may occur when starting

XM Radio™.

SATELLITE2

SATELLITE1

4219

Features of your vehicle

XM RADIO™ MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Channel Information

Displays the category, channel number,

channel name, artist and title informa-

tion.

3. Preset

Displays currently playing preset number

[1] ~ [6].

4. Preset Display

Displays saved presets.

Features of your vehicle

2204

Using SEEK

Press the key to play the pre-

vious/next channel.

❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the cur-

rent category.

Using Tune

Turn the TUNE knob to select the

desired channel.

SCAN

Press the key to scan all chan-

nels with superior reception for 5 sec-

onds each.

Once scan is complete, the previously

played channel will be restored.

During Scan, pressing the key

again will cancel the scan operation and

restore the previously played channel.

If the “Category” icon is displayed, chan-

nels are changed within the current cate-

gory.

Searching Categories

Select the category by using the

( ) key and press

the TUNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected category are

played.

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the button to display the

broadcast information for the channel

saved to each button.

Press the ~ buttons to play the

desired preset.

✽✽

NOTICE

While listening to a channel you want to

save as a preset, press and hold one of

the ~ preset buttons (over 0.8

seconds) to save the current channel to

the selected preset.

Preset

CAT

FOLDER

HD/CAT

FOLDER

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

4221

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

DISCS

• This device has been manufactured

to be compatible with software

bearing the following logo marks.

• Do not clean discs with chemical

solutions, such as record sprays,

antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,

benzene, or thinners.

• After using a disc, put the disc back

in its original case to prevent disc

scratches.

• Hold discs by their edges or within

the center hole to prevent damages

to disc surfaces.

• Do not introduce foreign substances

into the disc insert/eject slot.

Introducing foreign substances

could damage the device interior.

• Do not insert two discs simultane-

ously.

• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,

differences in disc reading and

playing times may occur depending

on the disc manufacturer, produc-

tion method and the recording

method as used by the user.

(Continued)

• Clean fingerprints and dust off the

disc surface (coated side) with a soft

cloth.

• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs

attached with labels may result in

disc slot jams or difficulties in disc

removal. Such discs may also result

in noise while playing.

• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not

properly operate depending on the

disc manufacturer, production

method and the record method as

used by the user. If problems per-

sist, trying using a different CD as

continued use may result in mal-

functions.

• The performance of this product

may differ depending on the CD-

RW Drive Software.

• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type

CDs may not function in the device.

DATA discs cannot be played.

(However, such discs may still oper-

ate but will do so abnormally.)

(Continued)

• Do not use abnormally shaped discs

(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-

shaped) as such discs could lead to

malfunctions.

• If the disc is straddled on the disc

slot without removal for 10 seconds,

the disc will automatically be re-

inserted into the disc player.

• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-

ported. Other discs may result in

recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,

CDs with labels)

Features of your vehicle

2224

MEDIA MODE

Pressing the key will change the

operating mode in order of CD

➟

USB(iPod

)

➟

AUX

➟

My Music

➟

Audio.

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within

[Display], then pressing the

key will display the Media Pop-

up Mode screen.

Turn the TUNE knob to move the

focus. Press the knob to select.

✽✽

NOTICE

The media mode pop up screen can be

displayed only when there are two or

more media modes turned on.

Title Icon

When a

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology, iPod

, USB, or AUX device

is connected or a CD is inserted, the cor-

responding mode icon will be displayed.

Icon Title

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

iPod

USB

AUX

MEDIA

SETUP

MEDIA

4223

Features of your vehicle

AUDIO CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan, dis-

plays the currently operating function.

3.Track Info

Displays information about the current

track.

4. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

5. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

6. Info

Shows detailed information about the

current track.

7. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

8. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

9. List

Moves to the list screen.

Features of your vehicle

2244

Using Audio CD Mode

Playing/Pausing CD Tracks

Once an audio CD is inserted, the mode

will automatically start and begin playing.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Only genuine audio CDs are support-

ed. Other discs may result in recogni-

tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with

labels)

• The artist and title information are

displayed on the screen if track infor-

mation is included within the audio

CD.

Changing Tracks

Press the key to move to the

previous or next track.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

track has been playing for 2 seconds

will start the current track from the

beginning.

• Pressing the key before the

track has been playing for 1 seconds

will start the previous track.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired track.

Once you find the desired track, press

the TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current track.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

4225

Features of your vehicle

Audio CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat and

List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current disc.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play tracks in

random(Shuffle) order.

Press the button again to turn the

Random(Shuffle) feature off.

• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in

random(Shuffle) order.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current track. Press the button again to

turn the repeat feature off.

• Repeat : Repeats the current track.

List

Press the button to display the

track list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for tracks. Once the desired track

is displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Repeat

Shuffle

Info

Features of your vehicle

2264

MP3 CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,

displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index

Displays the current file number.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current

file.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Info

Shows detailed information about the

current file.

8. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

9. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

10. Copy

Copies the current file into My Music

11. List

Moves to the list screen.

Using MP3 CD Mode

Playing/Pausing MP3 Files

Once an MP3 disc is inserted the mode

will automatically start and being playing.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

If there are numerous files and folders

within the disc, reading time could take

more than 10 seconds and the list may

not be displayed or song searches may

not operate. Once loading is complete,

try again.

4227

Features of your vehicle

Changing Files

Press the key to move to the

previous or next file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

file has been playing for 2 seconds will

start the current file from the begin-

ning.

• Pressing the key before the

file has been playing for 1 seconds will

start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the

TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

Searching Folders

Press the

(

) key to

select and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,

press the TUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will

begin playing.

MP3 CD Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat, Copy

and List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current file.

Info

CAT

FOLDER

HD/CAT

FOLDER

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

2284

✽✽

NOTICE

• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as

the default display within Display

setup, the album/artist/file informa-

tion are displayed as detailed file

information.

• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option

is set as the default display, the folder

name/file name are displayed as

detailed file information.

• The title, artist and album info are

displayed only when such information

are recorded within the MP3 file ID3

tag.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play files in

random(Shuffle) order.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of Random

(Shuffle) Folder

➟ Random (Shuffle) All➟

Off.

• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all files

within the current folder in Random

(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files in

Random(Shuffle) order.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of Repeat

➟Repeat

Folder

➟Off.

• Repeat: Repeats the current file.

• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within

the current Folder.

Copying Files

Press the button to copy the cur-

rent file into My Music.

✽✽

NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copy-

ing will display a pop-up asking whether

you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,

select 'Yes’.

List

Press the button to display the file

list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for files. Once the desired file is

displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Copy

Repeat

Shuffle

4229

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE USB

DEVICE

• Connect the USB device after turning

on the engine. The USB device may

become damaged if it is already con-

nected when the ignition is turned

on.The USB device may not operate

properly if the car ignition is turned

on or off with the USB device connect-

ed.

• Heed caution to static electricity when

connecting/disconnecting USB

devices.

• Encoded MP3 Players will not be rec-

ognized when connected as an exter-

nal device.

• When connecting an external USB

device, the device may not properly

recognize the USB is in some states.

• Only products formatted with

byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be

recognized.

• This device recognizes USB devices

formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-

mats. This device does not recognize

files in NTFS file format.

(Continued)

• Some USB devices may not be sup-

ported due to compatibility issues.

• Avoid contact between the USB con-

nector with bodily parts or foreign

objects.

• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of

USB devices within short periods of

time may result in product malfunc-

tion.

• A strange noise may occur when dis-

connecting the USB.

• Make sure to connect/disconnect

external USB devices with the audio

power turned off.

• The amount of time required to recog-

nize the USB device may differ

depending on the type, size or file for-

mats stored in the USB. Such differ-

ences in time are not indications of

malfunctions.

• The device only supports USB devices

used to play music files.

• USB images and videos are not sup-

ported.

(Continued)

• Do not use the USB I/F to charge bat-

teries or USB accessories that gener-

ate heat. Such acts may lead to wors-

ened performance or damage to the

device.

• The device may not recognize the USB

device if separately purchased USB

hubs and extension cables are being

used. Connect the USB directly with

the multimedia terminal of the vehi-

cle.

• When using mass storage USB devices

with separate logical drives, only files

saved to the root drive can be played.

• Files may not properly operate if

application programs are installed to

the USBs.

• The device may not operate normally

if MP3 Players, cellular phones, digi-

tal cameras, or other electronic

devices (USB devices not recognized

as portable disk drives) are connected

with the device.

Features of your vehicle

2304

(Continued)

• Charging through the USB may not

work for some mobile devices.

• The device may not support normal

operation when using a USB memory

type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory.

• The device may not support normal

operation when using formats such as

HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.

• The device will not support files

locked by DRM (Digital Rights

Management.)

• USB memory sticks used by connect-

ing an Adaptor (SD Type or CF Type)

may not be properly recognized.

• The device may not operate properly

when using USB HDDs or USBs sub-

ject to connection failures caused by

vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-stick type)

(Continued)

• Avoid use of USB memo-

ry products that can also

be used as key chains or

mobile phone accessories.

Use of such products may

cause damage to the USB jack.

• Connecting an MP3 device or phone

through various channels, such as

AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may

result in pop noises or abnormal oper-

ation.

4231

Features of your vehicle

USB MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,

displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index

Displays the current file number.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current file.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Info

Displays detailed information for the cur-

rent file.

8. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

9. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

10. Copy

Copies the current file into My Music.

11. List

Moves to the list screen.

Features of your vehicle

2324

Using USB Mode

Playing/Pausing USB Files

Once a USB is connected, the mode will

automatically start and begin playing a

USB file.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Loading may require additional time

if there are many files and folders

within the USB and result in faulty list

display or file searching. Normal

operations will resume once loading is

complete.

• The device may not support normal

operation when using a USB memory

type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory.

Changing Files

Press the keys to move to the

previous or next file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

file has been playing for 2 seconds will

start the current file from the begin-

ning.

• Pressing the key before the

file has been playing for 1 seconds will

start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the

TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to rewind

or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

4233

Features of your vehicle

Searching Folders

Press the

(

)key

to select and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,

press the TUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected folder will

begin playing.

USB Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat, Copy

and List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as

the default display within Display

setup, the album/artist/file information

are displayed as detailed file informa-

tion.

• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option

is set as the default display, the folder

name/file name are displayed as

detailed file information.

• The title, artist and album info are

displayed only when such information

are recorded within the MP3 file ID3

tag.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play files in

random(Shuffle) order.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of

Random(Shuffle) Folder

➟Random

(Shuffle) All

➟Off.

• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the

files in the current folder in

random(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files in

random(Shuffle) order.

Shuffle

Info

CAT

FOLDER

HD/CAT

FOLDER

Features of your vehicle

2344

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current file or folder.

Each time the button is pressed, the fea-

ture changes in order of Repeat

➟

Repeat Folder ➟ Off.

• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current

file.

• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all files

within the current folder.

Copying Files

Press the button to copy the cur-

rent file into My Music.

✽✽

NOTICE

Selecting another feature during copy-

ing will display a pop-up asking whether

you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,

select 'Yes’.

List

Press the button to display the file

list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for files. Once the desired file is

displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Copy

Repeat

4235

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

iPod

DEVICE

• iPod

is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc.

• In order to use the iPod

while

operating the keys, you must use a

dedicated iPod

cable. (the cable

that is supplied when purchasing

iPod

/iPhone

products)

• If the iPod

is connected to the

vehicle while it is playing, a high

pitch sound could occur for approx-

imately 1-2 seconds immediately

after connecting. If possible, con-

nect the iPod to the vehicle with the

iPod

stopped/paused.

• During ACC ON state, connecting

the iPod

through the iPod

cable

will charge the iPod

through the

car audio system.

• When connecting with the iPod

cable, make sure to fully insert the

jack to prevent communication

interference.

(Continued)

• When the EQ features of an exter-

nal device, such as the iPod

, and

the audio system are both active,

EQ effects could overlap and cause

sound deterioration and distortion.

Whenever possible, turn off the EQ

feature within the external device

upon use by connecting with the

audio system.

• Noise may occur when an iPod

AUX device is connected. When

such devices are not being used, dis-

connect the device for storage.

• When the iPod

or AUX device

power is connected to the power

jack, playing the external device

may result in noise. In such cases,

disconnect the power connection

before use.

• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the char-

acteristics of your iPod

/Phone

device.

(Continued)

• If your iPhone

is connected to

both the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology and USB, the sound

may not be properly played. In

your iPhone

, select the Dock con-

nector or Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology to change the sound

output (source).

• iPod mode cannot be operated

when the iPod

cannot be recog-

nized due to versions that do not

support communication protocols.

• For fifth generation iPod

Nano

devices, the iPod

may not be rec-

ognized when the battery level is

low. Please charge the iPod

for

use.

• Search/play orders shown within the

iPod

device may differ with the

orders shown within the audio sys-

tem.

• If the iPod

malfunctions due to an

iPod

device defect, reset the iPod

and try again. (To learn more, refer

to your iPod

manual)

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

2364

iPod

MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), displays

the currently operating function.

3. Song Index

Displays the current song/total number of

songs.

4. Song Info

Displays information about the current

song.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

8. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

9. List

Moves to the list screen.

(Continued)

• Some iPod

s may not sync with the

System depending on its version. If

the Media is removed before the

Media is recognized, then the sys-

tem may not properly restore the

previously operated mode. (iPad

charging is not supported.)

4237

Features of your vehicle

Using iPod

Mode

Playing/Pausing iPod

Songs

Once an iPod

is connected, the mode

will automatically start and begin playing

an iPod

song.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

iPod

s with unsupported communica-

tion protocols may not properly operate

in the audio system.

Changing Songs

Press the key to move to the

previous or next song.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

song has been playing for 2 seconds

will start the current song from the

beginning.

• Pressing the key before the

song has been playing for 1 seconds

will start the previous song.

• Slight time differences may exist

depending your iPod

product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current song.

Searching Categories

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category,

press the TUNE knob to select and

play.

✽✽

NOTICE

There are eight categories that can be

searched, including Playlists, Artists,

Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,

Audiobooks and Podcasts.

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

2384

Category Menu

Within the iPod

Category menu, you will

have access to the , Home, and

features.

1. : Displays the play screen

2. Home : Moves to the iPod

root catego-

ry screen

3. : Moves to the previous category

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the search mode is accessed while

playing a song, the most recently

searched category is displayed.

• Search steps upon initial connection

may differ depending on the type of

iPod

device.

4239

Features of your vehicle

iPod

Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Random(Shuffle), Repeat and List

features.

Random(Shuffle)

Press the button to play songs in

random(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all songs

in Random(Shuffle) order.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current song. Press the button again to

turn the repeat feature off.

• Repeat : Repeats the current song

List

Press the button to display the

Category Menu.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category,

press the TUNE knob to select and

play.

AUX MODE

Using AUX Mode

Press the key Select [AUX]

An external device can be connected to

play music.

MEDIA

List

Repeat

Shuffle

Features of your vehicle

2404

Connecting an External Device

External audio players (Camcorders, car

VCR, etc.) can be played through a ded-

icated cable.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If an external device connector is con-

nected with the AUX terminal, then

AUX mode will automatically operate.

Once the connector is disconnected,

the previous mode will be restored.

• AUX mode can be used only when an

external audio player (camcorder, car

VCR, etc.) has been connected.

• The AUX volume can be controlled

separately from other audio modes.

• Connecting a connector jack to the

AUX terminal without an external

device will convert the system to AUX

mode, but only output noise. When an

external device is not being used, also

remove the connector jack.

• When the external device power is

connected to the power jack, playing

the external device may output noise.

In such cases, disconnect the power

connection before use.

• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX

jack upon use.

4241

Features of your vehicle

MY MUSIC MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode

Displays currently operating mode.

2. Operation State

From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,

displays the currently operating function.

3. File Index

Displays the current file/total number of

files.

4. File Info

Displays information about the current

file.

5. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

6. Play Time

Displays the current play time.

7. Info

Displays detailed information for the cur-

rent file.

8. Random(Shuffle)

Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature

on/off.

9. Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

10. Delete

Deletes the current file.

11. List

Moves to the list screen.

Features of your vehicle

2424

Using My Music Mode

Playing/Pausing My Music Files

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

If there are no files saved within My

Music, the button will be dis-

abled.

Changing Files

Press the key to move to the

previous or next file.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Pressing the key after the

file has been playing for 2 seconds will

start the current file from the begin-

ning.

• Pressing the key before the

file has been playing for 1 seconds will

start the previous file.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press the

TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) to

rewind or fast-forward the current file.

Scan

Press the key to play the first 10

seconds of each file.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

My Music

4243

Features of your vehicle

My Music Mode Menu

Within this mode, you will have access to

the Info, Random(Shuffle), Repeat,

Delete and List features.

Info

Press the button to display details

about the current file.

✽✽

NOTICE

The title, artist and album info are dis-

played only when such information is

recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.

Random

Press the button to play files in

random order. Press the button again to

turn the Random feature off.

Repeat

Press the button to repeat the

current song. Press the button again to

turn the repeat feature off.

Deleting Files

Press the button to delete the

current file.

List

Press the button to display the file

list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

search for files. Once the desired file is

displayed, press the knob to select and

play.

List

Delete

Repeat

Shuffle

Info

Features of your vehicle

2444

List Menu

From the List screen, it is possible to

delete files you previously saved into My

Music.

Press the button or individually

select the files you want to delete. Once

files are selected, the button

and buttons will be enabled.

1) :Moves to the previous screen

2)Sellect All: Selects all files

3)Unsellet All: Deselects all selected files

4)Delete: Deletes selected files

After selecting the files you want to

delete, press the button to

delete the selected files.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If there is memory available, up to

6,000 files can be saved.

• Identical files cannot be copied more

than 1,000 times.

• To check memory information, go to

[System] [Memory

Information]

SETUP

Delete

Unselect All

Select All

4245

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio Mode

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Audio Mode can be used only when a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone has been connected.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Audio Mode will not be available

when connecting mobile phones that

do not support this feature.

• While Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio is playing, if the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone is connected, then the music

will also stop.

• Moving the Track up/down while

playing Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio mode may result in

pop noises in some mobile phones.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

streaming audio may not be support-

ed in some mobile phones.

(Continued)

• When returning to Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio mode

after ending a call, the mode may not

automatically restart in some mobile

phones.

• Receiving an incoming call or making

an outgoing call while playing

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio

may result in audio interference.

Features of your vehicle

2464

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology AUDIO MODE

Using

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio Mode

Playing/Pausing Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology

Audio

Once a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is connected, the mode will auto-

matically start.

While playing, press the button to

pause and press button to play.

✽✽

NOTICE

The play/pause feature may operate

differently depending on the mobile

phone.

Changing Files

Press the key to move to the

previous or next file.

Setting Connection

If a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device has not been connected, press the

key [Phone] button to display

the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology con-

nection screen.

It is possible to use the pair phone, con-

nect/disconnect and delete features from

your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

audio is not operating properly, check

whether the feature is turned off at

[Phone] [Streaming

Audio]. If the feature is off, turn back

on and try again.

• If music is not yet playing from your

mobile device after converting to

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio

mode, pressing the play button once

may start playing the mode. Check to

see that music is playing from the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device

after converting to Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio Mode.

SETUP

SEEK

TRACK

4247

Features of your vehicle

Pairing a

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Device

What is Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchro-

nizing your

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone or device with the car

audio system for connection. Pairing is

necessary to connect and use the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology feature.

Pairing Key / Key on

the Steering Remote Controller

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the key or the key

on the steering remote controller. The

following screen is displayed.

2. Press the button to enter the

Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as shown

when searching from your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the

device

3. From your

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device (i.e. Mobile

Phone), search and select your car

audio system.

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

2484

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played where the passkey is entered.

Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to pair

your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device]

4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played 6 digits passkey.

Hear, check the passkey on your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following

screen is displayed.

✽✽

NOTICE

If Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices are paired but none are current-

ly connected, pressing the key

or the key on the

steering wheel displays the following

screen. Press the [Pair] button to pair a

new device or press the [Connect] to

connect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select

TUNE knob

1.The following steps are the same as

those described in the section "When

No Devices have been Paired" on the

previous page.

SETUP

PHONE

4249

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology fea-

tures supported within the vehicle are

as follows. Some features may not be

supported depending on your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to

Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC

on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

- Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices can be paired to

the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device can be connected at

a time.

• Other devices cannot be paired while

a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is connected.

• Only Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-

ed features are supported.

• Bluetooth related operations are pos-

sible only within devices that support

Handsfree or audio features, such as a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio

device.

• If a connected Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device becomes discon-

nected due to being out of communi-

cation range, turning the device OFF,

or a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

communication error, corresponding

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices are automatically searched

and reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstable due to

communication errors between the

car Handsfree and the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device, reset the

device by turning off and back on

again. Upon resetting Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device, the sys-

tem will be restored.

• After pairing is complete, a contacts

download request is sent once to the

mobile phone. Some mobile phones

may require confirmation upon

receiving a download request, ensure

your mobile phone accepts the con-

nection. Refer to your phones user’s

manual for additional information

regarding phone pairing and connec-

tions.

Features of your vehicle

2504

Connecting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1)Connected Phone : Device that is cur-

rently connected

2)Paired Phone : Device that is paired

but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the

device you want to connect and press the

button.

Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices with the car

audio system.The "Change Priority" fea-

ture is used to set the connection priority

of paired phones.

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Paired Phone List]

SETUP

Connect

SETUP

4251

Features of your vehicle

From the paired phone list, select the

phone you want to switch to the highest

priority, then press the

button from the Menu. The selected

device will be changed to the highest pri-

ority.

✽✽

NOTICE

Priority icon will be displayed when the

selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the

currently connected device and press the

button.

Disconnect

SETUP

Change priority

Features of your vehicle

2524

Deleting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the

device you want to delete and press the

button.

✽✽

NOTICE

• When deleting the currently connect-

ed device, the device will automatical-

ly be disconnected to proceed with the

deleting process.

• If a paired Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device is deleted, the

device’s call history and contacts data

will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, you must

pair the device again.

Delete

SETUP

4253

Features of your vehicle

USING

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device connected, press the

key to display the Phone menu screen.

1)Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used

contacts saved for easy access

2)Dial Number : Displays the dial screen

where numbers can be dialed to make

calls

3)Call History : Device the call history list

screen

4)Contacts : Displays the Contacts list

screen

5)Setup : Displays Phone related set-

tings.

✽✽

NOTICE

• If you press the [Call History] button

but there is no call history data, a

prompt is displayed which asks to

download call history data.

• If you press the [Contacts] button but

there is no contacts data stored, a

prompt is displayed which asks to

download contacts data.

• This feature may not be supported in

some mobile phones. For more infor-

mation on download support, refer to

your mobile phone user’s manual.

Favorites

Press the key Select

[Favorites]

1)Saved favorite contact : Connects call

upon selection

2)To add favorite : Downloaded contacts

be saved as favorite.

3)Delete All : Delete all stored favorite

contacts

✽✽

NOTICE

• To save Favorite, contacts should be

downloaded.

• Contact saved in Favorites will not be

automatically updated if the contact

has been updated in the phone. To

update Favorites, delete the Favorite

and create a new Favorite.

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

2544

Calling by Dialing a Number

Press the key Select [Dial

Number]

1)Dial Pad :Used to enter phone number

2)Call : If a number has been entered,

calls the number If no number has

been entered, switches to call history

screen

3)End : Deletes the entered phone num-

ber

4)Delete : Deletes entered numbers one

digit at a time

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device connected

will display the following screen.

1)Caller : Displays the other party’s name

when the incoming caller is saved with-

in your contacts

2)Incoming Number : Displays the

incoming number

3)Accept : Accept the incoming call

4)Reject : Reject the incoming call

✽✽

NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is dis-

played, most Audio and SETUP mode

features are disabled. Only the call

volume will operate.

• The telephone number may not be

properly displayed in some mobile

phones.

• When a call is answered with the

mobile phone, the call mode will auto-

matically revert to Private mode.

PHONE

4255

Features of your vehicle

During a Handsfree Call

1)Caller : Displays the other party’s name

if the incoming caller is saved within

your contacts

2)Incoming Number : Displays the

incoming number

3)Call time : Displays the call time

4)End : Ends call

5)Private : Converts to Private mode

6)Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard by

the other party

7)Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off

✽✽

NOTICE

If the mic is muted, the other party will

not be able to hear your voice.

Call History

Press the key Select [Call

History]

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed

calls is displayed.

Press the button to download

the call history.

1)Call History :

- Displays recent calls (call history)

- Connects call upon selection

2)Download : Download Recent Call

History

• Call history may not be saved in the call

history list in some mobile phones.

• Calls received with hidden caller ID will

not be saved in the call history list.

• Calling through the call history is not

possible when there is no call history

stored or a

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone is not connected.

• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed

calls are stored in Call History.

• Time of received/dialed calls and call

time information are not saved.

Download

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

2564

Contacts

Press the key Select

[Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entries is

displayed. Press the button to

download the call history.

1)Contacts List :

- Displays downloaded contacts entries

- Connects call upon selection

2)Sort by :Find a contact in an alphabet-

ical order.

3)Download : Download contacts entries

✽✽

NOTICE

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

phone can be downloaded into the car

contacts. Contacts that have been

downloaded to the car cannot be edit-

ed or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are managed

separately for each paired Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device (max 5

devices x 1,000 contacts each).

Previously downloaded data is main-

tained even if the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device has been discon-

nected.

(However, the contacts and call histo-

ry saved to the phone will be deleted if

a paired phone is deleted.)

• It is possible to download contacts

during Bluetooth streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, the icon

will be displayed within the status bar.

(Continued)

• It is not possible to begin downloading

a contact list when the contact down-

load feature has been turned off with-

in the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device. In addition, some devices may

require device authorization upon

attempting to download contacts. If

downloading does not normally occur,

check the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device settings or the

screen state.

• The contacts download feature may

not be supported in some mobile

phones. For more information of sup-

ported Bluetooth

devices and func-

tion support, refer to your phone’s

user manual.

Download

PHONE

4257

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Setting

Pairing a New Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices

can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the “Pairing

through Phone Setup” section within

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile

phones that have been paired with the

audio system. Upon selecting a paired

phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the “Setting

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Connection” section within

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

1) : Moves to the previous screen

2)Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/

disconnects currently selected phone

3)Delete : Deletes the currently selected

phone

4)Change Priority : Sets currently selected

phone to highest connection priority

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

2584

✽✽

NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-

LOADING CONTACTS

• Only contacts within connected

phones can be downloaded. Also

check to see that your mobile phone

supports the download feature.

• To learn more about whether your

mobile phone supports contacts

downloads, refer to your mobile

phone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connected

phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded from

the mobile phone, a download progress

bar is displayed.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Upon downloading phone contacts,

the previous corresponding data is

deleted.

• This feature may not be supported in

some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operate

while contacts are being downloaded.

Outgoing Volume

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use the , buttons to adjust the

outgoing volume level.

✽✽

NOTICE

While on a call, the volume can be

changed by using the key.

SEEK

TRACK

SETUP SETUP

4259

Features of your vehicle

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]

Once

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology is

turned off,

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology related features will not be

supported within the audio system.

✽✽

NOTICE

To turn Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

back on, go to [Phone] and

press “Yes

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

2604

VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing wheel remote controller. Say a com-

mand.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the

system will say “Please say a command

after the beep (BEEP)”

• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode,

then the system will only say “(BEEP)”

• To change Prompt Feedback

[On]/[Off], go to [System]

[Prompt Feedback]

✽✽

NOTICE

For proper recognition, say the com-

mand after the voice instruction and

beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1)Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

“Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).

Instead, always use full names (includ-

ing first and last names) for all contacts

(e.g., use “Jacob Stevenson” instead of

“Dad”).

2)Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use

“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or

“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).

3)Do not use acronyms (i.e., use “County

Finance Department” instead of

“CFD”).

4)Do not use special characters (e.g.,

“@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”, “amper-

sand &”).

5)If a name is not recognized from the

contact list, change it to a more

descriptive name (e.g., use “Grandpa

Joseph” instead of “Pa Joe”).

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing remote controller

The prompt message is immediately

ended and the beep tone will sound.

After the “beep”, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing remote controller

The command wait state is immediately

ended and the beep ton will sound. After

the “beep”, say the voice command.

SETUP

4261

Features of your vehicle

❈ Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• End voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command after

the beep (BEEP)

Please say a command after

the beep (BEEP)

Please say a...

Contacts

Please say the name of the contacts you want

to call (BEEP)

Ding~

(BEEP)

Ding~

Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

Shortly pressing the key

(under 0.8 seconds)

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's

manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's

manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

Features of your vehicle

2624

Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used within the current mode.

Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts

Ex) Call “John Smith”

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as

"Mobile" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as

"Office" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as

"Home" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as

"Other" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-

mands. After saying this command, say

“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or

“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Display the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command Function

Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contact

saved in the Contacts to automatically con-

nect the call.

Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying

this command, you can say the number that

you want to call.

Redial Connects the most recently called number.

Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice

recognition and Bluetooth

connections.

•

When listening to the radio, displays the

next radio screen. (FM1

➟

FM2

➟

XM1

➟

XM2

➟

XM3

➟

FM1)

Radio

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played radio screen.

•

When currently listening to the FM radio,

maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.

FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.

(Call by Name)

Voice Command List

• Common Commands:These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available dur-

ing certain operations)

on Mobile

in Office

at Home

on Other

4263

Features of your vehicle

Command Function

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency.

AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency.

XM (Satellite)

•

When currently listening to the XM, main-

tains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played XM screen.

XM (Satellite) 1~3

Displays the selected XM screen.

XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played media

screen.

CD Plays the music saved in the CD.

USB Plays USB music.

iPod

Plays iPod music.

Command Function

My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.

AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth

Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth

device.

Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.

Mute Mutes the sound

Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.

0~255

Features of your vehicle

2644

• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM

radio operation

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used

while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current

present and plays for 10 seconds each.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.(This feature can be used when receiving

RBDS broadcasts.)

Command Function

Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan Scans receivable channels from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.

4265

Features of your vehicle

• Audio CD commands: Commands available during Audio

CD operation

• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during

USB and MP3 CD operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused track.

Pause Pauses the current track.

Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused file.

Pause Pauses the current file.

Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current

folder.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order.

Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder

Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder

Features of your vehicle

2664

•iPod

Commands: Commands available during iPod

oper-

ation

• My Music Commands: Commands available during My

Music operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.

Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current

category.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused file.

Pause Pauses the current file.

Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order.

Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an

additional confirmation process.

4267

Features of your vehicle

SETUP

Starting Mode

Press the key to display the

Setup screen.

You can select and control options related

to [Display], [Sound], [Clock/Calendar],

[Phone] and [System].

Display Settings

Adjusting the Brightness

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Brightness]

Use the , buttons to adjust the

screen brightness or set the Brightness

on Automatic, Daylight, or Night mode.

Press the button to reset.

1)Automatic : Adjusts the brightness

automatically

2)Daylight : Always maintains the bright-

ness on high

3)Night : Always maintains the bright-

ness on low

Pop-up Mode

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]

This feature is used to display the Pop-up

Mode screen when entering radio and

media modes.

When this feature is turned on, pressing

the or key will display

the Pop-up Mode screen.

✽✽

NOTICE

The media Pop-up Mode screen can be

displayed only when two or more media

modes have been connected.

MEDIA RADIO

SETUP

Default

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

2684

Text Scroll

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Text Scroll]

This feature is used to scroll text dis-

played on the screen when it is too long

to be displayed at once.

When turned on, the text is repeatedly

scrolled. When turned off, the text is

scrolled just once.

MP3 Information Display

Press the key Select

[Display] Select [Media Display]

This feature is used to change the infor-

mation displayed within USB and MP3

CD modes.

1)Folder File : Displays file name and

folder name

2)Album Artist Song : Displays album

name/artist name/song

Sound Settings

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

SETUP

4269

Features of your vehicle

Use the , , , buttons to

adjust the Fader/Balance settings.

Use the , buttons to adjust the

Bass/Middle/Treble settings.

Press the button to reset.

SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume

Control)

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]

The volume level is controlled automati-

cally according to the vehicle speed.

SDVC can be set by selecting from

Off/Low/Mid/High.

Voice Recognition Volume

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the

Voice Recognition volume.

SETUP

Default

Features of your vehicle

2704

Touch Screen Beep

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Touch Screen Beep]

This feature is used to turn the touch

screen beep on/off.

Blue Link Voice Volume (if equipped)

Press the key Select

[Sound] Select [Blue Link Voice Vol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the

Blue Link Voice Volume.

System Setting

HD Radio™ On/Off

Press the key Select [System]

Select [FM], [AM]

This feature is used to set whether to

receive FM/AM HD Radio™ broadcasts.

SETUP

SETUP SETUP

4271

Features of your vehicle

Prompt Feedback

Press the key Select [System]

Select [Prompt Feedback]

This feature is used to select the desired

prompt feedback option from ON and OFF.

1) ON : When using voice recognition,

provides detailed guidance prompts

2) OFF : When using voice recognition,

omits some guidance prompts

Language

Press the key Select

[System] Select [Language]

This feature is used to change the system

and voice recognition language.

If the language is changed, the system

will restart and apply the selected lan-

guage.

Memory Information

Press the key Select [System]

Select [Memory Information]

This feature displays information related

to system memory.

1)Using : Displays capacity currently in

use

2)Capacity : Displays total capacity

SETUP SETUP SETUP

Features of your vehicle

2724

REAR VIEW CAMERA

(if equipped)

• The system has been equipped with a

rear view camera for user safety by

allowing a wider rear range of vision.

• The rear view camera will automatical-

ly operate when the ignition key is

turned ON and the transmission lever

is set to R.

• The rear view camera will automatical-

ly stop operating when set to a differ-

ent lever.

CAUTION

• The rear view camera has been

equipped with an optical lens to

provide a wider range of vision

and may appear different from the

actual distance. For safety, directly

check the rear and left/right sides.

WARNING

• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-

bility of the driver to always

check the inside/outside rearview

mirror and the area behind the

vehicle before and while backing

up.

• Always keep the camera lens

clean. If the lens is covered with

foreign matter, the camera may

not operate normally.

4273

Features of your vehicle

Blue Link

(if equipped)

Hyundai aims to offer differentiated cus-

tomer values through a ‘Connected Car

Life,’ which is to provide consumers with

fast and reliable IT technology. As con-

sumers’ lifestyles become more and more

mobile in thanks to remarkable advances

in smart phones, tablet PCs and overall

wireless telecommunication, new lifestyle

patterns demand seamless connection

between one’s office, home, outdoors and

automobiles.

Automobile companies are now faced with

the task of shifting their paradigm from

vehicle-centered services to customer

value-centered services, with the ultimate

goal of securing global leadership in the

field of vehicle IT and telematics.

Hyundai Motor plans to achieve this by

realizing a terminal platform flexible to

changes in IT technology, cooperating

with global IT companies, creating an

eco-system and providing the latest con-

tents & services based on an open envi-

ronment.

Using the Room Mirror Key

Selecting the room mirror key will allow

you to make service required inquiries,

POI info searches, and emergency res-

cues by connecting to the Blue Link

Center.

Such features can be used only after

subscribing to the Blue Link

service.

➀ (Blue Link

Center)

Makes requests for Blue Link

service

related inquiries and consultations.

A call is connected to the Blue Link

service center employee.

Re-pressing the key will end the call.

This feature does not operate when you

are on a Bluetooth

phone call.

➁ (Blue Link

for POI)

• Blue Link

for Voice command

Starts Blue Link

voice command.

Voice receiving voice guidance, shortly

press the button to convert to voice com-

mand mode.Press and hold the button to

end voice command.

• TBT VR Commands

1. Navigate to

“Navigate to” voice command is used to

request the download of route data for a

new destination, saved destinations,

daily routes and previous destinations.

2. Save Destination

“Save Destination” VR command is used

to assign a voice tag to the last down-

loaded destination and store it in a desti-

nation directory.

Features of your vehicle

2744

NOTE:

The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup-

ports the store of ten(10) destinations

in the TBT destinations directory.

3. Route Preview

“Route Preview”VR command allows the

user to preview the route instructions

(upcoming maneuver instructions) at any

time during the route guidance.

4. Destinations List

“Destinations List” VR command allows

the user to preview and delete the stored

destinations with their associated voice

tags in the Turn by Turn destinations

directory.

5.Voice Guidance

“Voice Guidance” VR command allows

the user to mute/unmute the Turn by

Turn(TBT) direction announcements.

6. Suspend Route

“Suspend Route” VR command allows

the user to suspend and pause Turn by

Turn(TBT) route guidance while in the

guidance mode.

7. Resume Route

“Resume Route” VR command allows

the user to resume Turn by Turn(TBT)

route guidance.

➂ (Blue Link

for SOS)

In the case of an emergency, requests for

help to the Blue Link

center.

Call is connected to the Blue Link

emer-

gency rescue center. Re-pressing the

key will end the call.

If already on a Bluetooth

phone call, the

call will end to connect you to the Blue Link

Emergency Rescue Center.

CAUTION

• You cannot talk simultaneously

on the Bluetooth

phone and

Blue Link

phone.

• While on a Bluetooth

call, press-

ing the key or key will

display a message indicating that

you are currently on a call.

• A message will be displayed if you

receive a Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology call while

already on a Blue Link

call. At

this time, press the key on the

steering wheel remote controller

to accept the call. The phone bell

will not ring.

4275

Features of your vehicle

Eco Coach

• What is Eco Coach?

Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach compares

your fuel economy against the govern-

ment tested average (EPA) or other simi-

lar Hyundai models (community), based

on your preference. Each month, or after

every tank fill up, Eco Coach rates your

extended average and gives you a

reward star if you best the average.

See your My Hyundai web page for more

information.

• What does the bar graph and horizontal

line mean?

The horizontal line is adjusted once per

month or at each tank full, based on your

preference; it represents the EPA com-

bined average or community average

fuel economy target.

• What is My Eco MPG?

Your actual fuel economy average over

2.5 minutes.

This value is also shown in bar graph as

your “now” rating.

• What are Eco Rewards?

If you beat the average (the EPA or com-

munity), you will receive an Eco Reward

point.

See your my Hyundai web page for more

information.

[Eco Driving] will not operate if the vehi-

cle ignition is not turned on. Please oper-

ate with the ignition turned on.

Turn by Turn

The Turn by Turn feature can be used

through Blue Link

1.Direction Indicator Image

2.Remaining distance until next point

3.The Count bar is divided into a total of

9 levels.

9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi

7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi

5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft

3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft

1 Level 100ft

4.Next Street name

5.Distance to destination

6.Expected Time Arrival

7. Current Street name

❈ For information on specific

Blue Link

operations, please refer to

a separate manual.

4276

Features of your vehicle

Before driving / 5-3

Engine start/stop button / 5-5

Automatic transaxle / 5-9

Brake system / 5-14

Cruise control system / 5-24

Economical operation / 5-28

Special driving conditions / 5-30

Winter driving / 5-34

Vehicle load limit / 5-38

Vehicle weight / 5-43

Trailer towing / 5-44

Driving your vehicle

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-

dows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-

tion.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear

a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the

exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your

garage any longer than it takes to start the vehicle and back the car out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area

with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are

kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

Driving your vehicle

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tires.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid

should be checked on a regular basis,

with the exact interval depending on the

fluid. Further details are provided in sec-

tion 7, “Maintenance”.

BEFORE DRIVING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety

of automobile components and

parts, including components found

in the interior furnishings in a vehi-

cle, contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and

reproductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component

wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result

in a loss of vehicle control, that

may lead to an accident, severe

personal injury, and death. The dri-

ver’s primary responsibility is in

the safe and legal operation of a

vehicle, and use of any handheld

devices, other equipment, or vehi-

cle systems which take the driver’s

eyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a vehicle

or which are not permissible by law

should never be used during oper-

ation of the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights

when the engine start/stop button is

turned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make

sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-

iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING - Driving under

the influence of alcohol or

drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.

Drunk driving is the number one

contributor to the highway death

toll each year. Even a small amount

of alcohol will affect your reflexes,

perceptions and judgment. Driving

while under the influence of drugs

is as dangerous or more dangerous

than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a

serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,

don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-

er who has been drinking or taking

drugs. Choose a designated driver

or call a cab.

WARNING

All passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section

3 for more information on their

proper use.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for people,

especially children,before putting a

car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING

• When you intend to park or stop

the vehicle with the engine on, be

careful not to depress the acceler-

ator pedal for a long period of

time. It may overheat the engine or

exhaust system and cause a fire.

• When you make a sudden stop or

turn the steering wheel rapidly,

loose objects may drop on the

floor and it could interfere with

the operation of the foot pedals,

possibly causing an accident.

Keep all things in the vehicle

safely stored.

• If you do not focus on driving, it

may cause an accident. Be care-

ful when operating controls while

driving such as the audio or

heater. It is the responsibility of

the driver to always drive safely.

Driving your vehicle

Illuminated engine start/stop but-

ton

Whenever the front door is opened, the

engine start/stop button will illuminate for

your convenience. The light will go off

after about 30 seconds when the door is

closed.

HEV system start/stop button

position

OFF

To turn off the system, press the engine

start/stop button with the engine

start/stop button in the ON position and

the shift lever in P(Park).When you press

the engine start/stop button without the

shift lever in P(Park), the engine

start/stop button does not turn to the OFF

position, but turns to the ACC position.

✽✽

NOTICE

Before turning off the HEV system, the

vehicle should be stopped.

ACC(Accessory)

Press the HEV system start/stop button

while it is in the OFF position without

depressing the brake pedal.

The electrical accessories are operative.

If you leave the HEV system start/stop

button in the ACC position for more than

1 hour, the battery power will turn off

automatically to prevent the battery from

discharging.

Press the HEV system start/stop button

while the button is in the ACC position

without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked

before the HEV system is started. Do not

leave it in the ON position if the HEV sys-

tem is not running to prevent battery dis-

charge.

START

To start the hybrid system, press the

brake pedal and press the HEV system

start/stop button with the shift lever in the

P(Park) position.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON

OYF059001

WARNING

In an emergency situation while the

vehicle is moving, you can turn off

the engine and turn the engine

start/stop button to the ACC position

by pressing the engine start/stop

button for more than 2 seconds or 3

times successively within 3 sec-

onds. If the vehicle is moving over

10km/h, you can restart the engine

without pressing the brake pedal by

pressing the engine start/stop but-

ton regardless of transaxle position.

Driving your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• If you press the HEV system start/stop

button without depressing the brake

pedal, the HEV system does not start

and the HEV system start/stop button

changes as follows :

OFF

→→

ACC

→→

OFF

• If you leave the engine start/stop but-

ton in the ACC or the ON position for

a long time, the battery will be dis-

charged.

Starting the hybrid system

1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside

the vehicle.

2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly

applied.

3. Place the shift lever in the P(Park)

position. In N(Neutral) position, you

can not start the vehicle.

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Press the HEV system start/stop but-

ton.

It should be started without depress-

ing the accelerator.

WARNING

• Except in an emergency, never

press the engine start/stop but-

ton while the vehicle is in motion.

This could result in higher brak-

ing effort and steering, which

could cause an accident.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is engaged in P (Park), set the

parking brake fully and shut the

engine off. Unexpected and sud-

den vehicle movement may occur

if these precautions are not

taken.

• Never reach for the engine

start/stop button, or any other

controls through the steering

wheel while the vehicle is in

motion. The presence of your

hand or arm in this area could

cause a loss of vehicle control,

an accident and serious bodily

injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objects

around the driver’s seat as they

may move while driving, interfere

with the driver and lead to an

accident.

WARNING

Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski

boots, etc.) may interfere with your

ability to use the brake and acceler-

ator pedal.

Even if you depress the brake pedal

before starting the vehicle in a

sloped area, the vehicle may move

when the parking brake is released.

For your safety, release the parking

brake after starting the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

6. Do not wait for the engine to warm up

while the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds.(Steep accelerating and

decelerating should be avoided.)

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,

if it is far away from you, the HEV sys-

tem may not start.

• When the HEV system start/stop but-

ton is in the ACC or ON position, if any

door is open, the system checks for the

smart key. If the smart key is not in the

vehicle, the warning, "Key not in vehi-

cle" will come on, and if all doors are

closed, the chime will also sound for

about 5 seconds.The indicator will turn

off while the vehicle is moving. Keep

the smart key in the vehicle when

using the ACC position or if the vehicle

HEV system is on.

WARNING

The HEV system will start only

when the smart key is in the vehi-

cle. Never allow children or any per-

son who is unfamiliar with the vehi-

cle to touch the HEV system

start/stop button or related parts.

CAUTION

If the "READY" indicator is turned

off while you are in motion, do not

attempt to move the shift lever to

the P(Park) position. If traffic and

road conditions permit, you may

keep the previous lever position

while the vehicle is still moving and

press the engine start/stop button

in an attempt to restart the hybrid

system without pressing the brake

pedal.

• If the hybrid system starts, the

"READY" symbol comes on. If the

"READY" symbol does not come

on, have the vehicle checked and

repaired by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Driving your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the battery is weak or the smart key

does not work correctly, you can start

the engine by inserting the smart key

into the smart key holder. To eject the

smart key from the smart key holder,

press the smart key inward past the

detent and then pull the key outward.

• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you

can't start the engine normally.

Replace the fuse with a new one. If you

are not able to replace the fuse, you

can start the engine by pressing the

engine start/stop button for 10 seconds

with the engine start/stop button in the

ACC mode. Always depress the brake

pedal before starting the engine.

Virtual Engine Sound System

(VESS)

The Virtual Engine Sound System gener-

ates engine sound for pedestrians to

hear vehicle sound because there is no

sound while motor power is used.

CAUTION

• Do not press the HEV system

start/stop button for more than 5

seconds except when the stop

lamp fuse is disconnected.

• When you eject the smart key

from the smart key holder, press

the smart key inward and pull it

out. If you pull out the smart key

forcibly without first pushing the

smart key, the smart key holder

may be damaged and will not

operate normally.

OYF059002N

Driving your vehicle

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward

speeds and one reverse speed.The indi-

vidual speeds are selected automatically,

depending on the position of the shift

lever.

To move the shift lever from the P (Park)

position, the brake pedal must be

depressed and the shift lock release but-

ton must be pressed.

✽✽

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle may

be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and the shifting sequence will

adjust after shifts are cycled a few times

by the TCM (Transaxle Control

Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control

Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

OYFH054006N

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button (1) when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted without depressing the shift lock release button (1).

The shift lock release button (1) must be depressed while moving the shift lever.

Driving your vehicle

105

For smooth operation, depress the brake

pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a

forward or reverse gear.

Transaxle ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster

displays the shift lever position when the

engine start/stop button is in the ON

position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into P (Park). This position locks

the transaxle and prevents the drive

wheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatic

transaxle

• Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a car into D (Drive) or R

(Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position; then

set the parking brake fully and

shut the HEV system off.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement can occur if these pre-

cautions are not followed in the

order identified.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate the

engine in R (Reverse) or any for-

ward gear position with the

brakes on.

• When stopped on an incline, do

not hold the vehicle stationary

with engine power. Use the serv-

ice brake or the parking brake.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-

cle is in motion will cause the drive

wheels to lock which will cause you

to lose control of the vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) position

in place of the parking brake.

Always make sure the shift lever

is latched in the P (Park) position

and set the parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattended in

a vehicle.

CAUTION

The transaxle may be damaged if

you shift into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion.

511

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not

engaged.The vehicle will roll freely even

on the slightest incline unless the parking

brake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi-

tion.The transaxle will automatically shift

through a 6-gear sequence, providing the

best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another

vehicle or climbing grades, depress the

accelerator, at which time the transaxle

will automatically downshift to a lower

gear.

✽✽

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into D (Drive).

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, sports mode is selected by push-

ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-

tion into the manual gate.To return to D

(Drive) range operation, push the shift

lever back into the D (Drive) position.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever

backwards and forwards will allow you to

make gearshifts rapidly.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to

shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once

to shift down one gear.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transaxle if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in

motion, except as explained in

“Rocking the vehicle” in this sec-

tion.

OYF059008N

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

Driving your vehicle

125

✽✽

NOTICE

• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with road

conditions.

• In sports mode, only the 6 forward

gears can be selected. To reverse or

park the vehicle, move the shift lever

to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position

as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are made

automatically when the vehicle slows

down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear

is automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone, the transaxle

will upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels of vehi-

cle performance and safety, the system

may not execute certain gearshifts

when the shift lever is operated.

• When accelerating from a stop on a

slippery road, push the shift lever for-

ward into the +(up) position. This

causes the transaxle to shift into the

2nd gear which is better for smooth

driving on a slippery road. Push the

shift lever to the -(down) side to shift

back to the 1st gear.

• When using sports mode, slow down

before shifting to a lower gear.

Otherwise, the lower gear may not be

engaged.

Shift lock system

For your safety, the automatic transaxle

has a shift lock system which prevents

shifting the transaxle from P (Park) into R

(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is

depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R

(Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or turn the engine

start/stop button to the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)

position with the brake pedal depressed,

continue depressing the brake, then do

the following:

1. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering

the shift-lock access hole.

2. Insert a screwdriver into the access hole

and press down on the screwdriver.

3. Move the shift lever.

4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer immedi-

ately.

WARNING

Always fully depress the brake

pedal before and while shifting out

of the P (Park) position into anoth-

er position to avoid inadvertent

motion of the vehicle which could

injure persons in or around the car.

OYFH053011

513

Driving your vehicle

Good driving practices

• Never move the gear shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into R

(Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This may be

extremely hazardous.Always leave the

car in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can

cause them to overheat and malfunc-

tion. Instead, when you are driving

down a long hill, shift into sports mode,

slown down and shift to a lower gear.

When you do this, engine braking will

help slow the car.

• Always use the parking brake when

parked. Do not depend on placing the

transaxle in P (Park) to keep the car

from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the accelera-

tor pedal.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

Driving your vehicle

145

Moving up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift

the shift lever to D (Drive). Depress the

accelerator gradually while releasing the

service brakes.

Power brakes

Your vehicle's brake system is power-

assisted by the electric hydraulic pump.

In the event the brakes lose power

because of a brake control system mal-

function, unstable power supply or some

other reason, you can still stop your vehi-

cle by applying greater force to the brake

pedal than you normally would.The stop-

ping distance, however will be longer.For

your safety, please have the system

checked as soon as possible.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward or backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will

create abnormal high brake tem-

peratures, excessive brake lining

and pad wear, and increased

stopping distances.

• When descending a long or steep

hill, move the shift lever to sports

mode, shift to a lower gear and

avoid continuous application of

the brakes. Continuous brake

application will cause the brakes

to overheat and could result in a

temporary loss of braking per-

formance.

(Continued)

515

Driving your vehicle

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the

vehicle is in motion, you can make an

emergency stop with the parking brake.

The stopping distance, however, will be

much greater than normal.

✽✽

NOTICE

1)When you apply the brake repeatedly,

you may hear the sound the electric

hydraulic pump or motor operating.

This is a normal condition.

2)The following types of pedal applica-

tions may result in the brake pedal

feeling different, however it is normal

condition.

- When you apply the pedal quickly

- When you apply the pedal continu-

ously and repeatedly

- While braking, when the ABS oper-

ated

(Continued)

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-

cle’s ability to safely slow down;

the vehicle may also pull to one

side when the brakes are applied.

Applying the brakes lightly will

indicate whether they have been

affected in this way. Always test

your brakes in this fashion after

driving through deep water. To

dry the brakes, apply them lightly

while maintaining a safe forward

speed until brake performance

returns to normal.

• Always confirm the position of

the brake and accelerator pedal

before driving. If you don't check

the position of the accelerator

and brake pedal before driving,

you may depress the accelerator

instead of the brake pedal. It may

cause a serious accident.

• Do not turn off the Hybrid system

while going down a hill.The brake

booster may not work sufficiently

and the braking distance may be

longer.

(Continued)

• If the brake pedal does not return

to its normal position when

released, there may be a malfunc-

tion in the brake system. Take

your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the

system checked.

• To avoid applying the brakes do

not get too close to the vehicle in

front of you and try to avoid

going down steep roads or sharp

corning if the power assisted

brakes are not functioning nor-

mally. The vehicle will stop but

the braking distance may be

longer.

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake while

the vehicle is moving at normal

speeds can cause a sudden loss of

control of the vehicle. If you must

use the parking brake to stop the

vehicle, use great caution in apply-

ing the brake.

CAUTION

If the driver’s door is not firmly

closed, the auxiliary battery may be

discharged because the brake con-

troller remains in standby opera-

tion. To prevent the battery from

being discharged, ensure the door

is fully closed.

Driving your vehicle

165

Disc brakes wear indicator

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

When your brake pads are worn and new

pads are required, you will hear a high-

pitched warning sound from your front

brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this

sound come and go or it may occur when-

ever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving condi-

tions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when you first apply (or lightly

apply) the brakes.This is normal and does

not indicate a problem with your brakes.

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply the

service brake and then depress the parking

brake pedal down as far as possible.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, depress

the parking brake pedal a second time

while applying the service brake. The

pedal will automatically extend to the fully

released position.

WARNING - Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound

means your vehicle needs service.

If you ignore this audible warning,

you will eventually lose braking

performance, which could lead to a

serious accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

• Always replace the front or rear

brake pads as pairs.

OYF059023

OYF059025

CAUTION

• Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive

brake pad and brake rotor wear.

• Applying the parking brake while

the vehicle is moving at normal

speeds can cause a sudden loss

of control of the vehicle. If you

must use the parking brake to stop

the vehicle, use great caution in

applying the brake.

517

Driving your vehicle

If the parking brake does not release or

does not release all the way, have the

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Check the brake warning light by pressing

the engine start/stop button ON (do not

start the engine). This light will be illumi-

nated when the parking brake is applied

with the engine start/stop button in the

START or ON position.

Also, the brake warning light may illumi-

nate for a second even though the park-

ing brake is released at the moment the

engine start/stop button is pressed to the

ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake

is fully released and the brake warning

light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after

the parking brake is released while the

hybrid system is in READY state, there

may be a malfunction in the brake sys-

tem. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle

immediately. If that is not possible, use

extreme caution while operating the vehi-

cle and only continue to drive the vehicle

until you can reach a safe location or

repair shop.

WARNING

• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leaving

the vehicle, do not use the

gearshift lever in place of the

parking brake. Set the parking

brake AND make sure the

gearshift lever is securely posi-

tioned in P (Park) for automatic

transaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-

miliar with the vehicle to touch

the parking brake. If the parking

brake is released unintentionally,

serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the vehicle

which can injure occupants or

pedestrians.

W-75

WARNING

• It is normal for the brake warning

light to illuminate temporarily

when the brake is depressed

repeatedly and go out after a few

seconds when the brake is no

longer depressed. However, if the

brake warning light turns on, this

may be a sign of a malfunctioning

brake system and could cause

the braking distance to increase.

• Have your system checked if the

brake warning light remains on. A

malfunctioning brake system

could result in a vehicle accident

and serious injury or death.

Driving your vehicle

185

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The ABS continuously senses the speed

of the wheels. If the wheels are going to

lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-

lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the

wheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit

from your ABS in an emergency situation,

do not attempt to modulate your brake

pressure and do not try to pump your

brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard

as possible or as hard as the situation

warrants and allow the ABS to control the

force being delivered to the brakes.

✽✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the anti-lock brake system

is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficient

stopping distance. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from exces-

sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake system

may result in a longer stopping dis-

tance than for vehicles equipped with a

conventional brake system.

WARNING

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-

dents due to improper or danger-

ous driving maneuvers. Even

though vehicle control is improved

during emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance between

you and objects ahead. Vehicle

speeds should always be reduced

during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars

equipped with an anti-lock braking

system (or Electronic Stability

Control system) may be longer than

for those without it in the following

road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle

should be driven at reduced

speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• With tire chains installed.

(Continued)

• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surface

height.

The safety features of an ABS (or

ESC) equipped vehicle should not

be tested by high speed driving or

cornering.This could endanger the

safety of yourself or others.

519

Driving your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the engine

may not run as smoothly and the ABS

warning light may turn on at the same

time. This happens because of the low

battery voltage. It does not mean your

ABS is malfunctioning.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

Electronic stability control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability control (ESC)

system is designed to stabilize the vehicle

during cornering maneuvers.ESC checks

where you are steering and where the

vehicle is actually going.ESC applies the

brakes at individual wheels and

intervenes in the engine management

system to stabilize the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem

with the ABS. In this case, howev-

er, your regular brakes will work

normally.

• The ABS warning light will stay on

for approximately 3 seconds after

the engine start/stop button is ON.

During that time, the ABS will go

through self-diagnosis and the

light will go off if everything is nor-

mal. If the light stays on, you may

have a problem with your ABS.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and operate your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light may illuminate. Pull your car

over to a safe place and stop the

engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with the ABS. Contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

OYF059015

Driving your vehicle

205

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

system is an electronic system designed

to help the driver maintain vehicle control

under adverse conditions. It is not a

substitute for safe driving practices.

Factors including speed, road conditions

and driver steering input can all affect

whether ESC will be effective in

preventing a loss of control. It is still your

responsibility to drive and corner at

reasonable speeds and to leave a

sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ESC is active.

✽✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the Electronic Stability

Control System is functioning properly.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turned

ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-

cator lights illuminate for

approximately 3 seconds,

then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF button

for at least half a second after

turning the ignition ON to turn

ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator

will illuminate). To turn the

ESC on, press the ESC OFF

button (ESC OFF indicator

light will go off).

• When starting the engine,

you may hear a slight ticking

sound. This is the ESC per-

forming an automatic system

self-check and does not indi-

cate a problem.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when cor-

nering. Electronic stability control

(ESC) will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers and hydroplaning on

wet surfaces can still result in seri-

ous accidents. Only a safe and

attentive driver can prevent acci-

dents by avoiding maneuvers that

cause the vehicle to lose traction.

Even with ESC installed, always fol-

low all the normal precautions for

driving - including driving at safe

speeds for the conditions.

521

Driving your vehicle

When operating

When the ESC is in operation,

ESC indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,

you can feel a slight pulsation

in the vehicle. This is only the

effect of brake control and indi-

cates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud

or driving on a slippery road,

pressing the accelerator

pedal may not cause the

engine rpm (revolutions per

minute) to increase.

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,

press the ESC OFF button

(ESC OFF indicator light illu-

minates).

• If the engine start/stop button

is pressed to OFF position

when ESC is off, ESC

remains off. Upon restarting

the engine, the ESC will auto-

matically turn on again.

Indicator light

When engine start/stop button is pressed

to ON, the indicator light illuminates, then

goes off if the ESC system is operating

normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever

ESC is operating or illuminates when

ESC fails to operate.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on

when the ESC is turned off with the button.

CAUTION

Driving with varying tire or wheel

sizes may cause the ESC system to

malfunction. When replacing tires,

make sure they are the same size as

your original tires.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Control sys-

tem is only a driving aid; use pre-

cautions for safe driving by slowing

down on curved, snowy, or icy

roads. Drive slowly and don’t

attempt to accelerate whenever the

ESC indicator light is blinking, or

when the road surface is slippery.

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

Driving your vehicle

225

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• ESC should be turned on for daily driv-

ing whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flat

road surface.

Never press the ESC OFF button while

ESC is operating (ESC indicator light

blinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-

ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽✽

NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is

turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

• Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or brake system operation.

Hill-start assist control (HAC)

(if equipped)

A vehicle has the tendency to slip back

on a steep hill when it starts to acceler-

ate after stopping. The Hill-start Assist

Control (HAC) helps prevent the vehicle

from slipping back by operating the

brakes automatically for about 2 sec-

onds.The brakes are released when the

accelerator pedal is depressed or after

about 2 seconds.

✽✽

NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when the

transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)

or N (Neutral) position.

• The HAC activates even though the

ESC is off but it does not activate

when the ESC has malfunctioned.

WARNING

Never press the ESC OFF button

while ESC is operating.

If the ESC is turned off while ESC is

operating, the vehicle may go out of

control.

To turn ESC off while driving, press

the ESC OFF button while driving

on a flat road surface.

CAUTION

The HAC is activated only for about

2 seconds, so to begin accelerating

after a stop on a steep incline always

depress the accelerator pedal.

523

Driving your vehicle

Good braking practices

• Check to be sure the parking brake is

not engaged and that the parking brake

indicator light is out before driving away.

• Driving through water may get the

brakes wet.They can also get wet when

the car is washed. Wet brakes can be

dangerous! Your car will not stop as

quickly if the brakes are wet.Wet brakes

may cause the car to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes light-

ly until the braking action returns to nor-

mal, taking care to keep the car under

control at all times. If the braking action

does not return to normal, stop as soon

as it is safe to do so and call an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

• Don't coast down hills with the car out of

gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep

the car in gear at all times, use the

brakes to slow down, then shift to a

lower gear so that engine braking will

help you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting

your foot on the brake pedal while driv-

ing can be dangerous because it can

result in the brakes overheating and los-

ing their effectiveness. It also increases

the wear of the brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,

apply the brakes gently and keep the car

pointed straight ahead while you slow

down. When you are moving slowly

enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off

the road and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic transaxle, don't let your vehicle

creep forward. To avoid creeping for-

ward, keep your foot firmly on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

• Use caution when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and

place the shift lever in P position. If your

vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front

wheels into the curb to help keep the

vehicle from rolling.If your vehicle is fac-

ing uphill, turn the front wheels away

from the curb to help keep the vehicle

from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is

required by other conditions to keep the

vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged posi-

tion. This is most likely to happen when

there is an accumulation of snow or ice

around or near the rear brakes or if the

brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the

parking brake may freeze, apply it only

temporarily while you put the gear

selector lever in P position and block

the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot

roll.Then release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on an hill with

the accelerator pedal. This can cause

the transaxle to overheat. Always use

the brake pedal or parking brake.

WARNING

• Whenever you leave or park your

vehicle, always firmly set the

parking brake as far as possible

and fully engage the vehicle's

transaxle into the P (Park) posi-

tion. If the parking brake is not

fully engaged, the vehicle may

move inadvertently and injure

yourself and others.

• Always have the parking brake

fully engaged when parking to

avoid inadvertent movement of

the vehicle which can injure

occupants or pedestrians.

CAUTION

Do not depress the brake pedal con-

tinuously without READY status.The

battery may be discharged.

Driving your vehicle

245

➀ CRUISE indicator

➁ SET indicator

The cruise control system allows you to

program the vehicle to maintain a con-

stant speed without resting your foot on

the accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function

above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

✽✽

NOTICE

During normal cruise control operation,

when the SET switch is activated or

reactivated after applying the brakes,

the cruise control will energize after

approximately 3 seconds. This delay is

normal.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster illuminated)

the cruise control can be activat-

ed unintentionally. Keep the

cruise control system off

(CRUISE indicator light OFF)

when the cruise control is not in

use, to avoid inadvertently set-

ting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system

only when traveling on open

highways in good weather.

• Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to keep

the car at a constant speed, for

instance, driving in heavy or

varying traffic, or on slippery

(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or

winding roads or over 6% up-hill

or down-hill roads.

• Pay particular attention to the

driving conditions whenever

using the cruise control system.

• Be careful when driving downhill

using the cruise control system,

which may increase the vehicle

speed.

OYF059030N

525

Driving your vehicle

To set cruise control speed:

1. Push the cruise ON-OFF button on the

steering wheel to turn the system on.

The CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which

must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the SET- switch, and release it at

the desired speed. The SET indicator

light in the instrument cluster will illumi-

nate. Release the accelerator at the

same time.The desired speed will auto-

matically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow

down or speed up slightly while going

uphill or downhill.

To increase cruise control set

speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the RES+ switch and hold it.Your

vehicle will accelerate. Release the

switch at the speed you want.

• Push the RES+ switch and release it

immediately. The cruising speed will

increase 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

the RES+ switch is operated in this

manner.

OYF059033N OYF059032NOYF059031N

Driving your vehicle

265

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the SET- switch and hold it.Your

vehicle will gradually slow down.

Release the switch at the speed you

want to maintain.

• Push the SET- switch and release it

immediately. The cruising speed will

decrease 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each

time the SET- switch is operated in this

manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the

cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when

the cruise control is on, depress the

accelerator pedal. Increased speed will

not interfere with cruise control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot

off the accelerator.

To cancel cruise control, do one

of the following:

• Press the brake pedal.

• Shift the shift lever into N (Neutral) with

an automatic transaxle

• Press the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel.

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 9 mph (15

km/h).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

OYF059034NOYF059033N

527

Driving your vehicle

Each of these actions will cancel cruise

control operation (the SET indicator light

in the instrument cluster will go off), but it

will not turn the system off. If you wish to

resume cruise control operation, push

the RES+ switch located on your steering

wheel. You will return to your previously

preset speed.

To resume cruising speed at

more than approximately 25 mph

(40 km/h):

If any method other than the cruise

ON/OFF switch was used to cancel cruis-

ing speed and the system is still activat-

ed, the most recent set speed will auto-

matically resume when the RES+ switch

is pushed.

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle

speed has dropped below approximately

25 mph (40 km/h).

✽✽

NOTICE

Always check the road conditions when

pressing the RES+ switch to resume the

speed.

To turn cruise control off, do one

of the following:

• Push the cruise ON/OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions cancel cruise con-

trol operation. If you want to resume

cruise control operation, repeat the steps

provided in “To set cruise control speed”

on the previous page.

OYF059032N

OYF059031N

Driving your vehicle

285

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends

mainly on your style of driving, where you

drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many

miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-

lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle

as economically as possible, use the fol-

lowing driving suggestions to help save

money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly.Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate.Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts

or full-throttle shifts and maintain a

steady cruising speed. Don't race

between stoplights. Try to adjust your

speed to that of the other traffic so you

don't have to change speeds unneces-

sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever

possible. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from other vehicles so you can

avoid unnecessary braking. This also

reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster

you drive, the more fuel your car uses.

Driving at a moderate speed, especial-

ly on the highway, is one of the most

effective ways to reduce fuel consump-

tion.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can

increase fuel consumption and also

increase wear on these components.

In addition, driving with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal may cause the

brakes to overheat, which reduces

their effectiveness and may lead to

more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep them

inflated to the recommended pressure.

Incorrect inflation, either too much or

too little, results in unnecessary tire

wear. Check the tire pressures at least

once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned

correctly. Improper alignment can

result from hitting curbs or driving too

fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-

ment causes faster tire wear and may

also result in other problems as well as

greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your car in good condition. For

better fuel economy and reduced

maintenance costs, maintain your car

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in section 7. If you drive your

car in severe conditions, more frequent

maintenance is required (see section 7

for details).

• Keep your car clean. For maximum

service, your vehicle should be kept

clean and free of corrosive materials.It

is especially important that mud, dirt,

ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate

on the underside of the car. This extra

weight can result in increased fuel con-

sumption and also contribute to corro-

sion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary

weight in your car.Weight reduces fuel

economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and not

in traffic), turn off your engine and

restart only when you're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

529

Driving your vehicle

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system requires

power so your fuel economy is reduced

when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can

reduce fuel economy. (the air condi-

tioning usually requires less power

than the air drag from open windows.)

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds

and headwinds.To help offset some of

this loss, slow down when driving in

these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-

dition is important both for economy and

safety. Therefore, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled

inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - HEV system

off during motion

Never turn the HEV system off to

coast down hills or anytime the

vehicle is in motion. The power

steering and power brakes will not

function properly without the HEV

system running. Instead, keep the

HEV system on and downshift to an

appropriate gear for engine braking

effect. In addition, turning off the

ignition while driving could engage

the steering wheel lock resulting in

loss of vehicle steering which

could cause serious injury or

death.

Driving your vehicle

305

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are

encountered such as water, snow, ice,

mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow

these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden changes in braking or

steering.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use

second gear. Accelerate slowly to

avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or

other non-slip material under the drive

wheels to provide traction when stalled

in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to

free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn

the steering wheel right and left to clear

the area around your front wheels. Then,

shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and any forward gear. Do not race the

engine, and spin the wheels as little as

possible. If you are still stuck after a few

tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow

vehicle to avoid engine overheating and

possible damage to the transaxle.

✽✽

NOTICE

The ESC system should be turned OFF

prior to rocking the vehicle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a

vehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatic

transaxle, while driving on slippery

surfaces can cause an accident.

The sudden change in tire speed

could cause the tires to skid. Be

careful when downshifting on slip-

pery surfaces.

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause

engine over-heating, transaxle dam-

age or failure, and tire damage.

WARNING - Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especially

at speeds more than 35 mph (56

km/h). Spinning the wheels at high

speeds when the vehicle is station-

ary could cause a tire to overheat

which could result in tire damage

that may injure bystanders.

531

Driving your vehicle

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-

ners, especially when roads are wet.

Ideally, corners should always be taken

under gentle acceleration. If you follow

these suggestions, tire wear will be held

to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more

hazards than driving in the daylight, here

are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as it

may be more difficult to see at night,

especially in areas where there may

not be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare

from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-

erly aimed on vehicles not equipped

with the automatic headlight aiming

feature. Dirty or improperly aimed

headlights will make it much more diffi-

cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights

of oncoming vehicles. You could be

temporarily blinded, and it will take

several seconds for your eyes to re-

adjust to the darkness.

OBH058035L

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward or backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

Driving your vehicle

325

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dan-

gerous, especially if you’re not prepared

for the slick pavement. Here are a few

things to consider when driving in the rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distance need-

ed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-

ment in good shape. Replace your

windshield wiper blades when they

show signs of streaking or missing

areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,

making a quick stop on wet pavement

can cause a skid and possibly lead to

an accident. Be sure your tires are in

good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-

ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles

can affect your brakes. If you must go

through puddles, try to drive through

them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten

your brakes wet, apply them lightly

while driving until normal braking oper-

ation returns.

• Keep the interior surface of the wind-

shield clean by wiping it with a clean

cloth and glass cleaner. This will help

reduce the tendency of the glass fog-

ging and also improve visibility.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no high-

er than the bottom of the wheel hub.

Drive through any water slowly. Allow

adequate stopping distance because

brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them several

times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your

vehicle may be damaged by rocks or

roots of trees. Become familiar with the

off-road conditions where you are going

to drive before you begin driving.

533

Driving your vehicle

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to

specification. Low tire inflation pressures

will result in overheating and possible

failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which

may result in reduced traction or tire fail-

ure.

✽✽

NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation

pressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel

than urban motoring. Do not forget to

check both engine coolant and engine

oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result

in overheating of the engine.

WARNING

• Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,

loss of vehicle control, and sud-

den tire failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

Always check tires for proper

inflation before driving. For prop-

er tire pressures, refer to “Tires

and wheels” in section 8.

• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-

cient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tires can result in loss of

vehicle control, collisions, injury,

and even death. Worn-out tires

should be replaced as soon as

possible and should never be

used for driving. Always check

the tire tread before driving your

car. For further information and

tread limits, refer to “Tires and

wheels” in section 7.

Driving your vehicle

345

More severe weather conditions of winter

result in greater wear and other prob-

lems.To minimize winter driving problem,

you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may

be necessary to use snow tires or to

install tire chains on your tires. If snow

tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and type of the

original equipment tires. Failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and han-

dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-

cations, and sharp turns are potentially

very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking

to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-

cations on snowy or icy roads may cause

skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-

cient distance between the vehicle in

operation in front and your vehicle. Also,

apply the brake gently. It should be noted

that installing tire chains on the tire will

provide a greater driving force, but will

not prevent side skids.

✽✽

NOTICE

Tire chains are not legal in all states.

Check state laws before fitting tire

chains.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,

make sure they are radial tires of the

same size and load range as the original

tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels

to balance your vehicle’s handling in all

weather conditions.Keep in mind that the

traction provided by snow tires on dry

roads may not be as high as your vehi-

cle's original equipment tires.You should

drive cautiously even when the roads are

clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-

imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first

checking local, state and municipal regu-

lations for possible restrictions against

their use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire size

Snow tires should be equivalent in

size and type to the vehicle's stan-

dard tires. Otherwise, the safety

and handling of your vehicle may

be adversely affected.

535

Driving your vehicle

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are

thinner, they can be damaged by mount-

ing some types of snow chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-

ommended instead of snow chains. Do

not mount tire chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminum wheels; snow

chains may cause damage to the wheels.

If snow chains must be used, use wire-

type chains with a thickness of less than

0.47 in (12 mm). Damage to your vehicle

caused by improper snow chain use is

not covered by your vehicle manufactur-

er’s warranty.

When using tire chains, install them on

the front tires only.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manu-

facturer's instructions and mount them as

tightly as you can. Drive slowly with

chains installed. If you hear the chains

contacting the body or chassis, stop and

re-tighten them.If they still make contact,

slow down until it stops. Remove the

chains as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

CAUTION

• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type for your

tires. Incorrect snow chains can

cause damage to the vehicle body

and suspension and may not be

covered by your vehicle manufac-

turer warranty. Also, the snow

chain connecting hooks may be

damaged from contacting vehicle

components causing the snow

chains to come loose from the

tire. Make sure the snow chains

are SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installation

for proper mounting after driving

approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5

to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.

Retighten or remount the chains

if they are loose.

WARNING

- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning flashers and place

a triangular emergency warning

device behind the vehicle if avail-

able. Always place the vehicle in P

(Park), apply the parking brake and

turn off the engine before installing

snow chains.

1JBA4068

Driving your vehicle

365

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality

ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling

system. It is the only type of coolant that

should be used because it helps prevent

corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-

cates the water pump and prevents

freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish

your coolant in accordance with the

maintenance schedule in section 7.

Before winter, have your coolant tested to

assure that its freezing point is sufficient

for the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

battery system. Visually inspect the bat-

tery and cables as described in section

7.The level of charge in your battery can

be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended that

a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be

used during cold weather. See section 8

for recommendations. If you aren't sure

what weight oil you should use, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in

section 7 and replace them if necessary.

Also check all ignition wiring and compo-

nents to be sure they are not cracked,

worn or damaged in any way.

WARNING - Tire chains

• The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling.

• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-

ommended speed limit, whichev-

er is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,

holes, sharp turns, and other

road hazards, which may cause

the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-

wheel braking.

CAUTION

• Chains that are the wrong size or

improperly installed can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten the

chains any time you hear them

hitting the vehicle.

537

Driving your vehicle

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into

the key opening. If a lock is covered with

ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing

fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is

frozen internally, you may be able to thaw

it out by using a heated key. Handle the

heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer

system from freezing, add an approved

window washer anti-freeze solution in

accordance with instructions on the con-

tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is

available from an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do

not use engine coolant or other types of

anti-freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged position.

This is most likely to happen when there

is an accumulation of snow or ice around

or near the rear brakes or if the brakes

are wet. If there is a risk the parking

brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-

ily while you put the shift lever in P (auto-

matic transaxle) or in first and block the

rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.

Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

can build up under the fenders and inter-

fere with the steering. When driving in

severe winter conditions where this may

happen, you should periodically check

underneath the car to be sure the move-

ment of the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weath-

er where you drive your car, you should

carry appropriate emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry

include tire chains, tow straps or chains,

flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a

shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,

gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,

etc.

Don't place foreign objects or

materials in the engine compart-

ment

Placement of foreign objects or

materials which prevent cooling of

the engine, in the engine compart-

ment, may cause a failure or com-

bustion. The manufacturer is not

responsible for the damage caused

by such placement.

Driving your vehicle

385

Tire and loading information label

The label located on the driver's door

sill gives the original tire size, cold

tire pressures recommended for your

vehicle, the number of people that

can be in your vehicle and vehicle

capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:

904 lbs. (410 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OYFH051100N/OYFH051101N/OYFH051102N/OYFH051103N

539

Driving your vehicle

Seating capacity:

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum

number of occupants including a

driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight of

all of the occupants, and the weight

of the cargo being carried.

Do not overload the vehicle as there

is a limit to the total weight, or load

limit including occupants and cargo,

the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle

will increase or decrease depending

on the weight and the number of

occupants.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit -

1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4.The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity.For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 1400

lbs. and there will be five 150 lb

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle.Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your

vehicle.

✽✽

NOTICE

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

Driving your vehicle

405

C190F03JM

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight (635 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight

860 lbs

172 lbs (78 kg) × 5

(390 kg)

Available Cargo and

540 lbs

Luggage weight (245 kg)

ABC

Example 3

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight

and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's

capacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight (635 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight

300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

(136 kg)

Available Cargo and

1100 lbs

Luggage weight (499 kg)

Example 1

ABC

C190F02JM

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight (635 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight

750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5

(340 kg)

Available Cargo and

650 lbs

Luggage weight (295 kg)

ABC

Example 2

541

Driving your vehicle

Certification label

The certification label is located on

the driver's door sill at the center pil-

lar.

This label shows the maximum

allowable weight of the fully loaded

vehicle. This is called the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The

GVWR includes the weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, fuel and

cargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-

mum weight that can be supported

by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go

to a weigh station and weigh your

vehicle.Your dealer can help you with

this. Be sure to spread out your load

equally on both sides of the center-

line.

The label will help you decide how

much cargo and installed equipment

your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle

- like suitcases, tools, packages, or

anything else - they are moving as

fast as the vehicle.If you have to stop

or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,

the items will keep going and can

cause an injury if they strike the driv-

er or a passenger.

OBH059070

WARNING - Over loading

• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for

either the front or rear axle

and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can

cause an accident or vehicle

damage.You can calculate the

weight of your load by weigh-

ing the items (or people)

before putting them in the

vehicle.Be careful not to over-

load your vehicle.

(Continued)

• Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either

the maximum front or rear

GAWR and vehicle capacity

weight. If you do, parts,

including tires on your vehicle

can break, and it can change

the way your vehicle handles

and braking ability.This could

cause you to lose control and

crash. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehi-

cle.

Driving your vehicle

425

WARNING

• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your

vehicle's tires and possible

tire failure that could lead to a

crash.

• Overloading your vehicle can

cause increased stopping dis-

tances that could lead to a

crash.

• A crash resulting from poor

handling, vehicle damage, tire

failure, or increased stopping

distances could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargo

Items you carry inside your

vehicle can strike and injure

occupants in a sudden stop or

turn, or in a crash.

• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle.Try to spread the

weight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-

cases, inside the vehicle

above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured

child restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something

inside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat folded

down unless necessary.

CAUTION

• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would

not be covered by your warran-

ty.Do not overload your vehicle.

• Using heavier suspension com-

ponents to get added durability

might not change your weight

ratings. Ask your dealer to help

you load your vehicle the right

way.

543

Driving your vehicle

This section will guide you in the proper

loading of your vehicle, to keep your

loaded vehicle weight within its design

rating capability. Properly loading your

vehicle will provide maximum return of

the vehicle design performance. Before

loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself

with the following terms for determining

your vehicle's weight ratings, from the

vehicle's specifications and the certifica-

tion label:

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including

a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-

ment. It does not include passengers,

cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your dealer

plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to

the Base Curb Weight, including cargo

and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each

axle (front and rear) - including vehicle

curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle (front

or rear). These numbers are shown on

the certification label.

The total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual

Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of

the fully loaded vehicle (including all

options, equipment, passengers and

cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-

tification label located on the driver’s

door sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

Driving your vehicle

445

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

TRAILER TOWING

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2

If the engine will not start / 6-5

Emergency starting / 6-6

If the engine overheats / 6-8

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-9

If you have a flat tire / 6-14

If you have a flat tire (with TireMobilityKit) / 6-22

Towing / 6-28

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a

warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency

repairs are being made or when the vehi-

cle is stopped near the edge of a road-

way.

Depress the flasher switch with the

engine start/stop button in any position.

The flasher switch is located in the cen-

ter console switch panel. All turn signal

lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates

whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the

hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using the

hazard warning flasher while the vehi-

cle is being towed.

If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad

or crossing

If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-

cle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

and let the car slow down while driving

straight ahead.Do not apply the brakes

immediately or attempt to pull off the

road as this may cause a loss of con-

trol. When the car has slowed to such

a speed that it is safe to do so, brake

carefully and pull off the road. Drive off

the road as far as possible and park on

firm, level ground.If you are on a divid-

ed highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

WHILE DRIVING

OYF043084L

OYF049084N

■ Type A

■ Type B

What to do in an emergency

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on

your emergency hazard flashers, set

the parking brake and put the transaxle

in P (automatic transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of the car.

Be sure they all get out on the side of

the car that is away from traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow the

instruction provided later in this sec-

tion.

If vehicle stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2.Turn on your emergency flashers.

3.Try to get vehicle moving in drive

again. If your vehicle will not move,

contact an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er or seek other qualified assistance.

If An Accident Occurs

WARNING

• After parking the vehicle,shift the

transmission into "P" position.

Turn off the hybrid system by

pushing the Engine Start/Stop

button.

• For your safety, do not touch high

voltage cables, connectors and

package modules. High Voltage

components are orange in color.

• Exposed cables or wires may be

visible inside or outside of the

vehicle. Never touch the wires or

cables, because an electrical

shock may occur causing injury

or death.

• If a fire occurs,

to extinguish a small high-voltage

battery fire, the following tech-

niques can be used:

- Dry chemical

- CO2

- Large amounts of water

- Regular foam

(Continued)

For a large high-voltage battery

fire, use these types of extinguish-

ing methods:

- Large amounts of water

- Fog

- Regular foam

• If you need towing,refer to chapter

What to do in an emergency

WARNING

If a vehicle accident occurs:

1.Stop the vehicle and shift the

transmission into "P" position.

And then depress the parking

brake.

2.Turn off the Hybrid system by

pushing the Engine Start/Stop

button.

3.Evacuate to the safety place.

4.Call emergency services for help

and let them know the vehicle is a

Hybrid vehicle.

Do not touch high voltage cables,

connectors and package modules.

High voltage components are

orange in color.

Exposed cables or wires may be

visible inside or outside of the vehi-

cle. Never touch the wires or

cables, because an electrical shock

may occur causing injury or death.

WARNING

If a fire occurs:

1.Stop the vehicle and shift the

transmission in to "P" position,

and then depress the parking

brake. To ventilate smoke from a

fire, open the windows if possible.

2.Turn off the Hybrid system by

pushing the Engine Start/Stop

button.

3.Leave the vehicle and evacuate to

a safety place.

4.Call emergency services for help

and let them know the vehicle is a

Hybrid vehicle.

If you have an extinguisher, extin-

guish a fire carefully.

Do not touch high voltage cables,

connectors and package modules.

High voltage components are

orange in color.

Exposed cables or wires may be

visible inside or outside of the vehi-

cle. Never touch the wires or

cables, because an electrical shock

may occur causing injury or death.

WARNING

If a submersion in water occurs:

If your vehicle was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on the

flooring, you should not try to start

the Hybrid system. Turn off the

hybrid system and leave the vehicle

with possession of the key. Never

touch the high voltage cables, con-

nectors and package modules,

because an electrical shock may

occur causing injury or death. High

Voltage cables are orange in color.

Have the car towed to an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

What to do in an emergency

1.If your vehicle has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-

gency brake is set.

2. Check the 12 volt battery connections

to be sure they are clean and tight.

3.Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate the

starter, the battery is discharged.

4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start

it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

If engine turns over normally but

does not start

1. Check fuel level.

2.With the engine start/stop button in

the LOCK position, check all connec-

tors at ignition coils and spark plugs.

Reconnect any that may be discon-

nected or loose.

3. If the engine still does not start, call an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek

other qualified assistance.

IF THE VEHICLE WILL NOT START

WARNING

If the vehicle will not start, do not

push or pull the vehicle to start it.

This could result in a collision or

cause other damage. In addition,

push or pull starting may cause the

catalytic converter to be over-

loaded and create a fire hazard.

What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and

disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done

incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to

yourself or damage to your vehicle or

battery, follow the jump starting proce-

dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-

mend that you have a competent techni-

cian or towing service jump start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system.

You can damage a 12-volt starting

motor, ignition system, and other

electrical parts beyond repair by

use of a 24-volt power supply (either

two 12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which may

explode if exposed to flame or

sparks.

If these instructions are not fol-

lowed exactly, serious personal

injury and damage to the vehicle

may occur! If you are not sure

how to follow this procedure,

seek qualified assistance.

Automobile batteries contain sul-

furic acid. This is poisonous and

highly corrosive. When jump

starting, wear protective glasses

and be careful not to get acid on

yourself, your clothing or on the

car.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged battery

is frozen or if the electrolyte level

is low; the battery may rupture or

explode.

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the elec-

trolyte level of the battery as this

may cause the battery to rupture or

explode causing serious injury.

OYFH061001N

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure

1. Open the cover of battery in trunk room.

2. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal is

grounded.

3. If the booster battery is in another vehi-

cle, do not allow the vehicles to touch.

4. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.

5. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the illustration.

First connect one end of a jumper

cable to the positive terminal of the

discharged battery (1), then connect

the other end to the positive terminal

on the booster battery (2). Proceed to

connect one end of the other jumper

cable to the negative terminal of the

booster battery (3), then the other end

to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for

example, the trunk latch) away from

the battery (4). Do not connect it to or

near any part that moves when the

engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-

tact anything except the correct battery

terminals or the correct ground. Do not

lean over the battery when making

connections.

6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and let it run at 2,000

rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-

cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent, you should have your vehi-

cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Push-starting

Vehicles equipped with automatic

transaxles cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for

jump-starting.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable

from the negative terminal of the

booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.

This can cause the discharged bat-

tery to overheat and crack, releas-

ing battery acid.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it

because the sudden surge forward

when the engine starts could cause

a collision with the tow vehicle,

resulting in serious injury or death.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates over-

heating, you experience a loss of power,

or hear loud pinging or knocking, the

engine is probably too hot. If this hap-

pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic

transaxle) and set the parking brake. If

the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under

the car or steam is coming out from

the hood, stop the engine.Do not open

the hood until the coolant has stopped

running or the steaming has stopped.

If there is no visible loss of engine

coolant and no steam, leave the

engine running and check to be sure

the engine cooling fan is operating. If

the fan is not running, turn the engine

off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive

belt is missing. If it is not missing,

check to see that it is tight. If the drive

belt seems to be satisfactory, check for

coolant leaking from the radiator,

hoses or under the car. (If the air con-

ditioning had been in use, it is normal

for cold water to be draining from it

when you stop.)

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken

or engine coolant is leaking out, stop

the engine immediately and call the

nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer

for assistance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine tem-

perature has returned to normal.Then,

if coolant has been lost, carefully add

coolant to the reservoir to bring the

fluid level in the reservoir up to the

halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for

further signs of overheating. If over-

heating happens again, call an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

WARNING

While the engine is running, keep

hair, hands and clothing away from

moving parts such as the fan and

drive belts to prevent injury.

CAUTION

Serious loss of coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling system

and this should be checked as soon

as possible by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. This may

result in coolant being blown out of

the opening and cause serious

burns.

What to do in an emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) Low tire pressure telltale /

TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When

the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximate-

ly one minute and then remain con-

tinuously illuminated. This sequence

will continue upon subsequent vehi-

cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended.TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation

of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function proper-

ly.

OYF069015

What to do in an emergency

106

✽✽

NOTICE

If the TPMS indicator does not illu-

minate for 3 seconds when the

engine start/stop button is pressed to

the ON position or engine is run-

ning, or if it comes on after blinking

for approximately one minute, take

your car to your nearest authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

Low tire pressure tell-

tale

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning indicator is illuminat-

ed, one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately

reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-

nering and anticipate increased stop-

ping distances. You should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible.

Inflate the tires to the proper pres-

sure as indicated on the vehicle’s

placard or tire inflation pressure label

located on the driver’s side center pil-

lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a

service station, use the inflator in the

Tire Mobility Kit located in the trunk.

If the tire cannot hold the newly

added air, or will not hold air after the

sealant is added, repair the tire.

The Low Tire Pressure telltale may

flash for approximately one minute

and then remain continuously illumi-

nated after restarting and about 20

minutes of continuous driving before

you have the low pressure tire

repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

low tire pressure telltale may be

illuminated if the tire pressure

was adjusted to the recom-

mended tire inflation pressure

in warm weather. It does not

mean your TPMS is malfunction-

ing because the decreased tem-

perature leads to a proportional

lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle

from a warm area to a cold area

or from a cold area to a warm

area, or the outside temperature

is greatly higher or lower, you

should check the tire inflation

pressure and adjust the tires to

the recommended tire inflation

pressure.

611

What to do in an emergency

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System. If the system is

able to correctly detect an under infla-

tion warning at the same time as sys-

tem failure then it will illuminate the

TPMS malfunction indicator.

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible to determine the cause

of the problem.

WARNING - Low pressure

damage

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking

distances.

Continued driving on low pres-

sure tires can cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may be illuminated if the

vehicle is moving around elec-

tric power supply cables or

radio transmitters such as at

police stations, government

and public offices, broadcast-

ing stations, military installa-

tions, airports, or transmitting

towers, etc. This can interfere

with normal operation of the

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may illuminate if snow

chains or some separately

purchased devices such as

notebook computers, mobile

chargers, remote starters,

GPS navigation etc. are used

in the vehicle. This can inter-

fere with normal operation of

the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

What to do in an emergency

126

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure telltale will come on.

A spare tire may be used if one is

available.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem.You must

use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-

ommended that you always have

your tires serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressure

tire with a compact spare tire, the

Low Tire Pressure Telltale will blink or

remain on until the low pressure tire

is repaired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the flat tire with a

compact spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale may blink or illumi-

nate because the compact spare tire

does not have a TPMS sensor.

Once the flat tire is replace, inflated

to the recommended pressure and

installed on the vehicle, the TPMS

malfunction indicator and the low tire

pressure telltale will extinguish within

a few minutes of driving.

If the indicator is not extinguished

after a few minutes of driving, please

visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

If original mounted tire is

replaced with a new wheel and

tire, the TPMS sensor on the

replacement wheel should be ini-

tiated and the TPMS sensor on

the original mounted wheel

should be deactivated. If the

TPMS sensor on the original

mounted is kept in the vehicle

while active, the tire pressure

monitoring system may not oper-

ate properly. Have the tire with

TPMS serviced or replaced by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Never use a puncture-repairing

sealant not approved by

HYUNDAI to repair and/or inflate

a flat tire. A tire sealant not

approved by HYUNDAI may

damage the tire pressure sen-

sor.The sealant on the tire pres-

sure sensor and wheel should

be cleaned when you replace the

tire with a new one.

WARNING

If you do not use the authorized

tires or wheels, the TPMS may

malfunction.

613

What to do in an emergency

You may not be able to identify a low

tire by simply looking at it. Always

use a good quality tire pressure

gauge to measure the tire's inflation

pressure. Please note that a tire that

is hot (from being driven) will have a

higher pressure measurement than a

tire that is cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3

hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2.This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

CAUTION

Do not use any tire sealant

except the Tire Mobility Kit

approved by HYUNDAI if your

vehicle is equipped with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System.

The liquid sealant can damage

the tire pressure sensors.

WARNING - Protecting

TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may interfere with the

system's ability to warn the driv-

er of low tire pressure condi-

tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may void the warranty

for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-

age caused by external fac-

tors such as nails or road

debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-

ity, immediately take your foot

off the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually and with

light force, and slowly move to

a safe position off the road.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

What to do in an emergency

146

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug

nut wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment. Pull up the luggage

box cover to reach this equipment.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”

while the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tires

• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public

road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-

pletely off the road and onto

the shoulder before trying to

change a tire.The jack should

be used on level firm ground.

If you cannot find a firm, level

place off the road, call a tow-

ing service company for

assistance.

• Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi-

tions on the vehicle; never

use the bumpers or any other

part of the vehicle for jack

support.

• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing serious

injury or death. No person

should place any portion of

their body under a vehicle that

is supported only by a jack;

use vehicle support stands.

(Continued)

OYF069006N

615

What to do in an emergency

Removing and storing the spare

tire

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt

counterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order of

removal.

To prevent the spare tire and tools

from “rattling” while the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park)

with automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

OYF069005N

(Continued)

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

• Make sure any children pres-

ent are in a secure place away

from the road and from the

vehicle to be raised with the

jack.

OYFH064025

What to do in an emergency

166

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel that is diagonally opposite

the jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any nut until the tire

has been raised off the ground.

OYFH064026

WARNING -

Changing a tire

• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, always

set the parking brake fully,

and always block the wheel

diagonally opposite the wheel

being changed.

• We recommend that the

wheels of the vehicle be

blocked, and that no person

remain in a vehicle that is

being jacked.

ONF068002

617

What to do in an emergency

7. Place the jack at the front or rear

jacking position closest to the tire

you are changing. Place the jack

at the designated locations under

the frame.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire just clears the

ground. This measurement is

approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).

Before removing the wheel lug

nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-

ble and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

WARNING - Jack location

To reduce the possibility of

injury, be sure to use only the

jack provided with the vehicle

and in the correct jack position;

never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

OYFH064019N OBH068012

CAUTION

Place the jack so it does not

damage the plastic guard. If you

place the jack at the plastic guard

and jack up the vehicle, the plas-

tic guard may be damaged

What to do in an emergency

186

9.Loosen the wheel nuts and

remove them with your fingers.

Slide the wheel off the studs and

lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To

put the wheel on the hub, pick up

the spare tire, line up the holes

with the studs and slide the wheel

onto them. If this is difficult, tip the

wheel slightly and get the top hole

in the wheel lined up with the top

stud. Then jiggle the wheel back

and forth until the wheel can be

slid over the other studs.

10.To reinstall the wheel, hold it on

the studs, put the wheel nuts on

the studs and tighten them finger

tight.The nuts should be installed

with their tapered small diameter

ends directed inward. Jiggle the

tire to be sure it is completely

seated, then tighten the nuts as

much as possible with your fin-

gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground by

turning the wheel nut wrench

counterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheel

nuts. Be sure the socket is seated

completely over the nut.Do not stand

on the wrench handle or use an

extension pipe over the wrench han-

dle. Go around the wheel tightening

every other nut until they are all tight.

Then double-check each nut for

tightness. After changing wheels,

have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

tighten the wheel nuts to their proper

torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:

65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)

WARNING

Wheels may have sharp edges.

Handle them carefully to avoid

possible severe injury. Before

putting the wheel into place, be

sure that there is nothing on the

hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,

gravel, etc.) that prevents the

wheel from fitting solidly

against the hub.

(Continued)

If there is, remove it. If there is

not good contact on the mount-

ing surface between the wheel

and hub, the wheel nuts could

come loose and cause the loss

of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may

result in loss of control of the

vehicle.This may cause serious

injury or death.

OUN046019

619

What to do in an emergency

If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust

it until it is correct. Always reinstall

the valve cap after checking or

adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is

not replaced, air may leak from the

tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy

another and install it as soon as pos-

sible.

After you have changed wheels,

always secure the flat tire in its place

and return the jack and tools to their

proper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,

wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire

from rattling while the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the wheel studs and nuts.

Make certain during wheel

removal that the same nuts that

were removed are reinstalled -

or, if replaced, that nuts with

metric threads and the same

chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric

thread nut on a metric stud or

vice-versa will not secure the

wheel to the hub properly and

will damage the stud so that it

must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not

have metric threads. Be sure to

use extreme care in checking

for thread style before installing

aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.

If in doubt, consult an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they

may lose their ability to retain

the wheel.This could lead to the

loss of the wheel and a collision

resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate

spare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures as

soon as possible after installing

the spare tire. Adjust it to the

specified pressure, if necessary.

Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-

tion 8.

What to do in an emergency

206

Compact spare tire (if equipped)

Important - compact spare tire

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare tire, it takes up less

space than a regular-size tire. This

tire is smaller than a conventional tire

and is designed for temporary use

only.

The compact spare should be inflat-

ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽✽

NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after

installing the spare tire. Adjust it to

the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,

observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a

higher speed could damage the

tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly

enough for the road conditions to

avoid all hazards.Any road hazard,

such as a pothole or debris, could

seriously damage the compact

spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tire

could result in tire failure, loss of

vehicle control, and possible per-

sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-

mum load rating or the load-carry-

ing capacity shown on the sidewall

of the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The

compact spare tire diameter is

smaller than the diameter of a con-

ventional tire and reduces the

ground clearance approximately 1

inch (25 mm), which could result in

damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

The compact spare tire is for

emergency use only. Do not

operate your vehicle on this

compact spare at speeds over

50 mph (80 km/h). The original

tire should be repaired or

replaced as soon as is possible

to avoid failure of the spare

possibly leading to personal

injury or death.

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is in

use. The compact spare

should be replaced by the

proper conventional tire and

rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle

is not recommended with

more than one compact spare

tire in use at the same time.

621

What to do in an emergency

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the com-

pact spare tire. Because of the

smaller size, a tire chain will not fit

properly. This could damage the

vehicle and result in loss of the

chain.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tires with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not

be used on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow tires,

wheel covers or trim rings be used

with the compact spare wheel. If

such use is attempted, damage to

these items or other car compo-

nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

What to do in an emergency

226

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Tire Mobility Kit bag

(2) Compressor

(3) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix

to the tire and the tire should be

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tire

puncture.

The system of compressor and seal-

ing compound effectively and com-

fortably seals most punctures in a

passenger car tire caused by nails or

similar objects and reinflates the tire.

After you ensure that the tire is prop-

erly sealed you can drive cautiously

on the tire (distance up to 200 km

(120 miles)) at a max. speed of 80

km/h (50 mph) in order to reach a

service station or tire dealer to have

the tire replaced.

OEL069019OYFH062021N

CAUTION - One sealant for

one tire

When two or more tires are flat,

do not use the tire mobility kit

because the container of

sealant in the Tire Mobility Kit is

only sufficient for one flat tire.

WARNING - Tire sidewall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tire

walls. This can result in an acci-

dent due to tire failure.

WARNING - Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon

as possible. The tire may lose

air pressure at any time after

inflating with the Tire Mobility

Kit, resulting in an accident.

623

What to do in an emergency

It is possible that some tires, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may

adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is

heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tire

repair method and is to be used for

one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the Tire

Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving

traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you're on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car tires.

Only punctured areas located with-

in the tread region of the tire can be

sealed using the tire mobility kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are both

damaged, do not use the Tire

Mobility Kit for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tire damage larger

than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tire

cannot be made roadworthy with

the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a

tire is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit

unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 min.at a time

or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below -

22°F (-30°C).

• Before using the Tire Mobility Kit,

read the precautionary advice

printed on the sealant bottle.

What to do in an emergency

246

A. Speed restriction label

B. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

C. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

D. Connectors and cable for the

power outlet direct connection

E. Holder for the sealant bottle

F. Compressor

G. On/off switch

H. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure

I. Button for reducing tire inflation

pressure

J. Hose to connect compressor and

sealant bottle or compressor and

wheel

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified

sequence, otherwise the sealant

may escape under high pressure.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

OEL069020-1

WARNING - Expired

sealant

Do not use the Tire sealant after

the sealant has expired (see the

expiration date on the sealant

container). This can increase

the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

625

What to do in an emergency

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1.Detach the speed restriction label

(A) from the sealant bottle (B), and

place it in a highly visible place

inside the vehicle such as on the

steering wheel to remind the driver

not to drive too fast.

2.Screw connection hose (J) onto

the connector of the sealant bottle.

3.Ensure that button (I) on the com-

pressor is not pressed.

4.Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the defective wheel and

screw filling hose (C) of the sealant

bottle onto the valve.

5.Insert the sealant bottle into the

housing of the compressor (E) so

that the bottle is upright.

6.Ensure that the compressor is

switched off, (G) to position 0.

7.Connect between compressor and

the vehicle power outlet using the

cable and connectors.

8.With the engine start/stop button

position on or ignition switch position

on, switch on the compressor and let

it run for approximately 5~7 minutes

to fill the sealant up to proper pres-

sure. (refer to the Tire and Wheels,

chapter 8). The inflation pressure of

the tire after filling is unimportant and

will be checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tire

and stay away from the tire when fill-

ing it.

9. Switch off the compressor (G).

10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and

from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-

age location in the vehicle.

OEL069019

CAUTION - Tire pressure

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tire pressure is

below 29 PSI(200kpa). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tire failure.

WARNING

- Carbon

monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle run-

ning in a poorly ventilated area

for extended periods of time.

Carbon monoxide poisoning

and suffocation can occur.

What to do in an emergency

266

Distributing the sealant

11. Immediately drive approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or, about

10min) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

While driving, if you experience any

ride disturbance or noise, reduce

your speed and drive with caution

until you can safely pull off of the side

of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,

the tire pressure sensors and wheel

may be damaged by sealant.Have an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect

the tire, tire pressure sensor and

wheel after using the Tire Mobility Kit.

Checking the tire inflation pres-

sure

1.After driving approximately 4

~6miles(7~10km or about 10min),

stop at a safe location.

2.Connect connection hose (J) of the

compressor directly to the tire

valve.

3.Plug the compressor power cord

(D) into the vehicle power outlet.

4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the recomended tire inflation.

With the ignition switched on, pro-

ceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure : Switch on the compressor

(G) to position I.To check the cur-

rent inflation pressure setting,

briefly switch off the compressor.

✽✽

NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show high-

er than actual reading when the

compressor is running. To get an

accurate tire reading, the compres-

sor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure: Press the button (I) on the

compressor.

627

What to do in an emergency

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures:

-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)

Max. working pressure:

87 psi (6 bar)

Size

Compressor: 6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.

(168 x 150 x 68 mm)

Sealant bottle: 4.1 x ø 3.3 in.

(104 x ø 85 mm)

Compressor weight:

2.31 lbs (1.05 kg)

Sealant volume:

18.3 cu. in. (300 ml)

✽✽

NOTICE

The Tire Mobility Kit sealant com-

pound is for one use only and must

be replaced. See the authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for more sealing

compound.

Also, the empty sealing compound

bottle must be disposed of properly

at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

or according to local waste disposal

regulations.

CAUTION - Tire pressure

sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility

Kit including sealant not

approved by HYUNDAI, the tire

pressure sensors may be dam-

aged by sealant. The sealant on

the tire pressure sensor and

wheel should be removed when

you replace the tire with a new

one and have the tire pressure

sensors inspected by an author-

ized dealer.

What to do in an emergency

286

TOWING

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we

recommend having it done by an author-

ized Hyundai dealer or a commercial

tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-

ing procedures are necessary to prevent

damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel

dollies or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground (without dol-

lies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-

sion components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the front

wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly

under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow

truck and wheel dollies are not used, the

front of the vehicle should always be lift-

ed, not the rear.

OMC045012

dolly

CAUTION

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed

equipment.

• Never tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on the

ground as this may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

HXD02

HXD03

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-3

Owner maintenance / 7-5

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-7

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-19

Engine oil / 7-22

Inverter coolant / 7-24

Engine coolant / 7-24

Brake fluid / 7-27

Washer fluid / 7-28

Parking brake / 7-28

Air cleaner / 7-29

Climate control air filter / 7-30

Wiper blades / 7-32

Battery (12V) / 7-34

Tires and wheels / 7-37

Fuses / 7-51

Light bulbs / 7-61

Appearance care / 7-71

Emission control system / 7-77

High voltage battery / 7-80

California perchlorate notice / 7-80

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OYFH071001

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Sub relay box

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3.Windshield washer fluid reservoir

4. Radiator cap

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine oil filler cap

7. Brake fluid reservoir

8. Air cleaner

9. Fuse box

10. Inverter coolant

* : if equipped

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to

prevent damage to your vehicle and

injury to yourself whenever performing

any maintenance or inspection proce-

dures.

Should you have any doubts concerning

the inspection or servicing of your vehi-

cle, we strongly recommend that you

have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

perform this work.

An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-

tory-trained technicians and genuine

HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle

properly. For expert advice and quality

service, see an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient

servicing may result in operational prob-

lems with your vehicle that could lead to

vehicle damage, an accident, or person-

al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽

NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show

proper maintenance has been performed

on your vehicle in accordance with the

scheduled maintenance service charts

shown on the following pages.You need

this information to establish your compli-

ance with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided

in your Owner’s Handbook & Warranty

Information booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as a

result of improper maintenance or a lack

of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle

maintained and repaired by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized

HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high

service quality standards and receives

technical support from HYUNDAI in

order to provide you with a high level of

service satisfaction.

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives

instructions only for the maintenance

items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, sev-

eral procedures can be done only by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special

tools.

✽✽

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the

warranty period may affect warranty

coverage. For details, read the separate

Owner’s Handbook & Warranty

Information booklet provided with the

vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-

icing or maintenance procedure, have it

done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Maintenance

WARNING - Maintenance

work

• Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. You

can be seriously injured while

performing some maintenance

procedures. If you lack sufficient

knowledge and experience or the

proper tools and equipment to do

the work, have it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• To avoid serious injury, turn off

ignition and be sure "READY"

lamp is off before working under

hood. Engine may start unexpect-

edly.

(Continued)

• Working under the hood with the

engine running is dangerous. It

becomes even more dangerous

when you wear jewelry or loose

clothing. These can become

entangled in moving parts and

result in injury. Therefore, if you

must run the engine while work-

ing under the hood, make certain

that you remove all jewelry (espe-

cially rings, bracelets, watches,

and necklaces) and all neckties,

scarves, and similar loose cloth-

ing before getting near the

engine or cooling fans.

• When you open the engine hood,

turn the Hybrid system off. If not,

it may result in death or serious

injury because of the high volt-

age flow.

• If the brake system, components

have leaked brake fluid, have the

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. The brake sys-

tem should be bled.

Otherwise, the braking distance

may be increased.

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and

inspections that should be performed by

the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer at the frequencies indicated to

help ensure safe, dependable operation

of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your dealer as

soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are

generally not covered by warranties and

you may be charged for labor, parts and

lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voirs (engine and inverter).

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes

in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steering

effort or looseness in the steering

wheel, or change in its straight-ahead

position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns

slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-

eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for

unusual sounds, pulling to one side,

increased brake pedal travel or “hard-

to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-

ation of your transaxle occurs, check

the transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)

function.

• Check parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-

ing system during or after use is nor-

mal).

WARNING - Radiator cap &

Inverter coolant cap

Do not remove the radiator cap and

/or inverter coolant cap when the

engine and radiator are hot.

Scalding hot coolant and steam

may blow out under pressure caus-

ing serious injury.

Maintenance

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir and inverter coolant

reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-

nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare.

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check radiator, heater, inverter coolant

hose and air conditioning hoses for

leaks or damage.

• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper blades

with clean cloth dampened with wash-

er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.

• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

• Check the drive belt.

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if

the vehicle is usually operated where

none of the following conditions apply. If

any of the following conditions apply, fol-

low Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humid

climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy city

traffic during hot weather above 90°F

(32°C).

If your vehicle is operated under the

above conditions, you should inspect,

replace or refill more frequently than the

following Normal Maintenance Schedule.

After 120 months or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) continue to follow the pre-

scribed maintenance intervals.

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all

vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-

mined by whichever occurs first.

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

(Continued)

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Rotate tires

22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

❑ Rotate tires

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

❑ Rotate tires

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

❑ Rotate tires

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-

odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on

fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-

tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter

immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for details.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake fluid

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

❑ Rotate tires

Maintenance

107

45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

❑ Rotate tires

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

❑ Rotate tires

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

711

Maintenance

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect brake fluid

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect valve clearance *

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

❑ Inspect W/pump belt (auto-tensioner, HSG, w/pump)

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

(Continued)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months)

❑ Replace HSG belt

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months)

❑ Rotate tires

67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

❑ Rotate tires

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but

periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends

on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow

restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel

filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-

essary.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Maintenance

127

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect W/pump belt (auto-tensioner, HSG, w/pump)

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

❑ Rotate tires

82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

❑ Rotate tires

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

713

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

❑ Rotate tires

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake fluid

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect W/pump belt (auto-tensioner, HSG, w/pump)

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

(Continued)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but

periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends

on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow

restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel

filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

(Continued)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

❑ Rotate tires

Maintenance

147

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect W/pump belt (auto-tensioner, HSG, w/pump)

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)

❑ Rotate tires

112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

❑ Rotate tires

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

715

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake fluid

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect valve clearance *

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

❑ Inspect W/pump belt (auto-tensioner, HSG, w/pump)

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120

months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace inverter coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or

120 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

(Continued)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months)

❑ Replace HSG belt

(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months)

❑ Rotate tires

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but

periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends

on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow

restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel

filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

❑ Rotate tires

Maintenance

167

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect W/pump belt (auto-tensioner, HSG, w/pump)

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

❑ Rotate tires

142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

❑ Rotate tires

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

717

Maintenance

150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake fluid

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect HSG belt

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect W/pump belt (auto-tensioner, HSG, w/pump)

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

(Continued)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months)

❑ Replace engine coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120

months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace inverter engine coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km)

or 120 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Rotate tires

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

No check, No service required

❑ Automatic transaxle fluid

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but

periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends

on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow

restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel

filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Maintenance

187

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal tem-

perature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature

B -Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E -Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)

G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)

K -Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

L - Frequently driving in rainy areas

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart

below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I

HSG BELT

R EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM) or 24 MONTHS C, D, E, K, L

I EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) or 6 MONTHS C, D, E, K, L

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, F

PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

719

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule.If the car is being

driven in severe conditions, more fre-

quent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-

ration and replace if necessary. Drive

belts should be checked periodically for

proper tension and adjusted as neces-

sary.

Fuel filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven, damage

the emission system and cause multiple

issues such as hard starting. If an exces-

sive amount of foreign matter accumu-

lates in the fuel tank, the filter may

require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine

for several minutes, and check for leaks

at the connections. Fuel filters should be

installed by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections for leakage and damage. Have

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace

any damaged or leaking parts immedi-

ately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should

be inspected at those intervals specified

in the maintenance schedule. Make sure

that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is

correctly replaced.

Vacuum hoses and crankcase

ventilation hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence

of heat and/or mechanical damage.Hard

and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,

abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-

cate deterioration. Particular attention

should be paid to examine those hose

surfaces nearest to high heat sources,

such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that

the hoses do not come in contact with

any heat source, sharp edges or moving

component which might cause heat dam-

age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and cou-

plings, to make sure they are secure, and

that no leaks are present. Hoses should

be replaced immediately if there is any

evidence of deterioration or damage.

Maintenance

207

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is

recommended when the filter is

replaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of

the correct heat range.

Valve clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or

engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should

perform the operation.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components, such

as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and

connections for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The engine and inverter coolants should

be changed at the intervals specified in

the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be

checked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid should

be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer in accordance to the scheduled

maintenance at the beginning of this

chapter.

✽✽

NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-

cally red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic

transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.

This is a normal condition and you

should not judge the need to replace the

fluid based upon the changed color.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated or

damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid

reservoir. The level should be between

“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of

the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake

fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4

specification.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transaxle malfunc-

tion and failure.

Use only specified automatic

transaxle fluid. (Refer to

“Recommended lubricants and

capacities” in section 8.)

721

Maintenance

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-

ing the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and

rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs

for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-

fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,

or damage. Start the engine and listen

carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for

looseness or damage. Retighten to the

specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the

steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.

Check the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps

for cracks, deterioration, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-

essary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and con-

nections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

227

ENGINE OIL

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking or

adding the engine oil as it may be

hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION

Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result.

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.

3.Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to

return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and

re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check

the level.The level should be between

F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring

the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from

being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-

ties” in section 8.)

OYFH071003N OYFH071004N

CAUTION

Do not spill engine oil, when adding

or changing engine oil. If you spill

engine oil on the engine room, wipe

it off immediately.

723

Maintenance

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to

the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-

ning of this section.

CALIFORNIA

PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer, birth defects, and

reproductive harm.

Used engine oil may cause irrita-

tion or cancer of the skin if left in

contact with the skin for prolonged

periods of time. Used engine oil

contains chemicals that have

caused cancer in laboratory ani-

mals. Always protect your skin by

washing your hands thoroughly

with soap and warm water as soon

as possible after handling used oil.

Maintenance

247

COOLANT

Inverter coolant

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze

coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-

tory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level.

If it is near or at MIN, add enough coolant

between MIN and MAX and check the

cooling system for air bleed at an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Engine coolant

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze

coolant.The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level per every day, at the begin-

ning of the winter season, and before

traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

CAUTION

Do not mix-up the caps of engine

coolant and inverter coolant.

If mixed-up it could create a coolant

circulation problem for the engine

or Hybrid system.

CAUTION

When adding coolant, be careful

not to overfill.

WARNING

Removing radiator

and inverter coolant

cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-

ator and/or inverter coolant cap

while the engine is operating or

hot. Doing so might lead to cool-

ing system and engine damage

and could result in serious per-

sonal injury from escaping hot

coolant or steam.

(Continued)

OYFH071070N-1

725

Maintenance

Check the condition and connections of

all cooling system hoses and heater

hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-

rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between F and L marks on the side of the

coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

distilled (deionized) water to provide pro-

tection against freezing and corrosion.

Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If

frequent additions are required, see an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling

system inspection.

OYFH071005N

(Continued)

• The engine coolant and/or inverter

coolant level is influenced by

hybrid system temperature.Before

filling the engine coolant and/or

inverter coolant, turn the hybrid

vehicle off, fill the engine coolant

and/or inverter coolant carefully.

• Turn the engine off and wait until it

cools down. Use extreme care

when removing the radiator and/or

inverter coolant cap. Wrap a thick

towel around it, and turn it coun-

terclockwise slowly to the first

stop. Step back while the pressure

is released from the cooling sys-

tem. When you are sure all the

pressure has been released, press

down on the cap, using a thick

towel, and continue turning coun-

terclockwise to remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator

and/or inverter coolant cap or the

drain plug while the engine and

radiator are hot. Hot coolant and

steam may still blow out under

pressure, causing serious injury.

WARNING

The electric motor

(cooling fan) is con-

trolled by engine

coolant temperature,

refrigerant pressure

and vehicle speed. It may some-

times operate even when the

engine is not running. Use extreme

caution when working near the

blades of the cooling fan so that

you are not injured by the rotating

fan blades. As the engine coolant

temperature decreases, the electric

motor will automatically shut off.

This is a normal condition.

Maintenance

267

Recommended engine and inverter

coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deion-

ized water or soft water for your vehicle

and never mix hard water in the

coolant filled at the factory. An improp-

er coolant mixture can result in serious

malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum

engine parts and must be protected by

an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to pre-

vent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the specified

coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less than

35% antifreeze, which would reduce

the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-

lowing table.

Changing the coolant

Have engine and inverter coolant

changed by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer according to the Maintenance

Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING - Radiator cap &

Inverter coolant cap

Do not remove the radiator cap and

/or inverter coolant cap when the

engine and radiator are hot.

Scalding hot coolant and steam

may blow out under pressure caus-

ing serious injury.

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth or fabric around

the radiator and/or inverter cap

before refilling the coolant in order

to prevent the coolant from over-

flowing into engine parts such as

the generator.

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze

Water

OYFH071006N-1

OYFH071070N-1

Radiator cap

Inverter coolant cap

727

Maintenance

BRAKE FLUID

Checking the brake fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-

odically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir. To check the brake

fluid exactly, after stopping the vehicle,

apply the brake pedal a few times and

then check the fluid level.

Before removing the reservoir cap and

adding brake fluid, clean the area around

the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent

brake fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level. The level will fall with accumulated

mileage.This is a normal condition asso-

ciated with the wear of the brake linings.

If the fluid level is excessively low, have

the brake system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants or capaci-

ties” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake fluid

When changing and adding brake

fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it

come in contact with your eyes. If

brake fluid should come in contact

with your eyes, immediately flush

them with a large quantity of fresh

tap water. Have your eyes examined

by a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brake

fluid

In the event the brake system

requires frequent additions of fluid,

the vehicle should be inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Do not allow brake fluid to contact

the vehicle's body paint, as paint

damage will result. Brake fluid,

which has been exposed to open air

for an extended time should never

be used as its quality cannot be

guaranteed. It should be disposed

of properly. Don't put in the wrong

kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-

al-based oil, such as engine oil, in

your brake system can damage

brake system parts.

CAUTION

Do not overfill the brake fluid.Brake

system damage may occur if the

brake fluid level exceeds the Max

fill level.

OYFH071007N

Maintenance

287

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

The reservoir is translucent so that you

can check the level with a quick visual

inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid

reservoir and add fluid if necessary.Plain

water may be used if washer fluid is not

available. However, use washer solvent

with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake

Check whether the stroke is within spec-

ification when the parking brake pedal is

depressed with 44 lb (20 kg, 196 N) of

force.Also, the parking brake alone should

securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep

grade. If the stroke is more or less than

specified, have the parking brake adjusted

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 4~5 notch

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alcohol

and can be flammable under cer-

tain circumstances. Do not allow

sparks or flame to contact the

washer fluid or the washer fluid

reservoir. Damage to the vehicle

or occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-

sonous to humans and animals.

Do not drink and avoid contacting

windshield washer fluid. Serious

injury or death could occur.

OYFH071010N

PARKING BRAKE

OYF059023

729

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, and

should not be cleaned and reused.

You can clean the filter when inspecting

the air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching

clips and open the cover.

2.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching

clips.

OYFH071011N OYFH071012N OYF079013

Maintenance

307

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual recom-

mended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage condi-

tions” in this section.)

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be

replaced according to the Maintenance

Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in

severely air-polluted cities or on dusty

rough roads for a long period, it should

be inspected more frequently and

replaced earlier. When you replace the

climate control air filter, replace it by per-

forming the following procedure, and be

careful to avoid damaging other compo-

nents.

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and remove the

support strap (1).

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-

sive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner fil-

ter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use

of non-genuine parts could dam-

age the air flow sensor.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

OYF079014

731

Maintenance

2.With the glove box open, remove the

stoppers by turning them counter-

clockwise on both sides.

3. Remove the climate control air filter

cover while pressing the lock on the

right of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

✽✽

NOTICE

When replacing the climate control air

filter install it properly. Otherwise, the

system may produce noise and the effec-

tiveness of the filter may be reduced.

OYF079016OYF079015 OYF079046

Maintenance

327

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

✽✽

NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or

the wiper blades with foreign matter can

reduce the effectiveness of the wind-

shield wipers. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot

wax treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes.If the blades are not wip-

ing properly, clean both the window and

the blades with a good cleaner or mild

detergent, and rinse thoroughly with

clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ade-

quately, the blades may be worn or

cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manual-

ly.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper malfunc-

tion and failure.

733

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull

down the blade assembly and remove

it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

OHM078059

OYF079061

OYF079062

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it may

chip or crack the windshield.

Maintenance

347

For best 12V battery service

The 12V battery is in the trunk.

• Keep the 12V battery securely mount-

ed.

• Keep the 12V battery top clean and

dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum

jelly or terminal grease.

• Wipe any spilled electrolyte from the

12V battery immediately with a solu-

tion of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for

an extended time, disconnect the 12V

battery cables.

BATTERY (12V)

OYFH073017N

WARNING - Battery

dangers

Always read the following

instructions carefully when

handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and

all other flames or sparks

away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-

bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children because

batteries contain highly

corrosive SULFURIC ACID.

Do not allow battery acid to

contact your skin, eyes,

clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets into

your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash the

contacted area. If you feel a

pain or a burning sensa-

tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection when

charging or working near a

battery. Always provide

ventilation when working in

an enclosed space.

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local

law(s) or regulation.

(Continued)

735

Maintenance

12V Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the 12V battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for example,

the headlights or interior lights were

left on while the vehicle was not in

use), jump start it from another vehi-

cle’s 12V battery or recharge it by slow

charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the 12V battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load while the

vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-

30A for two hours.

CALIFORNIA

PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and relat-

ed accessories contain lead and

lead compounds, chemicals known

to the State of California to cause

cancer, birth defects and reproduc-

tive harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer. Wash

hands after handling.

CAUTION

• When you don’t use the vehicle

for a long time in the low temper-

ature, remove the 12V battery and

store it indoors.

• Always charge the 12V battery

fully to prevent 12V battery case

damage in low temperatures.

• If you connect unauthorized elec-

tronic devices to the 12V battery,

the 12V battery may be dis-

charged. Never use unauthorized

devices.

(Continued)

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak, resulting in personal injury.

Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cables

are connected.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Never

touch these components with the

engine running or the engine

start/stop button positioned on.

Failure to follow the above warn-

ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

Maintenance

367

Reset items

Items should be reset after the 12V bat-

tery has been discharged or the 12V bat-

tery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window (See section 4)

• Sunroof (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

• Climate control system

(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the 12V battery,

turn off all accessories and stop

the engine.

• The negative battery cable must

be removed first and installed

last when the 12V battery is dis-

connected.

• Operation related to the 12V bat-

tery should be done in an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Recharging

12V battery

When recharging the battery,

observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an

area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,

or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charg-

ing rate if the battery cells begin

gassing (boiling) violently or if

the temperature of the electrolyte

of any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).

• Wear eye protection when check-

ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in

the following order.

1.Turn off the battery charger main

switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

737

Maintenance

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is

possible. Keep your tire pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the center of the tire tread, and

a greater possibility of dam-

age from road hazards.

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tire

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation

pressures

All tire pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tires are cold.“Cold Tires” means the

vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

one mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, vehicle

handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tire and wheels” in section

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver’s side center

pillar.

WARNING - Tire underin-

flation

Severe underinflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tire failures that can result

in the loss of vehicle control

leading to severe injury or

death. This risk is much higher

on hot days and when driving

for long periods at high speeds.

OYF089002

Maintenance

387

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or

more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the

spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check

tire pressure.You can not tell if your

tires are properly inflated simply by

looking at them. Radial tires may

look properly inflated even when

they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure

when the tires are cold. - "Cold"

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure. This

could result in loss of vehicle

control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehicle

has been parked for at least

three hours or hasn't been

driven more than one mile (1.6

km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your

spare tire each time you check

the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a

vehicle luggage rack if your

vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn,old tires can cause acci-

dents. If your tread is badly

worn, or if your tires have

been damaged, replace them.

CAUTION

• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-

sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41

kPa). Do not release air from

warm tires to adjust the pres-

sure or the tires will be under-

inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire

inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture

could get into the valve core

and cause air leakage. If a

valve cap is missing, install a

new one as soon as possible.

739

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-

ly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement.If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire and loading

information label, no further adjust-

ment is necessary. If the pressure is

low, add air until you reach the rec-

ommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. They help prevent

leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-

ture.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-

mended that the tires be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage.Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of

these conditions. Replace the tire if

fabric or cord is visible.After rotation,

be sure to bring the front and rear tire

pressures to specification and check

lug nut tightness.

WARNING

• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well as

wear and damage. Always use

a tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly caus-

ing poor handling,loss of vehi-

cle control, and sudden tire

failure leading to accidents,

injuries, and even death. The

recommended cold tire pres-

sure for your vehicle can be

found in this manual and on

the tire label located on the dri-

ver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-

dents. Replace tires that are

worn, show uneven wear, or

are damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tire.

HYUNDAI recommends that

you check the spare every

time you check the pressure

of the other tires on your vehi-

cle.

Maintenance

407

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽✽

NOTICE

Rotate radial tires that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to

left.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

OBH078040

Without a spare tire

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that could result in death,

severe injury, or property

damage.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle's alu-

minum wheels. Use only

approved wheel weights.

741

Maintenance

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread.This shows there is

less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread

left on the tire.Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

WARNING - Replacing

tires

To reduce the chance or serious

or fatal injuries from an acci-

dent caused by tire failure or

loss of vehicle control:

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tires can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

too little or too much pressure

in your tires. This can lead to

uneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, never

mix radial and bias-ply tires

on the same car. You must

replace all tires (including the

spare) if moving from radial to

bias-ply tires.

(Continued)

• Using tires and wheel other

than the recommended sizes

could cause unusual handling

characteristics and poor vehi-

cle control, resulting in a seri-

ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet

HYUNDAI’s specifications

may fit poorly and result in

damage to the vehicle or

unusual handling and poor

vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparing

the speed of the wheels. Tire

size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tires, all 4

tires must use the same size

originally supplied with the

vehicle. Using tires of a differ-

ent size can cause the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) and

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) to work irregularly.

Maintenance

427

Compact spare tire replacement

(if equipped)

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire

should be the same size and design

tire as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tire wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tires should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. To reduce the possibility of

losing control, slow down whenever

there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tire wear. If you find a tire is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct

size may adversely affect wheel

and bearing life, braking and

stopping abilities, handling char-

acteristics, ground clearance,

body-to-tire clearance, snow

chain clearance, speedometer

and odometer calibration, head-

light aim and bumper height.

743

Maintenance

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

2.Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tire size designation

mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P205/65R16 94H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

cars or light trucks; however, not

all tires have this marking).

205 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

94 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one.The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.5JX16

6.5 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

5,6

Maintenance

447

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tires. The

speed rating is part of the tire size

designation on the sidewall of the

tire.This symbol corresponds to that

tire's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tire life

(TIN :Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tire

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tire size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents

that the tire was produced in the 16th

week of 2014.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

WARNING - Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, it is recommended that

tires generally be replaced after

six (6) years of normal service.

Heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading condi-

tions can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow this

warning can result in sudden

tire failure, which could lead to

a loss of control and an acci-

dent involving serious injury or

death.

745

Maintenance

4.Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D" means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that can

be carried by the tire.When replacing

the tires on the vehicle, always use a

tire that has the same load rating as

the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicle

may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

Maintenance

467

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the labora-

tory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air

inside the tire pressing outward on

the tire. Air pressure is expressed in

pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-

pascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the

combined weight of optional acces-

sories. Some examples of optional

accessories are, automatic

transaxle, power seats, and air con-

ditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a

tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords

that is located between the plies and

the tread. Cords may be made from

steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel

wires wrapped by steel cords that

hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the plies are laid at alternate

angles less than 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

WARNING - Tire

temperature

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat

build-up and possible sudden

tire failure. This can cause loss

of vehicle control and serious

injury or death.

747

Maintenance

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of

air pressure in a tire, measured in

pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-

pascals (kPa) before a tire has built

up heat from driving.

Curb Weight:This means the weight

of a motor vehicle with standard and

optional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, but without passengers and

cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into

the sidewall of a tire signifying that

the tire is in compliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation motor

vehicle safety standards. The DOT

code includes the Tire Identification

Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-

ignator which can also identify the

tire manufacturer, production plant,

brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The

side of an asymmetrical tire, that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for

air pressure.

Load Index: An assigned number

ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-

sponds to the load carrying capacity

of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The

maximum air pressure to which a

cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-

mum air pressure is molded onto the

sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load

rating for a tire at the maximum per-

missible inflation pressure for that

tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The

number of occupants a vehicle is

designed to seat multiplied by 150

pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designated

seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side

of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-

ticular side that faces outward when

mounted on a vehicle. The outward

facing sidewall bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on

the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire

used on passenger cars and some

light duty trucks and multipurpose

vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:

Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-

ed tire inflation pressure and shown

on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the ply cords that extend to the

beads are laid at 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and

upon which the tire beads are seat-

ed.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire

between the tread and the bead.

Maintenance

487

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric

code assigned to a tire indicating the

maximum speed at which a tire can

operate.

Traction: The friction between the

tire and the road surface. The

amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that

comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow

bands, sometimes called "wear

bars," that show across the tread of a

tire when only 2/32 inch of tread

remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards, a tire information

system that provides consumers with

ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-

ture and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded into

the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-

ber of designated seating positions

multiplied by 150 lbs.(68 kg) plus the

rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire:Load on an individual tire due to

curb and accessory weight plus

maximum occupant and cargo

weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight and dviding by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-

ly attached to a vehicle showing the

original equipment tire size and rec-

ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires

on some models to provide good

performance for use all year round,

including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud

and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than

all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on

some models to provide superior

performance on dry roads. Summer

tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer

tires do not have the tire traction rat-

ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

side wall. If you plan to operate your

vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.

HYUNDAI recommends the use of

snow tires or all season tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,

they should be the same size and

have the same load capacity as the

original tires. Snow tires should be

installed on all four wheels; other-

wise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28

kPa) more air pressure than the

pressure recommended for the stan-

dard tires on the tire label on the dri-

ver's side of the center pillar, or up to

the maximum pressure shown on the

tire sidewall, whichever is less.

749

Maintenance

WARNING - Snow or ice

• When driving on roads cov-

ered with snow or ice, drive at

less than 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wire

chains.

• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,

retighten the chain to avoid

contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,

retighten the chains after driv-

ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on

vehicles equipped with alu-

minum wheels. In unavoid-

able circumstance, use a wire

type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.47

inches (12 mm) to prevent

damage to the chain’s con-

nection.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120

km/h) when your car is equipped with

snow tires.

Tire chains

Tire chains, if necessary, should be

installed on the front wheels.

Be sure that the chains are installed

in accordance with the manufactur-

er's instructions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, do

not continue to use tire chains when

they are no longer needed.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved

tread life, road hazard resistance and

smoother high speed ride. The radi-

al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of

belted construction, and are selected

to complement the ride and handling

characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load

carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias

belted tires of the same size, and use

the same recommended inflation

pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires

with bias-ply or bias belted tires is

not recommended. Any combina-

tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias

belted tires when used on the same

vehicle will seriously deteriorate

vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-

low is:Identical radial-ply tires should

always be used as a set of four.

Longer wearing tires can be more

susceptible to irregular tread wear. It

is very important to follow the tire

rotation interval shown in this section

to achieve the tread life potential of

these tires. Cuts and punctures in

radial-ply tires are repairable only in

the tread area, because of sidewall

flexing. Consult your tire dealer for

radial-ply tire repairs.

Maintenance

507

Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect

ratio is lower than 50, are provided

for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires

are optimized for handling and brak-

ing, it may be more uncomfortable to

ride in and there is more noise com-

pare with normal tires.

(Continued)

• When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or curb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tires and wheels are not dam-

aged.

• If the tire is impacted, we rec-

ommend that you inspect the

tire condition or contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• To prevent damage to the tire,

inspect the tire condition and

pressure every 3,000km.

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the

tire damage with your own

eyes. But if there is the slight-

est hint of tire damage, even

though you cannot see the tire

damage with your own eyes,

have the tire checked or

replaced because the tire

damage may cause air leak-

age from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or curb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

• You can find out the tire infor-

mation on the tire sidewall.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low

aspect ratio tire is shorter than

the normal, the wheel and tire of

the low aspect ratio tire is easi-

er to be damaged. So, follow the

instructions below.

• When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tires and wheels may

be damaged. And after driving,

inspect tires and wheels.

(Continued)

751

Maintenance

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected

from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat-

ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the

other in the engine compartment.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories,

or controls do not work, check the appro-

priate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the

element inside the fuse will be melted.

If the electrical system does not work,

first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of

the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-

cates an electrical problem. Avoid using

the system involved and immediately

consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type

for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,

and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

✽✽

NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may

differ from equipped items.

WARNING - Fuse

replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything

but another fuse of the same rat-

ing.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum

foil instead of the proper fuse -

even as a temporary repair. It may

cause extensive wiring damage

and a possible fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove fuses

because it may cause a short circuit

and damage the system.

CAUTION

• When replacing a blown fuse or

relay with a new one, make sure

the new fuse or relay fits tightly

into the clips.The incomplete fas-

tening fuse or relay may cause the

vehicle wiring and electric sys-

tems damage and a possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays and

terminals fastened with bolts or

nuts.The fuses, relays and termi-

nals may be fastened incomplete-

ly, and it may cause a possible

fire. If fuses, relays and terminals

fastened with bolts or nuts are

blown, consult with an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not input any other objects

except fuses or relays into

fuse/relay terminals such as a driv-

er or wiring. It may cause contact

failure and system malfunction.

OBK079042

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Multi fuse

Blown

Normal Blown

Maintenance

527

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

1.Turn the engine start/stop button and

all other switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.

Use the removal tool provided in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of

the same rating from a circuit you may

not need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-

ponents do not work and the fuses are

OK, check the fuse panel in the engine

compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must

be replaced.

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory

fuse to prevent 12V battery discharge if

your vehicle is parked without being

operated for prolonged periods. Use the

following procedures before parking the

vehicle for prolonged periods.

1.Turn off the engine.

2.Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

OYF079020 OYFH071021N

OYF079022

753

Maintenance

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up from

the fuse panel, the warning chime,

audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,

will not operate. Some items must be

reset after replacement. Refer to

“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse is

pulled up, the battery can still be dis-

charged by operation of the head-

lights or other electrical devices.

Engine compartment fuse

replacement

1.Turn the engine start/stop button and

all other switches off.

2.Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,

use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OYFH071023N

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the

engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. If not,

electrical failures may occur from

water contact.

Maintenance

547

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1.Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel on the right

side in the engine compartment.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.

6.Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Oil pump cooling fuse/

Cooling fan fuse

If the oil pump cooling fuse or cooling fan

fuse is blown, it must be removed as fol-

lows:

1.Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel on the right

side in the engine compartment.

4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.

5.Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

Sub-relay fuse

If the sub-relay fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1.Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.

4.Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

OYFH071088N OYFH071089N OYFH071072N

755

Maintenance

Inner fuse panel

Engine compartment fuse panel

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

OYF079025/OYF071071N/OYF071026N

Sub-relay box

✽✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your vehi-

cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.

When you inspect the fuse panel in your

vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Maintenance

567

Inner fuse panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)

Description Fuse rating Protected component

P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver Power seat

AMP 30A JBL AMP, AMP

TRUNK 10A I/P Junction Box (Trunk Lid Relay), Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch/Actuator

SAFETY POWER WINDOW 25A Safety Power Window Module

SPARE 20A -

P/WDW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH

SPARE 7.5A -

BMS 10A BMS Control Module

BRAKE SW 7.5A Fob Holder, Start Stop Button Switch, PDM, Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Module

MODULE 7.5A HEV NVLD, TMU, VESS Module, Sport Mode Switch, Active Air Flap

P/WDW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH

SPARE 10A -

HTD MIRR 10A Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror

P/SEAT PASS 20A Passenger Power Seat

S/HEATER FRT 15A Driver Seat Warmer Module, Passenger Seat Warmer Module

PDM 25A PDM

CLOCK 10A

Smart Key Module, PDM, BCM, TMU, Clock, Rear Camera Module,

A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio, Overhead Console Lamp, AMP, JBL AMP,

Power Outside Mirror Switch

SPARE 10A -

A/CON 7.5A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay), A/C Control Module

S/HTR RR 20A Rear Seat Warmer Switch LH, Rear Seat Warmer Switch RH

SUN ROOF 20A Panorama Sunroof

POWER OUTLET 15A Front Power Outlet RH

MODULE 7.5A Rear Camera Module, BCM

757

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

WIPER 25A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper Relay), Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch

MODULE 7.5A PDM, Panorama Sunroof

DR LOCK 20A

I/P Junction Box (Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay),

E/R Fuse & Relay Box (T/Turn Unlock Relay)

POWER OUTLET 15A Front Power Outlet LH

MODULE 7.5A

Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module, BCM, Sport Mode Switch IND., Clock, Audio,

Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, TMU, E/CON Switch,

Active Air Flap, RPAS Sensor

IG 1 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - ESC 3 10A, ECU 4 10A, OIL PUMP 2 10A, TCU 2 15A)

HEV ECU 20A Hybrid Control Unit

A/BAG 15A Telltale Lamp, SRS Control Module, Passenger Weight Classification Sensor

START 7.5A PDM Hybrid Control Unit, Transaxle Range Switch

MDPS 10A ESC Off Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, EPS Control Module

PDM 7.5A Smart Key Module, PDM

SPARE 10A -

A/BAG IND. 7.5A Instrument Cluster

POWER

CONNECTOR

AUDIO 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit

ROOM LP 10A

Trunk Room Lamp, Driver Door Lamp, Instrument Cluster, Passenger Door Lamp,

A/C Control Module, Glove Box Lamp, BCM, Clock, RF Receiver, Data Link Connector,

Tire Pressure Monitoring Module,

Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Electro Chromic Mirror, Room Lamp Relay

Maintenance

587

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

MULTI

FUSE

B+ 60A

I/P Junction Box (Power Window Relay, Fuse - TRUNK 10, S/HEATER FRT 15A,

SAFETY POWER WINDOW 25A, MODULE 3 7.5A, PDM 25A, Power Connector - AUDIO 15A)

IG 1 40A Smart Key - IG 1 Relay, ACC Relay

EMS 40A EMS Box (Fuse - HORN 15A, EWP 3 10A, ECU 1 30A, F/PUMP 20A)

RR HTD 40A Rear Defogger Relay

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

B+ 60A

I/P Junction Box (Fuse - P/SEAT DRI 30A, AMP 30A, BRAKE SW 7.5A, BMS 10A, IPS 2, IPS 3,

IPS 5, IPS 8)

MDPS 80A EPS Control Module

FUSE

B+ 50A

I/P Junction Box (Fuse - SUNROOF 20A, DR LOCK, IPS 1, IPS 4, IPS 6, IPS 7, IPS 9,

Power Connector - ROOM LP 10A)

WIPER 10A PCM

RR HTD IND 10A A/C Control Module

INVERTER 10A Low DC Converter, Hybrid Inverter

BATTERY C/FAN 15A BMS Blower Module

TCU 20A PCU

STOP LP 15A SSEM (Stop Signal Electronic Module)

DEICER 20A Deicer Relay

ECU 20A PCU

HEV ECU 20A Hybrid Control Unit

IG 2 40A Smart Key - IG 2 Relay

AHB 40A AHB Control Module

OIL PUMP 20A Electric Oil Pump Unit

759

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

FUSE

ESC 40A EBS Control Module

ESC 30A EBS Control Module

AHB 30A AHB Control Module

ECU 10A PCM

TCU 15A Transaxle Range Switch

ESC 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Multipurpose Check Connector, EBS Control Module

OIL PUMP 10A Hybrid Fuse & Relay Box (OPCU Relay), Electric Oil Pump Unit

B/UP LAMP 10A A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror

ECU 30A Engine Control Relay

IGN COIL 20A Ignition coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser

SENSOR 15A

Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down), Oil control Valve (1/2), Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Crankshaft

Position Sensor, CCV

SENSOR 15A Camshaft Position Sensor (1/2)

INJECTOR 15A Injector #1/#2/#3/#4, F/PUMP Relay

F/PUMP 20A F/PUMP Relay

EWP 10A EWP Relay

HORN 15A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay, Horn Relay

SPARE 25A -

SPARE 20A -

SPARE 15A -

SPARE 10A -

Maintenance

607

Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Sub-relay box)Engine compartment main fuse panel (Engien junction fuses)

Description Fuse rating Protected component

OPCU 80A OPCU Relay

C/FAN 60A C/FAN Relay

INVERTER 10A Low DC Converter, Hybrid Inverter

BMS 10A BMS Control Module

AHB 10A AHB Control Module

EWP 10A Electrical Water Pump

Relay NO. Relay Name Type

RLY1 OPCU Relay PLUG MINI

RLY2 C/FAN Relay PLUG MINI

Relay No. Relay Name Type

E41 ACC Relay PLUG MICRO

E42 RR HTD Relay PLUG MICRO

E43 - PLUG MICRO

E44 - PLUG MICRO

E45 EWP Relay PLUG MICRO

E46 - PLUG MICRO

E47 Deicer Relay PLUG MICRO

E48 - PLUG MICRO

E49 IG1 Relay PLUG MICRO

E50 IG2 Relay PLUG MICRO

E51 Wiper Relay PLUG MICRO

E52 T/Turn Door Unlock Relay PLUG MICRO

E53 - PLUG MICRO

E54 Blower Relay PLUG MICRO

EMS

BOX

RLY.1 Horn Relay PLUG MICRO

RLY.2 F/Pump Relay PLUG MICRO

RLY.3 ECU Relay PLUG MINI

761

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only bulbs of the specified wattage.

✽✽

NOTICE

After heavy, driving rain or washing,

headlight and taillight lenses could

appear frosty. This condition is caused by

the temperature difference between the

lamp inside and outside. This is similar

to the condensation on your windows

inside your vehicle during the rain and

doesn’t indicate a problem with your

vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp

bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Working on

the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly

apply the parking brake, ensure

that the engine start/stop button is

in the OFF position and turn off the

lights to avoid sudden movement

of the vehicle and burning your fin-

gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burned-out

bulb with one of the same wattage

rating. Otherwise, it may cause

damage to the fuse or electric

wiring system.

CAUTION

If you don’t have necessary tools,

the correct bulbs and the expertise,

consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer. In many cases, it is difficult

to replace vehicle light bulbs

because other parts of the vehicle

must be removed before you can

get to the bulb. This is especially

true if you have to remove the head-

light assembly to

get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing

the headlight

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

WARNING

When you replace the front head-

lamp bulb be careful of the HPCU

system, the high voltage cable

(orange color), and high voltage

components for the hybrid system.

It is very dangerous because the

HPCU has high voltage. Do not

touch high voltage systems or it

could result in the electric shock or

burns or even death.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with

High Intensity Discharge (HID)

headlights, these headlights con-

tain mercury. So if you need to have

your vehicle disposed, you should

remove the HID Headlights before

disposal. The removed HID head-

lights should be recycled, re-used

or disposed as hazardous waste.

Maintenance

627

Headlight, position light, turn sig-

nal light, side marker light and

front fog light bulb replacement

(1) Headlight (High)

(2) Headlight (Low)

(3) Front turn signal light

(4) Front side marker

(5) Position light

(6) Front fog light (if equipped)

Headlight bulb

(Continued)

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-

ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool

down before handling it.

OHD076046

WARNING -

Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flying

pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra-

sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid

contact with liquids. Never touch

the glass with bare hands.

Residual oil may cause the bulb

to overheat and burst when lit. A

bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlight.

(Continued)

OYFH071027N-1

763

Maintenance

Front side marker / Position light

If the light bulb is not operating, have the

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Head light (High/Low)

1.Open the hood

2.Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.

3.Disconnect the headlight bulb socket

connector.

4.Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly.

5.Install a new headlight bulb.

6.Connect the headlight bulb socket con-

nector.

7.Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-

ing it clockwise.

✽✽

NOTICE

Always have the headlight aiming

adjusted after an accident or the head-

light assembly is reinstalled at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OYFH071078N

Maintenance

647

Front turn signal

1.Turn the front tire at a right angle.

2.Remove the service bolt located at

upper side of tire.

3.Put your hand in the hole and rotate

the cover of the front turn signal.

4.Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly.

5.Install a new front turn signal bulb.

6.Install the front turn signal cover.

7.Install the service bolt located at upper

side of tire.

Front fog light

1.Remove the under side cover by rotat-

ing the screws.

2.Reach your hand into the back of the

front bumper.

3.Disconnect the power connector.

4.Remove the bulb-socket from the

housing by turning the socket counter

clockwise until the tabs on the socket

align with the slots on the housing.

5.Install the new bulb-socket into the

housing by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the housing.

Push the socket into the housing and

turn the socket clockwise.

6.Connect the power connector.

7.Reinstall the front under side cover.

OYFH071076N

OYFH071085N

OYFH071086N

765

Maintenance

Side repeater light bulb replace-

ment (if equipped)

If the light bulb is not operating, have the

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Rear combination light bulb

replacement

(1) Stop and tail light

(2) Rear turn signal light

(3) Tail light or stop and tail light

(4) Back-up light

(5) Light curtain (Tail light)

(6) Side marker

Rear turn signal

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the service cover by pulling out

the service cover.

OYF079042N

OYFH071043N

OYFH071035NOYF079041

Maintenance

667

3. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

7. Install the service cover by putting it

into the service hole.

Tail light, stop and tail light,

side marker, light curtain

If the light is not operating, have the vehi-

cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the service cover by pulling out

the service cover.

3. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

7. Install the service cover by putting it

into the service hole.

OYFH071087N

767

Maintenance

OYFH044150/OYFH071079N/OYFH071080N/OYFH071081N/OYFH071082N/OYFH071083N/OYFH071084N

High mounted stop light

replacement

1.Push the cushion up.

2.Disconnect the seat warmer cable is

located under the cushion.

3.Remove the nuts under the seatback

connecting each seatback.

4.Push the seatback up. The seat back

is connected to the hook attached to

package tray.

5. Remove the C pillar.

WARNING

When you replace the high mount-

ed stop light replacement, be care-

ful not to touch or damage the high

voltage battery.Touching or damag-

ing the high voltage battery may

result in electric shock or burns.

Maintenance

687

6.Remove the screws and package tray.

7.Remove the fabric and nuts.

8.Change the HMSL to a new one.

9.Reinstall all components in the reverse

order of removal.

10. Connect the seat warmer cable

again.

11. Reinstall the screws for the seatback.

12. Reinstall the cushion.

License plate light bulb replace-

ment

1. Loosen the retaining screws with a

philips head screwdriver.

2.Remove the socket by turning it

counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb assembly securely

with the retaining screws.

OYF079037L

769

Maintenance

Interior light bulb replacement

1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently

pry the lens from the interior light hous-

ing.

2.Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

3.Install a new bulb in the socket.

4.Align the lens tabs with the interior light

housing notches and snap the lens into

place.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-

ton is depressed to avoid burning

your fingers or receiving an electric

shock.

CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage the

lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

Map lamp

Luggage lamp (if equipped)

Room lamp

Personal lamp

OYF079038/OYF079039/OYFH071039N

OYF079040/OTD079035

Sunvisor lamp

Maintenance

707

Map lamp and room lamp

(LED type)

If the light is not operating, have the vehi-

cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Map lamp

■■

OYF072201/OYF072202/OYF072203

Room lamp (if equipped)

771

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning and

caution statements that appear on the

label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from

rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly

and frequently at least once a month with

lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-

ing, you should wash it after each off-

road trip. Pay special attention to the

removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,

mud, and other foreign materials. Make

sure the drain holes in the lower edges of

the doors and rocker panels are kept

clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar deposits

can damage your vehicle’s finish if not

removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water

may not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on

painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do

not allow soap to dry on the finish.

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do

not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side

windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water, water may leak through the

windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts and lamps, do not clean

with chemical solvents or strong

detergents.

WARNING

Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and trunk with water. The

hybrid system is located in the

engine compartment and trunk. If

water enters the engine or hybrid

battery in the trunk, electric shocks

or burns may result in serious injury

or death.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with

electrical/electronic components

and air ducts inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

OJB037800

Maintenance

727

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing. Use a good quality liquid or

paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.Wax all metal trim to protect

it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials

with a spot remover will usually strip the

wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax

these areas even if the rest of the vehicle

does not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust

and may develop into a major repair

expense.

✽✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires

any metal repair or replacement, be sure

the body shop applies anti-corrosion

materials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or other

sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal

parts from corrosion, apply a coating of

wax or chrome preservative and rub to

a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts with

a heavier coating of wax or preserva-

tive. If necessary, coat the parts with

non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other

protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may col-

lect on the underbody. If these materials

are not removed, accelerated rusting can

occur on underbody parts such as the

fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust

system, even though they have been

treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody

and wheel openings with lukewarm or

cold water once a month, after off-road

driving and at the end of each winter. Pay

special attention to these areas because

it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It

will do more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it. The

lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and

frame members have drain holes that

should not be allowed to clog with dirt;

trapped water in these areas can cause

rusting.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plated

or anodized aluminum parts. This

may result in damage to the pro-

tective coating and cause discol-

oration or paint deterioration.

773

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a

clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polish-

ing compound, solvent, or wire brushes

on aluminum wheels.They may scratch

or damage the finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-

gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Also, be sure to clean the wheels after

driving on salted roads.This helps pre-

vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-

speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners containing

alkaline or acid detergents. It may

damage and corrode the aluminum

wheels coated with a clear protective

finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and

construction practices to combat corro-

sion, we produce cars of the highest

quality. However, this is only part of the

job. To achieve the long-term corrosion

resistance your vehicle can deliver, the

owner's cooperation and assistance is

also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

on your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the

car.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings

by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor

scrapes and dents which leave unpro-

tected metal exposed to corrosion.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see if

they have been affected by water. If

braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly while maintaining a slow for-

ward speed.

CAUTION

Do not wash or drive the vehicle

with the under cover removed.

Doing so, could result in damage of

the hybrid system.

Maintenance

747

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is

regularly exposed to corrosive materials,

corrosion protection is particularly impor-

tant. Some of the common causes of

accelerated corrosion are road salts,

dust control chemicals, ocean air and

industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which

corrosion is most likely to occur. For

example, corrosion is accelerated by

high humidity, particularly when tempera-

tures are just above freezing. In such

conditions, the corrosive material is kept

in contact with the car surfaces by mois-

ture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is

slow to dry and holds moisture in contact

with the vehicle. Although the mud

appears to be dry, it can still retain the

moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate

corrosion of parts that are not properly

ventilated so the moisture can be dis-

persed. For all these reasons, it is par-

ticularly important to keep your car clean

and free of mud or accumulations of

other materials. This applies not only to

the visible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the car.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to

keep your car clean and free of corrosive

materials. Attention to the underside of

the car is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near the

ocean, areas with industrial pollution,

acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra

care to prevent corrosion. In winter,

hose off the underside of your car at

least once a month and be sure to

clean the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

775

Maintenance

• When cleaning underneath the car,

give particular attention to the compo-

nents under the fenders and other

areas that are hidden from view. Do a

thorough job;just dampening the accu-

mulated mud rather than washing it

away will accelerate corrosion rather

than prevent it.Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly effec-

tive in removing accumulated mud and

corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open so

that moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly

ventilated garage. This creates a favor-

able environment for corrosion. This is

particularly true if you wash your car in

the garage or drive it into the garage

when it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage can

contribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as

possible to reduce the possibility of cor-

rosion. If bare metal is showing through,

the attention of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-

ly corrosive and may damage painted

surfaces in just a few hours. Always

remove bird droppings as soon as possi-

ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats

and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check

under the mats periodically to be sure

the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if

you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or

chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper

containers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean water

and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-

matics oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and

air freshener from contacting the interior

parts because they may cause damage

or discoloration. If they do contact the

interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions that follow for the

proper way to clean vinyl.

CAUTION

• Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri-

cal/electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage

them.

• When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alcohol

content solutions. If you use high

alcohol content solutions or

acid/alkaline detergents, the color

of the leather may fade or the sur-

face may get stripped off.

Maintenance

767

Cleaning the upholstery and interior

trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean with a mild soap solution recom-

mended for upholstery or carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a

fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not

receive immediate attention, the fabric

can be stained and its color can be

affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties

can be reduced if the material is not

properly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-

bing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for cleaning

upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-

tions provided with the soap. Do not

bleach or re-dye the webbing because

this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-

cle become fogged (that is, covered with

an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should

be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the

directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect

the fabric’s appearance and fire-

resistant properties.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the rear window. This may result

in damage to the rear window

defroster grid.

WARNING

Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and trunk with water. The

hybrid system is located in the

engine compartment and trunk. If

water enters the engine or hybrid

battery in the trunk, electric shocks

or burns may result in serious injury

or death.

777

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty infor-

mation contained in the Owner’s

Handbook & Warranty Information book-

let in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-

sion control system to meet all applicable

emission regulations.

There are three emission control sys-

tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of

the emission control systems, it is rec-

ommended that you have your car

inspected and maintained by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with

the maintenance schedule in this manu-

al.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,

turn the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system off by pressing the

ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-

pleted, turn the ESC system back on

by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem is employed to prevent air pollution

caused by blow-by gases being emitted

from the crankcase.This system supplies

fresh filtered air to the crankcase through

the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,

which then pass through the PCV valve

into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control

(including ORVR: Onboard

Refueling Vapor Recovery)

system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel vapors

from escaping into the atmosphere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow

the vapors from the fuel tank to be

loaded into a canister while refueling at

the gas station, preventing the escape of

fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the

canister are drawn into the surge tank

through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-

trolled by the Engine Control Module

(ECM); when the engine coolant tempera-

ture is low during idling, the PCSV closes

so that evaporated fuel is not taken into

the engine. After the engine warms-up

during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens

to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

Maintenance

787

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is

a highly effective system which controls

exhaust emissions while maintaining

good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

• This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could

affect its performance, safety or dura-

bility and may even violate governmen-

tal safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modification

may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally. It may also cause

wire damage, battery discharge and

fire. For your safety, do not use unau-

thorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (car-

bon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside

your vehicle, have it inspected and

repaired immediately. If you ever sus-

pect exhaust fumes are coming into

your vehicle, drive it only with all the

windows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-

bon monoxide (CO). Though color-

less and odorless, it is dangerous

and could be lethal if inhaled.

Follow the instructions on this

page to avoid CO poisoning.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety

of automobile components and

parts, including components found

in the interior furnishings in a vehi-

cle, contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and

reproductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component

wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

779

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined

or closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to move

the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short time

with the engine running, adjust the

ventilation system (as needed) to draw

outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-

cle for any extended time with the

engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,

excessive attempts to restart the

engine may cause damage to the

emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic

converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic

converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions

must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, such

as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-

formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.

Examples of misuse are coasting with

the ignition off and descending steep

grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle

speed for extended periods (5 minutes

or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part

of the engine or emission control sys-

tem. All inspections and adjustments

must be made by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your

warranties.

WARNING - Fire

A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi-

cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flammable

objects, such as grass, vegetation,

paper, leaves, etc.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Your vehicle is equipped with a high volt-

age battery. An inappropriately disposed

high voltage battery can be harmful to

the environment and human health and

could result in death or serious injury.

To dispose the high voltage battery con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Perchlorate Material-special handling

may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-

ardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as

air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners

and keyless remote entry batteries, must

be disposed of according to Title 22

California Code of Regulations Section

67384.10 (a).

HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY

780

Maintenance

Engine / 8-2

Capacity/Weight / 8-2

Battery / 8-2

Air conditioning / 8-2

Dimensions / 8-3

Bulb wattage / 8-3

Tires and wheels / 8-4

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-5

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-7

Vehicle certification label / 8-7

Tire specification and pressure label / 8-8

Engine number / 8-8

Refrigerant label / 8-8

Consumer information / 8-9

Reporting safety defects / 8-10

Specifications, Consumer information,

Reporting safety defects

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

CAPACITY/WEIGHT

Item

Displacement

Bore x Stroke

Firing order

No. of cylinders

Gasoline (2.4)

143.96 cu.in (2359 cc)

3.46 x 3.82 in. (88 x 97 mm)

1-3-4-2

4, In-line

ENGINE

BATTERY

Gross vehicle weight

kg (lbs.)

Gasoline (2.4)

2080 (4586)

304 (10.7)

Item

Luggage volume

l (cu ft)

A/T

Item

Battery pack voltage

Cell voltage

Number of cell in the pack

Battery system weight

Hybrid

270V

3.75V

72cell (9module x 8cell)

92.6 lbs (42kg) (system)

Components powered by the battery pack

- Electric motor, Power cable, HSG, Inverter/LDC,

A/C Compressor

AIR CONDITIONING

Refrigerant type

Compressor oil

R - 134a

POE (Polyol ester)

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

DIMENSIONS

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Headlights (Low) 55 H11

Headlights (High) 55 H7

Front turn signal lights 28 PY28/8W

Position lights LED -

Side repeater LED -

Front side marker LED -

Front fog lights* 35 H8

Stop and tail lights LED -

Tail light* LED -

Rear turn signal lights 27 PY27W

Back-up lights 16 W16W

Light curtain LED -

Rear side marker LED -

High mounted stop light LED -

License plate lights 5 W5W

Map lamps 8 or LED C8W

Room lamps 10/6 or LED C10W/W6W

Luggage lamp* 5 C5W

Glove box lamp 5 C5W

Vanity mirror lamps 5 C5W

BULB WATTAGE

* : If equipped

Item in (mm)

Overall length 189.8 (4820)

Overall width 72.2 (1835)

Overall height 57.7 (1465)

Front tread 62.9 (1597)*

/ 62.6 (1591)*

Rear tread 62.9 (1597)*

/ 62.6 (1591)*

Wheelbase 110.0 (2795)

: with R16 tire

: with R17 tire

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

TIRES AND WHEELS

Normal load : Up to 3 persons

If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, you will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit

Inflation pressure

kPa (psi)

Front Rear Front Rear

P205/65R16 94H 6.5J×16 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)

P215/55R17 93V 6.5J×17 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)

420 420 420 420

T125/80D16 97H 4.0T×16

(60) (60) (60) (60)

Full size tire

Compact

spare tire *

(if equipped)

Wheel lug nut torque

lb•ft (kg•m, N•m)

65~79

(9~11, 88~107)

Item

Tire

size

Wheel size

Normal load

Maximum load

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing

the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s

time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

Yellow engine oil dipstick

Red engine oil dipstick

If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant

Volume Classification

Engine oil

*1 *2

(drain and refill)

Recommends

4.86 US qt. (4.6 l)*

API Service SM*

ILSAC GF-4 or above

5.07 US qt. (4.8 l)*

Automatic transaxle fluid

6.97 US qt. (6.6 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV

NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP4-M

or other brands meeting the above specification

approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,

Coolant

6.97~7.29 US qt. (6.6~6.9 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base

coolant for aluminum radiator)

Inverter coolant

2.39 US qt. (2.26 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base

coolant for aluminum radiator)

Brake fluid

0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel

17.2 US gal. (65 l)

Unleaded gasoline

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an

effect on fuel economy and cold weather

operating (engine start and engine oil

flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils

can provide better fuel economy and cold

weather performance, however, higher

viscosity engine oils are required for sat-

isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using

oils of any viscosity other than those rec-

ommended could result in engine dam-

age.

When choosing an oil, consider the range

of temperature your vehicle will be oper-

ated in before the next oil change.

Proceed to select the recommended oil

viscosity from the chart.

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain plug, or

dipstick before checking or drain-

ing any lubricant.This is especially

important in dusty or sandy areas

and when the vehicle is used on

unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug

and dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the engine

and other mechanisms that could

be damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Engine Oil *

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of

a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API Service SM / ILSAC GF-4).

However, if the engine oil is not available, select the proper engine

oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

the number used in registering your car

and in all legal matters pertaining to its

ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the engine

compartment bulkhead or on the floor

under the front passenger’s seat.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the

top of the dashboard.The number on the

plate can easily be seen through the

windshield from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The vehicle certification label attached

on the driver’s side center pillar contains

the vehicle identification number (VIN).

OYF089005

OYFH081004N

OBH088005N

OVG089001

VIN label

■ Type A

■ Type B

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

The tires supplied on your new vehicle

are chosen to provide the best perform-

ance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side

center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-

ommended for your car.

ENGINE NUMBER

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown in the drawing.

REFRIGERANT LABEL

The refrigerant label is located at the

front of the engine room.

The label contains the following informa-

tion:

• Type of refrigerant

• Amount of refrigerant

OYF089002

OYFH081003N OYFH083005N

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

This consumer information has been pre-

pared in accordance with regulations

issued by the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration of the U.S.

Department of Transportation. Your

Hyundai dealer will help answer any

questions you may have as you read this

information.

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed

and manufactured to meet or exceed all

applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly

urge you to read and follow all directions

in this Owner's Manual, particularly the

information under the headings

"NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-

ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have

any questions regarding the operation of

your vehicle, please contact your nearest

Hyundai Motor America Regional Office

as listed in the following:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,

Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,

New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,

Rhode Island, Vermont.

Eastern Region

1122 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831

(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,

Maryland, North Carolina, South

Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia.

Southern Region

3025 chastain Meadows Parkway suit

100 Marietta, GA 30066

(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama,

Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New

Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019

(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,

Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,

Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota,

Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region

1705 Sequoia Drive

Aurora, Illinois 60506

(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Arizona,

California, Colorado, Hawaii, ldaho,

Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,

Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue

P.O.Box 20850

Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

CONSUMER INFORMATION

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR

AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer, or

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey

Avenue, SE West Building Washington,

DC 20590. You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

810

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Index

Air bags ·······················································3-35

Air bag warning label····································3-62

Air bag warning light ····································3-38

Curtain air bag ············································3-53

Driver's and passenger's front air bag ·················3-48

Occupant classification system·························3-42

Side impact air bag·······································3-52

SRS components and functions ························3-39

Air cleaner ····················································7-29

Air conditioning ···············································8-2

Antenna (glass) ·············································4-125

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)·····························5-18

Appearance care ·············································7-71

Exterior care ··············································7-71

Interior care ···············································7-75

Armrest························································3-14

Audio system ···············································4-125

Glass antenna············································4-125

Steering wheel audio control··························4-126

Automatic climate control system (Type A) ·············4-83

Air conditioning ··········································4-90

Automatic heating and air conditioning···············4-84

Climate control air filter·································4-93

Manual heating and air conditioning ··················4-85

Automatic climate control system (Type B) ·············4-94

Air conditioning·········································4-101

Automatic heating and air conditioning···············4-95

Climate control air filter ·······························4-104

Economy air conditioning ·····························4-101

Manual heating and air conditioning ··················4-96

Automatic climate control system (Type C)············4-105

Air conditioning·········································4-111

Automatic heating and air conditioning ·············4-106

Climate control air filter ·······························4-115

Economy air conditioning

·····························4-1

Manual heating and air conditioning·················4-107

Automatic transaxle···········································5-9

Shift lock system ·········································5-12

Aux, USB and iPod port ··································4-124

Battery (12V) ···········································7-34, 8-2

Battery saver function·······································4-71

Before driving ·················································5-3

Blue drive mode ·············································4-44

Bottle holders, see cup holders···························4-121

Brake system ·················································5-14

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ·························5-18

Electronic stability control (ESC)······················5-19

Hill-start assist control (HAC) ·························5-22

Parking brake ·············································5-16

Power brakes··············································5-14

Index

Brakes fluid···················································7-27

Bulb replacement ············································7-61

Bulb wattage ··················································8-3

Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button ············5-5

California perchlorate notice·······························7-80

Camera (Rear view) ·········································4-70

Capacities (Lubricants) ······································8-5

Capacity/Weight ··············································8-2

Care

Exterior care ··············································7-71

Interior care ···············································7-75

Tire care ···················································7-37

Cargo weight ·················································5-43

Center console storage·····································4-119

Central door lock switch····································4-12

Certification label············································5-41

Certification label ·············································8-7

Chains

Tire chains·················································5-35

Changing tires (with spare tire)····························6-15

Checking tire inflation pressure ···························7-38

Child restraint system ·······································3-27

Lower anchor system ····································3-33

Seat belt····················································3-29

Tether anchor system ····································3-31

Child-protector rear door lock ·····························4-14

Climate control air filter ············4-93, 4-104, 4-115, 7-30

Clock (Digital)··············································4-123

Clothes hanger··············································4-123

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ···········4-40

Compact spare tire (with spare tire)·······················6-15

Compact spare tire replacement ···························7-42

Components of the tire mobility kit·······················6-24

Consumer information········································8-9

Coolant ························································7-24

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ·························7-24

Crankcase emission control system ·······················7-77

Cruise control system ·······································5-24

Cup holder ··················································4-121

Curtain air bag ···············································3-53

Dashboard illumination,

see instrument panel illumination

·······················4-41

Dashboard, see instrument cluster·························4-40

Defogging (Windshield)···································4-116

Defogging logic (Windshield) ····························4-117

Defroster (Rear window) ···································4-81

Defrosting (Windshield)···································4-116

Digital clock ················································4-123

Dimensions·····················································8-3

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination ·4-41

Index

Displays, see instrument cluster ···························4-40

Door locks ····················································4-11

Central door lock switch ································4-12

Child-protector rear door lock··························4-14

Drinks holders, see cup holders ··························4-121

Driver's 3-point system with emergency

locking retractor

···········································3-18

Driver's air bag···············································3-48

Driving at night ··············································5-31

Driving in flooded areas ····································5-32

Driving in the rain ···········································5-32

Driving off-road··············································5-32

ECO GUIDE gauge ·········································4-43

Economical operation ·······································5-28

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system· ·4-31

Electric power steering······································4-29

Electronic stability control (ESC) ·························5-19

Emergency starting············································6-6

Jump starting ···············································6-6

Push starting ················································6-7

Emergency while driving ····································6-2

Emission control system····································7-77

Crankcase emission control system····················7-77

Evaporative emission control system··················7-77

Exhaust emission control system ······················7-78

Engine ········································ ··················8-2

Engine compartment ····································2-4, 7-2

Engine compartment fuse ··································7-53

Engine coolant ···············································7-24

Engine number ················································8-7

Engine oil ·····················································7-22

Engine overheats ··············································6-8

Engine start/stop button ······································5-5

Engine temperature gauge··································4-42

Engine will not start ··········································6-5

Evaporative emission control system ·····················7-77

Exhaust emission control system··························7-78

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ···········7-19

Exterior care··················································7-71

Flat tire (with spare tire) ····································6-14

Changing tires ············································6-15

Compact spare tire ······································

·6-20

Jack and tools ·············································6-14

Removing and storing the spare tire···················6-15

Flat tire (with tire mobility kit) ····························6-22

Components of the tire mobility kit ···················6-24

echnical data·············································6-27

Using the tire mobility kit·······························6-25

Floor mat anchor(s) ········································4-124

Index

Fluid

Brakes fluid ···············································7-27

Washer fluid···············································7-28

Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with

combination locking retractor ··························3-19

Front seat adjustment ·········································3-4

Fuel filler lid··················································4-22

Fuel gauge ····················································4-43

Fuel requirements ·············································1-3

Fuse/relay panel description ·······························7-55

Fuses···························································7-51

Engine compartment fuse ·······························7-53

Fuse/relay panel description ····························7-55

Instrument panel fuse ····································7-52

Memory fuse ··············································7-52

Multi fuse··················································7-54

Gauge

Engine temperature gauge ······························4-42

Fuel gauge·················································4-43

Glass antenna ···············································4-125

Glove box ···················································4-119

Hazard warning flasher ·····································4-70

Hazardous driving conditions······························5-30

Headlight bulb replacement ································7-62

Headrest ·················································3-7, 3-11

High voltage battery·········································7-80

Highway driving ·············································5-33

Hill-start assist control (HAC)·····························5-22

Homelink mirror, see the Electric chromic mirror

(ECM) with HomeLink system ························4-31

Hood···························································4-21

Horn ···························································4-30

How to use this manual ······································1-2

Hybrid

HMC Hybrid system·······································H2

Sonata hev energy flow ····························H4, 4-45

State of charge (SOC) ·····································H3

The air intake of hybrid battery ························H12

The componets of hybrid vehicle ························H7

The ECO GUIDE gauge ·······························

·4-43

The ECO level·······································H2, 4-47

The EV

MODE ···········································4-53

The READY indicator ···································4-41

The service indicator·····································4-53

Hybrid electric vehicle······································4-45

Index

Immobilizer system ···········································4-7

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster ··············1-7

Indicators and warnings ····································4-53

Inside rearview mirror ······································4-31

Instrument cluster············································4-40

Blue drive mode ··········································4-44

Engine temperature gauge ······························4-42

Fuel gauge·················································4-43

Hybrid electric vehicle ··································4-45

Instrument panel illumination ··························4-41

Odometer ··················································4-41

Speedometer ··············································4-42

Trip computer ·············································4-44

Vehicle setting ············································4-51

Warning and indicators ··································4-53

Instrument panel fuse ·······································7-52

Instrument panel illumination······························4-41

Instrument panel overview···································2-3

Interior care···················································7-75

Interior features·············································4-121

Aux, USB and iPod

port ·····························4-124

Clothes hanger ··········································4-123

Cup holder ···············································4-121

Digital clock ·············································4-123

Floor mat anchor(s)·····································4-124

Power outlet ·············································4-122

Sunvisor ··················································4-121

Interior light ··················································4-78

Interior overview ··············································2-2

Inverter coolant ··············································7-24

Jack and tools (with spare tire) ····························6-14

Jump starting···················································6-6

Label

Air bag warning label····································3-62

Tire sidewall labeling ····································7-43

Tire specification and pressure label ····················8-8

Vehicle certification label·································8-7

Latch system, see lower anchor system ··················3-33

Light bulbs····················································7-61

Lighting ·······················································4-71

Battery saver function ···································4-71

Lower anchor system ·······································3-33

Lubricants and capacities ····································8-5

Index

Maintenance

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ········7-19

Maintenance services······································7-3

Maintenance under severe usage conditions ·········7-18

Normal maintenance schedule ···························7-8

Owner maintenance ·······································7-5

Scheduled maintenance service··························7-7

Tire maintenance ·········································7-42

Maintenance schedule ········································7-7

Maintenance under severe usage conditions ·········7-18

Normal maintenance schedule ···························7-8

Maintenance services ·········································7-3

Memory fuse ·················································7-52

Mirrors ························································4-31

Day/night rearview mirror ······························4-31

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with Homelink system· ·4-31

Inside rearview mirror ···································4-31

Outside rearview mirror ·································4-38

Multi box ····················································4-120

Multi fuse ·····················································7-54

Neck restraints, see headrest··························3-7, 3-11

Occupant classification system ····························3-42

Odometer ·····················································4-41

Oil (Engine) ··················································7-22

Outside rearview mirror ····································4-38

Overheats·······················································6-8

Owner maintenance···········································7-5

Panorama sunroof ···········································4-25

Parking brake·················································5-16

Parking brake inspect ·······································7-28

Passenger's front air bag ····································3-48

Power brakes ·················································5-14

Power outlet·················································4-122

Power window lock button·································4-20

Pre-tensioner seat belt·······································3-21

Push starting ···················································6-7

Rear seat ······················································3-11

Rear view camera············································4-70

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures··············7-37

Recommended lubricants and capacities ··················8-5

Recommended SAE viscosity number··················8-6

Index

Refrigerant label···············································8-8

Replacement light bulb ·····································7-61

Reporting safety defects ····································8-10

Road warning ··················································6-2

Rocking the vehicle ·········································5-30

Scheduled maintenance service ·····························7-7

Maintenance under severe usage conditions ·········7-18

Normal maintenance schedule ···························7-8

Seat belt warning ············································3-16

Seat belts······················································3-15

Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking

retractor ··················································3-18

Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with

combination locking retractor·························3-19

Height adjustment ········································3-18

Pre-tensioner seat belt ···································3-21

Seat belt warning ·········································3-16

Seat belts height adjustment ·······························3-18

Seat warmer ··················································3-10

Seatback pocket ··············································3-11

Seats·····························································3-2

Armrest ····················································3-13

Front seat adjustment······································3-4

Headrest ··············································3-7, 3-11

Rear seat ···················································3-11

Seat warmer ···············································3-10

Seatback pocket···········································3-11

Shift lock system ············································5-12

Side impact air bag ··········································3-52

Smart key·······················································4-3

Smooth cornering············································5-31

Snow tires·····················································5-34

Spare tire

Compact spare tire ·······································6-20

Compact spare tire replacement························7-42

Removing and storing the spare tire···················6-15

Special driving conditions··································5-30

Driving at night···········································5-31

Driving in flooded areas································

·5-32

Driving in the rain········································5-32

Driving of

f-road ··········································5-32

Hazardous driving conditions ··························5-30

Highway driving··········································5-33

Rocking the vehicle ······································5-30

Smooth cornering ········································5-31

Speedometer··················································4-42

Sports mode ··················································5-11

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ·············6-5

Starting the hybrid system ···································5-6

Steering wheel················································4-29

Electric power steering ··································4-29

Horn························································4-30

Tilt steering················································4-30

Steering wheel audio control ·····························4-126

Index

Storage compartment ······································4-119

Center console storage ·································4-119

Glove box ················································4-119

Multi box·················································4-120

Sunglass holder ·········································4-120

Sunglass holder·············································4-120

Sunvisor ·····················································4-121

Technical data (tire mobility kit) ··························6-27

Tether anchor system········································3-31

Theft-alarm system ···········································4-9

Tilt steering ···················································4-30

Tire chains ····················································5-35

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ·················6-9

Tire specification and pressure label ·······················8-8

Tires and wheels········································7-37, 8-4

Checking tire inflation pressure ························7-38

Compact spare tire replacement························7-42

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ··········7-37

Tire care ···················································7-37

Tire maintenance ·········································7-42

Tire replacement··········································7-41

Tire rotation ···············································7-39

Tire sidewall labeling ····································7-43

Tire traction ···············································7-42

Wheel alignment and tire balance ·····················7-40

Wheel replacement·······································7-42

Towing ························································6-28

Trailer towing ················································5-44

Transaxle

Automatic transaxle ·······································5-9

Trip computer ················································4-44

Trunk ··························································4-15

Trunk overview················································2-5

Using the tire mobility kit ··································6-25

Vehicle break-in process ·····································1-5

Vehicle certification label ····································8-7

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders (EDR) 1-6

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ······················

·8-7

ehicle load limit ············································5-38

Certification label ········································5-41

Vehicle setting················································4-51

Vehicle weight ···············································5-43

Base curb weight ·········································5-43

Cargo weight··············································5-43

GAW (Gross axle weight)·······························5-43

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)·····················5-43

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)···························5-43

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)·················5-43

Vehicle curb weight ······································5-43

Warning and indicators ·····································4-53

Washer fluid ··················································7-28

Weight ·························································5-43

Base curb weight ·········································5-43

Cargo weight··············································5-43

GAW (Gross axle weight)·······························5-43

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)·····················5-43

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)···························5-43

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)·················5-43

Vehicle curb weight ······································5-43

Wheel alignment and tire balance·························7-40

Wheel replacement ··········································7-42

Windows ······················································4-17

Auto down window ······································4-18

Auto up/down window ··································4-19

Power window lock button ·····························4-20

Windshield defrosting and defogging ···················4-116

Defogging logic ·········································4-118

Winter driving················································5-34

Snow tires ·················································5-34

Tire chains·················································5-35

Wiper blades··················································7-32

Wipers and washers ·········································4-76

Index

HYUNDAI HYBRID SYSTEM / 2

SONATA HEV ENERGY FLOW / 4

STARTING THE HYBRID VEHICLE / 6

THE COMPONENTS OF HYBRID VEHICLE / 7

Hybrid system quick reference

The Hyundai Hybrid Electric Vehicle

(HEV) uses a gasoline engine and an

electric motor for power. The electric

motor is run from a 280V high voltage

HEV battery.

Depending on the driving conditions,

the HEV computer decides whether to

use the engine or use the electric

motor or even both at times.

Fuel is saved when the engine is not

running at idle or when the vehicle is

driven by the electric motor from the

HEV battery.

The HEV battery charge must be

maintained for the times when the

engine acts as a generator, such as

when stopped at idle. Charging also

occurs when decelerating or by

regenerative braking.

Display of Hybrid system

Many displays provide information about

the hybrid system, such as, ECO level

and ECO score.

Through the ECO LEVEL, the driver can

understand the benefits of economical

driving.

If the driver is using economical driving

techniques, the ECO LEVEL rises. This

means the CO2 emissions are reduced.

In TOTAL ECO SCORE, when you reach

the maximum step of ECO LEVEL, the

ECO system calculates the score and

saves the score.

ECO level display flower mode.1

When the hybrid vehicle is started, the

ECO level step 4 is displayed. If you drive

economically, the ECO level will be

upgraded.

- However, if you do not drive economically,

the ECO level will be down-graded.

HYUNDAI HYBRID SYSTEM

OYFH043337N

ECO level display flower mode.2

In the “vehicle setting”, if you change the

animation mode to "ON", the dynamic

image will be activated.

- This provides the driver with the

dynamic ECO mode.

Total ECO score display

If your ECO level achieves the top step,

your ECO score automatically saves 1

point.

In the “vehicle setting”, if you change the

animation mode to “ON”, the dynamic

image will be on.

SOC Gauge (State of charge)

This State of Charge(SOC) gauge indi-

cates the remaining Hybrid battery power.

If the SOC is near L level, the vehicle

automatically operates the engine to

charge the battery.However, if the service

indicator and MIL(Malfunction indicator

lamp) turn on when the State of

Charge(SOC) is near L(Low), have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer immediately.

OYFH043338N

OYFH043339N

OYFH041311N

The Hyundai SONATA hybrid system

notifies customers of its energy flow

through MODE.

While driving, eleven MODEs show driv-

ers the current operating system.

Vehicle Stop

This mode means the

vehicle is stopped.

(No energy flow)

EV Propulsion

Motor power is used to

propel the vehicle.

(Battery ➞ Wheel)

Power Assist

Motor and Engine

power are used to pro-

pel the vehicle.

(Battery & Energy ➞

Wheel)

Engine Only Propulsion

Engine power is used

to propel the vehicle.

(Engine ➞ Wheel)

Engine Generation

When the vehicle is

stopped, engine charges

the high voltage battery.

(Engine ➞ Battery)

SONATA HEV ENERGY FLOW

OYFH043320N

OYFH043347N

OYFH043329N

OYFH043333N

OYFH043335N

Regeneration

The high voltage battery

is charged by the regen-

erative brake system.

(Wheel ➞ Battery)

Engine Brake

Engine braking is used

to help decelerate the

vehicle.

(Wheel ➞ Engine)

Power Reserve

When the engine oper-

ates the vehicle, the

battery is simultane-

ously charged.

(Engine ➞ Wheel &

Battery)

Engine Generation/Motor Drive

The engine charges

the high voltage bat-

tery.The motor propels

the vehicle.

(Engine ➞ Battery ➞

Wheel)

Engine Generation/Regeneration

The engine and regen-

erative brake system

charges the high volt-

age battery.

(Engine & Wheel ➞

Battery)

Engine Brake/Regeneration

To decelerate the vehi-

cle, engine braking is

used while the regener-

ative braking is applied

and also charges the

hybrid battery.

(Wheel ➞ Engine &

Battery)

OYFH043336N

OYFH043333N OYFH043349N

OYFH043323N

OYFH043329N

OYFH043332N

Starting the engine

1.Carry the smart key or leave it inside

the vehicle.

2.Make sure the parking brake is firmly

applied.

3.Place the shift lever in the P(Park)

position. In N(Neutral) position, you

can not start the vehicle.

4.Depress the brake pedal.

5.Press the engine start/stop button.

6.In extremely cold weather or after the

vehicle has not been operated for sev-

eral days, let the engine warm up with-

out depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it

should be started without depressing

the accelerator.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,

if it is far away from you, the engine

may not start.

• When the engine start/stop button is

in the ACC or ON position, if any door

is open, the system checks for the

smart key. If the smart key is not in

the vehicle, the warning, "Key is not

in vehicle" will come on, and if all

doors are closed, the chime will also

sound for about 5 seconds. The indi-

cator will turn off while the vehicle is

moving. Keep the smart key in the

vehicle when using the ACC position

or if the vehicle engine is on.

If the starting procedure is followed,

the "READY" symbol on the instru-

ment cluster will turn on. For more

details, please check Chapter 5.

ECONOMICAL and SAFE OPERA-

TION of Hybrid system

• Drive smoothly.Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate and maintain a steady cruising

speed. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts.

Don't race between stoplights.

Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible.

Always maintain a safe distance from

other vehicles so you can avoid unnec-

essary braking. This also reduces

brake wear.

• The regenerative brake generates

energy when the vehicle decelerates.

• When the hybrid battery power is low,

the hybrid system automatically

recharges the hybrid battery.

• When the engine runs in "N" position,

the hybrid system can not generate

electricity. The hybrid battery cannot

recharge in "N" position. Please check

Chapter 5.

✽✽

NOTICE

In the hybrid system, the engine auto-

matically runs and stops. If the hybrid

system operates, the "READY" symbol

is illuminated.

In the following situation, the engine

may operate automatically.

- When the engine is ready to run

- When the hybrid battery is charged

- Depending on the temperature condi-

tion of the hybrid battery

STARTING THE HYBRID VEHICLE (SMART KEY)

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, turn off

ignition and be sure "READY" lamp

is off before working under hood.

Engine may start unexpectedly.

THE COMPONENTS OF HYBRID VEHICLE

OYFH024001N

1. Engine : 2.4L

2. Drive Motor : 35kW

3.Transmission : 6AT

4. Hybrid Starter Generator (HSG)

5. High voltage battery system

6. Electric air-conditioning compressor

7. Electric Water Pump (EWP)

8. HPCU (Hybrid Power Control Unit)

9. Electric Oil Pump (EOP)

10. Brake system with hydraulic booster

THE COMPONENTS OF HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)

WARNING

In the hybrid system, the hybrid bat-

tery uses high voltage to operate the

motor and other components. This

high voltage hybrid battery system

can be very dangerous. Never touch

the hybrid system. If you touch the

hybrid battery system, serious

injury or death may occur.

WARNING

Never touch orange or high voltage

labeled components including

wires, cables, and connections. If

the insulators or covers are dam-

aged or removed, severe injury or

death from electrocution may occur.

WARNING

When replacing the fuses in the

engine compartment, never touch

the HPCU. The HPCU carries high

voltage. Touching the HPCU could

result in electrocution, serious

injury, or death.

OYFH021005N

OYFH021004N

OYFH021002N

WARNING

• Do not disassemble the high volt-

age motor connector. The high

voltage motor connector may con-

tain residual high voltage. Coming

in contact with high voltage may

result in death or serious injury.

• Your vehicle's hybrid system

should only be inspected or

repaired by an authorized

Hyundai dealer.

■ HPCU (Hybrid Power Control Unit) ■ Motor

■ HEV Battery

WARNING

• Do not disassemble or assemble

the high voltage battery system.

Doing so may result in electric

shock causing death or serious

injury.

• If you disassemble or assemble

hybrid system components

improperly, it may damage the

performance and reliability of

your vehicle.

• If electrolyte comes in contact

with your body, clothes or eyes,

immediately flush with a large

quantity of fresh tap water. Have

your eyes examined by a doctor

as soon as possible.

WARNING

Never assemble or disassemble the

high voltage battery system.

• If you assemble or disassemble

the high voltage battery system,

the durability and performance of

the vehicle may be damaged.

• When you want to check the high

voltage battery system, have the

vehicle checked and inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not touch the high voltage bat-

tery and high voltage cable con-

nected to motor (orange color).

Severe burns and electric shock

may occur. For your safety, do not

touch the cover of electronic com-

ponents and electronic cable. Do

not remove the cover of electronic

components and electronic cable.

In particular, never touch the high

voltage battery system when the

hybrid system is operating. It may

result in death or serious injury.

OYFH023003

WARNING

• Never use the package modules

(high voltage battery, inverter,

converter) for any other purpose.

• Do not use an after-market bat-

tery charger to charge the high

voltage battery. Doing so may

result in death or serious injury.

• Never get near or put a high volt-

age battery system in a fire.Doing

so may result in serious burns.

• Never drill into, strike or otherwise

damage the package modules. An

electric shock may occur resulting

in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• When the vehicle is paint baked,

do not pass 30 minutes in 158°F

(70°C) or 20 minutes in 176°F

(80°C) degree.

• When you clean the engine com-

partment, do not wash using

water. Water may cause an elec-

tric shock to occur and damage

electronic parts and components.

■ High voltage battery system

H10

Safety plug

This safety plug (1) located in the rear

trunk as shown should always be pulled

out to disconnect and turn off the hybrid

system.

IMPORTANT: Wait 5 minutes after this

lever is disconnected to work on the

car to assure all remaining charge in

the system has dissipated.

The special features of hybrid

vehicle.

Hybrid vehicles sound different than

gasoline engine vehicles. When the

hybrid system operates, you may hear a

sound from the hybrid battery system

behind the rear seat. If you apply the

accelerator pedal rapidly, you may hear

an unconventional sound. When you

apply the brake pedal, you may hear a

sound from the regenerative brake sys-

tem. When the hybrid system is turned

off or on, you may hear a sound in the

engine compartment. If you depress the

brake pedal repeatedly when the hybrid

system is turned on, you may hear a

sound in the engine compartment. None

of these sounds indicate a problem.

These are normal characteristics of

hybrid vehicles.

If any of following occur, it's a normal

condition if you hear a motor sound in the

engine compartment:

- After turning off the hybrid system, the

brake pedal is released.

- When the hybrid system is turned off,

the brake pedal is applied.

- When the driver door is opened.

THE COMPONENTS OF HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)

WARNING

This hybrid vehicle uses the hybrid

battery system inverter and con-

verter to generate high voltage.

High voltage in the hybrid battery

system is very dangerous and can

cause severe burns and electric

shock. This may result in serious

injury or death.

• For your safety, never touch,

replace, dismantle or remove the

hybrid battery system including

components, cables and connec-

tors. Severe burns or electric

shock may result in serious

injury or death if you do not fol-

low this warning.

• When the hybrid battery system

operates, the hybrid battery sys-

tem can be hot. Always be careful

because burns or electric shock

may be caused by high voltage.

• Do not drop water or liquid on to

HPCU, HSG, Motor and fuses. The

hybrid system components are

covered. If you drop water or liq-

uid on to hybrid system compo-

nents, it may result in electric

shock.

DANGER

The safety plug is attached to high

the voltage hybrid battery system.

Touching safety plug may result in

death or serious injury. Service per-

sonnel should follow procedure in

the service manual.

OYFH063020N

H11

When the hybrid system is turned on, the

engine may run or not. In this situation,

you may feel a vibration. This does not

indicate a malfunction. If the "READY"

symbol is turned on, the hybrid system

starts. Even if the engine is off, you can

operate the vehicle as long as the

"READY" symbol is illuminated.

Virtual Engine Sound System

(VESS)

The Virtual Engine Sound System gener-

ates engine sound for pedestrians to

hear vehicle sound because there is lim-

ited sound while motor power is used at

speeds below 18 mph.

WARNING

• When you start the hybrid system

in the "P" transmission position,

the "READY" symbol is illuminat-

ed in the cluster. The driver can

drive the vehicle even if the

engine is stopped.

• When you leave the vehicle, you

should turn off the hybrid system

or shift into the "P" position. If

you depress the accelerator pedal

by mistake and the vehicle is not

in the "P" position, the vehicle will

move abruptly. This may result in

serious injury or death.

CAUTION

The hybrid system contains many

electronic components. High volt-

age components like cables and

other parts may emit electromag-

netic waves.Even if the electromag-

netic cover blocks electromagnetic

emissions, electromagnetic waves

may have an effect on electronic

appliances. If you park the vehicle

for a long time, the hybrid system

will discharge.You need to drive the

vehicle several times per month.We

recommend driving at least 1 hour

or 10 miles when you drive the vehi-

cle. If the hybrid battery is dis-

charged and if it is impossible to

jump start the vehicle contact your

Hyundai dealer.

H12

The hybrid battery air intake is located

behind the rear seats.The hybrid battery

air intake is used to cool the hybrid bat-

tery. If the hybrid battery air intake is

blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat.

Do not obstruct the air intake with

objects.

✽✽

NOTICE

Clean the air intake for the hybrid bat-

tery regularly with a dry cloth.

THE COMPONENTS OF HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)

WARNING

• Never wash the air intake of the

hybrid battery with a wet cloth. If

any water enters the air intake of

the hybrid battery, the hybrid bat-

tery may cause an electric shock.

The electric shock may cause seri-

ous damage, injury or death.

• The hybrid battery is composed of

lithium-ion polymer. If you handle

a hybrid battery improperly, it is

dangerous to the environment and

may cause electrical shock and

severe burns. It may result in death

or serious injury.

• Do not spill liquid over the air intake

of the hybrid battery. Doing so is

very dangerous and it may cause

electric shock or serious injury.

• Do not cover the air intake with

objects.

• Do not input any objects into the

air intake of the hybrid battery.

Doing so may cause loss of air

intake to the hybrid battery. If any

objects enters the air intake con-

tact your Hyundai dealer as soon

as possible.

(Continued)

• Never place a container of liquid

on or near the air intake. If the liq-

uid spills, the hybrid battery locat-

ed in the trunk may be damaged.

• Secure all loads in the trunk from

moving while the vehicle is in

motion. If a sharp or heavy load

were to impact or pierce the inte-

rior trunk wall the hybrid battery

system could be damaged and/or

lose function.

OYFH021006N

H13

If An Accident Occurs

WARNING

• After parking the vehicle,shift the

transmission into "P" position.

Turn off the hybrid system by

pushing the Engine Start/Stop

button.

• For your safety, do not touch high

voltage cables, connectors and

package modules. High Voltage

components are orange in color.

• Exposed cables or wires may be

visible inside or outside of the

vehicle. Never touch the wires or

cables, because an electrical

shock may occur causing injury

or death.

• If a fire occurs,

to extinguish a small high-voltage

battery fire, the following tech-

niques can be used:

- Dry chemical

- CO2

- Large amounts of water

- Regular foam

(Continued)

WARNING

If a vehicle accident occurs:

1.Stop the vehicle and shift the

transmission into "P" position.

And then depress the parking

brake.

2.Turn off the Hybrid system by

pushing the Engine Start/Stop

button.

3.Evacuate to the safety place.

4.Call emergency services for help

and let them know the vehicle is a

Hybrid vehicle.

Do not touch high voltage cables,

connectors and package modules.

High voltage components are

orange in color.

Exposed cables or wires may be

visible inside or outside of the vehi-

cle. Never touch the wires or

cables, because an electrical shock

may occur causing injury or death.

(Continued)

For a large high-voltage battery

fire, use these types of extinguish-

ing methods:

- Large amounts of water

- Fog

- Regular foam

• If you need towing,refer to chapter

H14

When the hybrid vehicle shuts off

When the high voltage battery is dis-

charged, or the 12-volt battery is dis-

charged, or the fuel tank is empty, the

hybrid system may not operate while

driving.If the Hybrid system cannot oper-

ate, do the following:

1.Reduce the vehicle speed gradually.

Pull your vehicle off the road in a safe

area.

2.Shift the transmission into "P" position.

3.Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

4.Set the start button at OFF, and try to

start the Hybrid system by applying the

brake pedal and pushing the Engine

Start/Stop button.

5.If the Hybrid system will not operate,

refer to "EMERGENCY STARTING" in

chapter 6.

If you try to jump start the vehicle, confirm

the fuel level and exact procedure of jump

start. For details, see the "EMERGENCY

STARTING" section in chapter 6. If the

fuel level is low, do not try to drive the

vehicle on battery power. The high volt-

age battery may be discharged and the

Hybrid system will turn off.

WARNING

If a fire occurs:

1.Stop the vehicle and shift the

transmission in to "P" position,

and then depress the parking

brake. To ventilate smoke from a

fire, open the windows if possible.

2.Turn off the Hybrid system by

pushing the Engine Start/Stop

button.

3.Leave the vehicle and evacuate to

a safe place.

4.Call emergency services for help

and let them know the vehicle is a

Hybrid vehicle.

If you have an extinguisher, extin-

guish a fire carefully.

Do not touch high voltage cables,

connectors and package modules.

High voltage components are

orange in color.

Exposed cables or wires may be

visible inside or outside of the vehi-

cle. Never touch the wires or

cables, because an electrical shock

may occur causing injury or death.

WARNING

If a submersion in water occurs:

If your vehicle was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on the

flooring, you should not try to start

the Hybrid system. Turn off the

hybrid system and leave the vehicle

with possession of the key. Never

touch the high voltage cables, con-

nectors and package modules,

because an electrical shock may

occur causing injury or death. High

Voltage cables are orange in color.

Have the car towed to an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

THE COMPONENTS OF HYBRID VEHICLE (CONT.)

2015 Hyundai Sonata Hybrid

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Hyundai 2015 HYUNDAI SONATA HYBRID Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor L17040C101&L17040T101 Truck Cargo Mat & Backrest Mat TPE Custom Fit for Hyundai Palisade 2020-2024

Hyundai HYSW1500E 1500W 32cm Electric Artificial Grass Sweeper and Lawn Brush

Vevor HP121 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Kia Hyundai Santa 35320-2G720 35320-2G740

Vevor HP156 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Hyundai Accent/Sonata Tucson Veloster Kia Rio

Pyle PHYELANT16 2016 Hyundai Elantra Replacement Stereo

Hyundai HY-T26 True Wireless Earphones